595815
211
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/215
Next page
HD MEMORY CAMERA
LYT2431-037A
Detailed User Guide
GZ-EX210/GZ-
EX215/GZ-EX250
Table of Contents
Beginner’s Guide ........................................................... 5
Charging .................................................................................. 5
Recording ................................................................................ 5
Playback .................................................................................. 5
Shooting Tips ........................................................................... 5
Holiday Season/Christmas ...................................................... 6
Wedding .................................................................................. 7
Travel ....................................................................................... 8
Amusement Park ................................................................... 10
Using Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi Capabilities ................................................................... 12
Operating Environment .......................................................... 13
Precautions on Using Wi-Fi ................................................... 13
Image Monitoring via Direct Connection (DIRECT
MONITORING) .................................................................. 14
Recording the Location Information ....................................... 17
Image Monitoring via an Access Point at Home (OUTSIDE
MONITORING) .................................................................. 18
Image Monitoring via the Internet (OUTSIDE MONITORING)
............................................................................................ 20
Send Still Images via E-mail upon Detection of Face or Movement
(DETECT/MAIL SETTING) ................................................ 23
Record and Send Videos via E-mail (VIDEO MAIL ATTN.) ... 25
Changing the Settings ........................................................... 26
Setting the Password (OUT MONITORING SET) .............. 28
Setting the UPnP of this Camera (OUT MONITORING SET)
........................................................................................ 28
Obtaining a Dynamic DNS (DDNS) Account ...................... 29
Setting Dynamic DNS (DDNS) on this Camera (OUT
MONITORING SET) ....................................................... 29
Setting the Sender’s E-mail Address .................................. 30
Registering the Recipient’s E-mail Address ....................... 33
Setting the Detection Method of this Camera (DETECT/MAIL
SETTING) ....................................................................... 34
Setting the Detection Interval of this Camera (DETECT/MAIL
SETTING) ....................................................................... 34
Setting Self Recording on this Camera (DETECT/MAIL
SETTING) ....................................................................... 35
Registering the Access Points to Connect (“ACCESS POINTS”
) ...................................................................................... 35
Setting the Password (DIRECT MONITORING) ................. 40
Setting the Enforced Group Owner (DIRECT MONITORING)
........................................................................................ 41
Checking the MAC Address of this Camera ....................... 41
Protecting the Network Settings with a Password .............. 42
Initializing the Network Settings ......................................... 42
Using Smartphone Applications ............................................. 43
Indications on the Screen ................................................... 43
Transferring Videos ............................................................ 44
Transferring Still Images .................................................... 45
Changing the Settings ........................................................ 47
Using the Wi-Fi Function from a Web Browser ...................... 49
Indications on the Screen ................................................... 49
Making Camera Settings from a Web Browser .................. 51
Troubleshooting ..................................................................... 56
Wi-Fi Specifications ............................................................... 59
Getting Started
Verifying the Accessories ...................................................... 61
Attaching the Core Filter ..................................................... 62
Charging the Battery Pack ..................................................... 63
Grip Adjustment ..................................................................... 64
Using as a Hand Strap ....................................................... 64
Inserting an SD Card ............................................................. 64
Types of Usable SD Card ................................................... 65
Using the Touch Screen ........................................................ 66
Names of Buttons and Functions on the LCD Monitor ....... 67
Clock Setting ......................................................................... 68
Resetting the Clock ............................................................ 69
Changing the Display Language ............................................ 70
Holding this Unit .................................................................... 70
Tripod Mounting .................................................................... 70
Using this Unit Overseas ....................................................... 71
Charging the Battery Pack Overseas ................................. 71
Setting the Clock to Local Time when Traveling ................. 72
Setting Daylight Saving Time ............................................. 72
Optional Accessories ............................................................. 73
Recording
Taking Videos in Auto Mode .................................................. 74
Zooming ............................................................................. 76
Capturing Still Images During Video Recording ................. 76
Taking Still Images in Auto Mode ........................................... 77
Zooming ............................................................................. 79
Manual Recording ................................................................. 80
Shooting According to Scene (Subject) ............................. 81
Adjusting Focus Manually .................................................. 83
Adjusting Brightness .......................................................... 84
Setting White Balance ........................................................ 85
Setting Backlight Compensation ........................................ 86
Taking Close-up Shots ....................................................... 87
Recording with Effects ........................................................... 88
Recording with Animation Effects ...................................... 88
Recording with Face Decorations ...................................... 90
Recording with Decorative Stamps .................................... 90
Recording with Personal Handwriting ................................ 91
Capturing Subjects Clearly (TOUCH PRIORITY AE/AF) ....... 93
Capturing Smiles Automatically (SMILE SHOT) ................. 94
Capturing Pets Automatically (PET SHOT) ........................ 96
Recording while Displaying a Magnified View of a Selected
Face (FACE SUB-WINDOW) ......................................... 97
Registering Human Face Personal Authentication Information
............................................................................................ 99
Setting SMILE%/NAME DISPLAY .................................... 101
Editing the Registered Face Information .......................... 102
Reducing Camera Shake ..................................................... 104
Slow-motion (High-speed) Recording .................................. 104
Recording at Intervals (TIME-LAPSE RECORDING) ........... 105
Recording Automatically by Sensing Movements (AUTO REC)
.......................................................................................... 107
Taking Group Shots (Self-timer) .......................................... 108
Recording Videos with Date and Time ................................. 110
Checking the Remaining Recording Time ........................... 111
Playback
Playing Back Videos ............................................................ 113
Checking the Content of Videos Quickly (Digest Playback)
...................................................................................... 115
Playing a Video with Defective Management Information . 116
Playing Back Still Images ..................................................... 116
Slideshow Playback ......................................................... 118
Searching for a Specific Video/Still Image by Date .............. 118
Connecting to and Viewing on TV ........................................ 119
Connecting via the HDMI Mini Connector ........................ 119
Connecting via the AV Connector .................................... 120
Playing Back Playlists .......................................................... 121
Playing Back a DVD or Blu-ray Disc Created on this Unit .... 121
Digest Playback on a Blu-ray or DVD Player .................... 121
Editing
Deleting Unwanted Files ...................................................... 122
Deleting the Currently Displayed File ............................... 122
Deleting Selected Files .................................................... 122
Protecting Files .................................................................... 123
Protecting/Releasing Protection of the Currently Displayed
File ................................................................................ 123
Protecting/Releasing Protection of Selected Files ............ 124
2
Capturing a Still Image in the Video During Playback .......... 125
Combining Videos Recorded by Seamless Recording (GZ-
EX250) ............................................................................. 125
Capturing a Required Part in the Video (TRIMMING) .......... 126
Capturing Videos for Uploading to YouTube ........................ 127
Creating Playlists from the Recorded Videos ....................... 129
Creating Playlists with Selected Files ............................... 129
Creating Playlists by Date ................................................ 130
Editing Playlists ................................................................ 131
Deleting Playlists .............................................................. 132
Copying
Creating Discs with a DVD Writer ........................................ 133
Preparing a DVD Writer (CU-VD3) ................................... 134
Preparing a DVD Writer (CU-VD50) ................................. 134
Creating a Disc ................................................................. 135
Playing Back with a DVD Writer ....................................... 140
Creating Discs with an External Blu-ray Drive ...................... 141
Preparing an External Blu-ray Drive ................................. 141
Creating a Disc ................................................................. 142
Playing Back with an External Blu-ray Drive ..................... 148
Creating a Disc Using a Connected Blu-ray Recorder ......... 149
Dubbing Files to a Disc by Connecting to a DVD Recorder . 149
Dubbing Files to a VHS Tape by Connecting to a VCR ........ 150
Copying Files with a USB External Hard Disk Drive ............. 150
Preparing a USB External Hard Disk Drive ....................... 151
Copying All Files .............................................................. 151
Playing Back Files in the USB External Hard Disk Drive .. 152
Deleting Folders in the USB External Hard Disk Drive ..... 153
Formatting the USB External Hard Disk Drive .................. 153
Importing Files from the USB External Hard Disk Drive .... 154
Copying Files to an SD Card (GZ-EX250) ........................... 155
Moving Files to an SD Card (GZ-EX250) ............................. 156
Copying to Windows PC ...................................................... 157
Verifying System Requirements (Guideline) ..................... 157
Installing the Provided Software ....................................... 158
Backing Up All Files ......................................................... 159
Organizing Files ............................................................... 160
Recording Videos to Discs ............................................... 161
Backing Up Files Without Using Provided Software ......... 163
List of Files and Folders ................................................... 164
Copying to Mac Computer ................................................... 165
Menu Settings
Operating the Menu ............................................................. 166
Operating the Shortcut Menu ........................................... 166
Operating the Main Menu ................................................. 167
Operating the Common Menu .......................................... 167
Recording Menu (Video) ...................................................... 168
SCENE SELECT .............................................................. 171
FOCUS ............................................................................ 171
BRIGHTNESS ADJUST ................................................... 171
WHITE BALANCE ............................................................ 171
BACKLIGHT COMP. ........................................................ 171
TELE MACRO .................................................................. 171
TOUCH PRIORITY AE/AF ............................................... 171
LIGHT (GZ-EX215) .......................................................... 171
GAIN UP .......................................................................... 172
WIND CUT ....................................................................... 172
ANIMATION EFFECT ...................................................... 173
DECORATE FACE EFFECT ............................................ 173
STAMP ............................................................................ 173
HANDWRITING EFFECT ................................................ 173
HIGH SPEED RECORDING ............................................ 173
TIME-LAPSE RECORDING ............................................. 173
AUTO REC ...................................................................... 173
Wi-Fi ................................................................................ 173
DATE/TIME RECORDING ............................................... 173
FACE SUB-WINDOW ...................................................... 173
SMILE SHOT ................................................................... 173
SMILE%/NAME DISPLAY ................................................ 173
FACE REGISTRATION .................................................... 173
PET SHOT ....................................................................... 173
VIDEO QUALITY .............................................................. 174
ZOOM .............................................................................. 174
SEAMLESS RECORDING (GZ-EX250) ........................... 175
ZOOM MIC ...................................................................... 175
Recording Menu (Still Image) .............................................. 176
SCENE SELECT .............................................................. 178
FOCUS ............................................................................ 178
BRIGHTNESS ADJUST ................................................... 178
WHITE BALANCE ............................................................ 178
BACKLIGHT COMP. ........................................................ 178
TELE MACRO .................................................................. 178
TOUCH PRIORITY AE/AF ............................................... 178
LIGHT (GZ-EX215) .......................................................... 178
SELF-TIMER .................................................................... 179
GAIN UP .......................................................................... 179
AUTO REC ...................................................................... 179
SHUTTER MODE ............................................................ 180
SMILE SHOT ................................................................... 180
SMILE%/NAME DISPLAY ................................................ 180
FACE REGISTRATION .................................................... 180
PET SHOT ....................................................................... 180
IMAGE SIZE ..................................................................... 181
Playback Menu (Video) ........................................................ 182
SEARCH DATE ................................................................ 183
DISPLAY DATE/TIME ...................................................... 184
DIGEST PLAYBACK ........................................................ 184
PLAYBACK PLAYLIST .................................................... 184
EDIT PLAYLIST ............................................................... 184
PROTECT/CANCEL ........................................................ 184
COPY (GZ-EX250) ........................................................... 184
MOVE (GZ-EX250) .......................................................... 184
TRIMMING ....................................................................... 184
UPLOAD SETTINGS ....................................................... 184
PLAYBACK OTHER FILE ................................................ 184
SEAMLESS REC CTRL (GZ-EX250) ............................... 184
K2 TECHNOLOGY .......................................................... 185
Playback Menu (Still Image) ................................................ 186
SEARCH DATE ................................................................ 186
SLIDE SHOW EFFECTS ................................................. 187
PROTECT/CANCEL ........................................................ 187
COPY (GZ-EX250) ........................................................... 187
MOVE (GZ-EX250) .......................................................... 187
Common Menu .................................................................... 188
CLOCK ADJUST .............................................................. 190
DATE DISPLAY STYLE ................................................... 190
LANGUAGE ..................................................................... 190
MONITOR BRIGHTNESS ................................................ 190
REC MEDIA FOR VIDEO (GZ-EX250) ............................. 191
REC MEDIA FOR IMAGE (GZ-EX250) ............................ 191
OPERATION SOUND ...................................................... 192
SILENT MODE ................................................................. 192
AUTO POWER OFF ......................................................... 193
QUICK RESTART ............................................................ 193
DEMO MODE .................................................................. 194
TOUCH SCREEN ADJUST ............................................. 194
DISPLAY ON TV .............................................................. 195
VIDEO OUTPUT .............................................................. 196
HDMI OUTPUT ................................................................ 196
HDMI CONTROL ............................................................. 197
FACTORY PRESET ......................................................... 197
UPDATE .......................................................................... 197
FORMAT BUILT-IN MEM. (GZ-EX250) ........................... 198
FORMAT SD CARD ......................................................... 198
ERASE ALL DATA (GZ-EX250) ....................................... 199
OPEN SOURCE LICENSES ............................................ 199
MOBILE USER GUIDE .................................................... 199
Names of Parts
Front .................................................................................... 200
3
Rear ..................................................................................... 200
Bottom ................................................................................. 201
Interior ................................................................................. 201
LCD Monitor ........................................................................ 202
Indications on the LCD monitor
Common Recording Indications .......................................... 203
Video Recording .................................................................. 203
Still Image Recording ........................................................... 204
Video Playback .................................................................... 204
Still Image Playback ............................................................ 205
Troubleshooting
When the unit is not working properly .................................. 205
Battery Pack ........................................................................ 206
Recording ............................................................................ 206
Card ..................................................................................... 207
Playback .............................................................................. 207
Editing/Copying ................................................................... 208
Computer ............................................................................. 209
Screen/Image ...................................................................... 209
Other Problems ................................................................... 210
Error Message? ................................................................... 210
Maintenance
Specifications
4
Charging
0
Refer to the operating instructions found in the animation on the Detailed
User Guide.
Recording
0
Refer to the operating instructions found in the animation on the Detailed
User Guide.
Playback
0
Refer to the operating instructions found in the animation on the Detailed
User Guide.
Shooting Tips
Basic Way to Hold a Camcorder
~ Recording Stable Images ~
.
This is the standard way of shooting while standing up.
Be sure to master this basic technique in order to achieve stable images.
o
[Getting Ready]
A Open your feet to the width of your shoulders.
B Keep the elbow of your right arm, which is holding the camcorder, close
to your side.
C Hold the LCD monitor with your left hand and adjust the angle
accordingly.
Extending Your Hands to Shoot
~ High-Angle Shooting ~
.
Extend your hand when your subject is being hidden behind a crowd of
people.
o
[Getting Ready]
A Open your feet to the width of your shoulders.
B Extend your right hand and hold the camcorder over your head.
C Hold the LCD monitor with your left hand and adjust the angle
accordingly.
Caution :
0
Use this way of shooting only as a last resort as it is difficult to achieve
stable images.
0
Set to the wide angle as much as possible as the image will be prone to
camera shake.
0
Be considerate. Do not inconvenience the people around you.
Squatting and Shooting at Eye Level
.
Staying low is a common position to take when shooting small children.
By recording from the eye level of the child, you can capture all his cute
expressions clearly.
o
[Getting Ready]
A Kneel down with your left knee while keeping your right foot on the
ground.
B Place the elbow of your right arm, which is holding the camcorder, on
your right knee.
C Hold the LCD monitor with your left hand and adjust the angle
accordingly.
Panning
0
Refer to the operating instructions found in the animation on the Detailed
User Guide.
Use this method to shoot a wide angle of view.
o
[Getting Ready]
A Shoot by rotating your body instead of moving your arms while keeping
the basic way of holding a camcorder as stated above.
B Stand facing the direction where the rotation will stop.
C Twist your upper body to the direction where recording will start.
D Press the start button and record for 2 seconds, then slowly twist back
your body to face the front.
Record for another 2 seconds while facing the front, then press the
stop button.
(The 90 degrees rotation should take about 5 seconds, giving the
feeling of a slow motion.)
Beginner’s Guide
5
Holiday Season/Christmas
Record the happy Christmas celebration with your family!
.
Photo by 101st CAB, Wings of Destiny
Creative Commons Attribution-No Derivative Works 3.0
Decorating the Tree and Preparing the Dinner
The decoration of tree and preparation of dinner are part of the joy of
Christmas. Be sure to record these happy family times!
o
Decorating the tree
.
A tree is the most important thing to bring out the mood of Christmas.
Simply the scene of all family members engaging in the decorating of a fir
tree with various colorful ornaments is full of the feeling of happiness.
o
Preparing the Dinner
.
Photo by Manicosity
Creative Commons Attribution-No Derivative Works 3.0
Record the scenes as everyone helps to prepare the feast of the night.
You can film the mother who is cooking, the children who are helping, and
of course, the process of making a cake!
Recording the Christmas Party
.
Photo by InnerSpirit
Creative Commons Attribution-No Derivative Works 3.0
After all preparations, it is finally the Christmas party itself.
Not only should you record the candle-blowing scene, but also the smiles of
the family while being surrounded by good food, or even the father who is
slightly drunk from champagne!
Finding the Presents
.
For children, the greatest joy of Christmas is receiving presents the next
morning.
Their expression of delight when finding a present next to their pillow is a
recording opportunity not to be missed. Get ready to shoot before the
children wake up!
Useful Shooting Techniques
6
Wedding
Create an awesome wedding video for the bride and groom!
.
Discussing and Planning Before the Event
Before the day of the wedding reception, it is important to discuss with the
bride and groom about various details such as the order of the ceremony
and whether there are any entertainment programs or change of clothes.
By understanding the preferences of the bride and groom, you will be able
to shoot more appropriately.
o
Finding out the route of entrance
.
The highlight of a wedding reception is the entrance of the bride and groom.
Find out which door they will enter from and the route they will take from the
person-in-charge of the wedding hall in advance. Set up the tripod at a place
where you can follow the couple using zoom without having to move around.
o
Number of times and timing of clothes-changing
Find out the timing of any changing of clothes so as to capture the scene well
when the bride and groom enter again.
You can also make use the time while the bride and groom are changing to
record comments of well wishes from the guests.
Finding the Right Angle to Capture Both Bride and Groom
.
The main characters of a wedding are of course the bride and groom. Record
their expressions clearly during the toast, speech, entertainment programs,
and other scenes.
Another recommendation is to capture the face shots of the guests, then pan
towards the groom. Picture composition containing the crowd of guests only
lacks fun, so be sure to pay attention to the shooting angle and size.
Recording the Expressions and Comments of Guests
o
Setting the shot from eye level to chest level
.
You can record comments from the guest by going around asking, "Please
say a few words for the bride and groom".
This can be done at the guests' waiting room, when the bride and groom are
changing, or during the entertainment programs.
Useful Shooting Techniques
7
Advanced Operation with Two Camcorders
If video-editing is to be done, record using two camcorders so that a video
with varying scenes can be created. You can try asking a close friend who
has a camcorder at home.
Set the borrowed camcorder on a tripod to focus on taking close-up shots
of the bride and groom. In this way, the other camcorder can be moved
around to record other scenes, enabling an interesting video with changing
scenes to be created through editing and compilation.
As most people own at least a digital camera nowadays, even if you are really
unable to find an extra camcorder, inserting still pictures to the video at
various points is also a good way to add variety. Do give it a try!
o
<Camcorder 1>
Closing up on the bride and groom all the time
.
o
<Camcorder 2>
Recording the congratulatory messages from friends at the
same time
.
Travel
Capture all the good times of your domestic or overseas trips!
.
Bringing the Necessary Equipment
The necessary things to bring on a trip depends on your traveling purpose
and the destination.
For overseas trips in particular, you have to think about what to bring in
accordance to the local conditions.
Here are some suggestions for your consideration.
o
Camcorder
Think about how many hours of shooting you will usually perform in a day.
Be sure to prepare enough recording medium especially for long overseas
trips.
If you are recording in SD cards, get ready the sufficient number of cards,
including some for backup.
o
Battery Pack
Prepare a battery pack that is ready for double the expected recording time
in a day. For example, if you plan to record for 2 hours a day, prepare a
battery pack that is ready for 4 hours (actual recording time).
For a day trip, you can prepare a battery with low capacity but for a long trip,
do prepare a few batteries with high capacities.
o
AC Adapter
The JVC AC adapter supports voltages from 110 V to 240 V, and hence can
be used anywhere in the world.
Bring along the adapter if you are traveling for a long time. Charge the battery
pack while sleeping so that you can record with full battery power the next
day.
o
Power Plug Adapter
.
The shape of the power plug varies according to countries. Be sure to check
the shape of the power plug beforehand, and bring the appropriate power
plug adapter.
“Charging the Battery Pack Overseas” (A p. 71)
Useful Shooting Techniques
8
o
Battery Charger
.
Recording cannot be performed when an AC adapter is connected to the
camcorder for battery charging.
You can bring an additional battery charger to charge battery packs if you
plan to use the camcorder for recording at night. You can also charge
multiple battery packs by using both the battery charger and this camcorder
at the same time.
o
Tripod
.
A tripod is an essential item to take stable images. Select an appropriate
tripod in accordance to your purpose and style of traveling, such as a
compact one to be used on a table or one that is at least 1 m tall.
Recording the Excitement Before Departure
It may be a little abrupt to start your travel video at the destination suddenly.
Record also the preparations prior to departure if it is a family trip, or the time
when everyone is gathered at the meeting place if you are traveling with your
friends.
For overseas trips, taking a shot of the signs and displays at the airport of
the flight you are taking may be useful for future reference.
.
.
Using Pan at the Places of Interest
Tourists spots with beautiful scenery or historical sites are places that you
would certainly want to record.
To capture the magnificence of a scene which cannot be fitted into a single
frame, try the panning technique.
Refer to “Shooting Tips” found in the “Beginner’s Guide” on this website on
how to use panning effectively.
In addition, you may also like to take a shot of the signs or monuments that
can often be found at the tourist spots.
.
.
Showing Everyone Having a Good Time
When taking a video, it is rather dull to shoot only the scenery or historical
sites.
Talk about your feelings while recording the breath-taking scenery of an
attraction so that it will be an interesting scene to view later.
Useful Shooting Techniques
9
Amusement Park
Take more shots of the smiling faces of everyone in the family!
.
Taking Videos or Still Images According to the Attraction
You may choose to take videos all the time. However, you may want to take
some still images too.
The following section explains the scenarios suitable for taking videos or still
images.
o
Scenarios suitable for taking videos
.
Scenarios with changes in body movement are suitable for taking videos.
This includes situations where there are rapid changes in facial expressions
or voices of surprise and delight.
*Some amusement parks do not allow passengers to perform any recording.
Be sure to check beforehand.
[Examples]
0
Merry-go-round, go kart, coffee cup, etc.
o
Scenarios suitable for taking still images (photos)
.
Scenarios with little movement of the subject are suitable for taking still
images.
Try to take the still images from an angle such that the surroundings can be
seen clearly.
[Examples]
0
Carousal, ferris wheel, fun bicycle rides, etc.
Inducing Responses by Calling Out
.
Videos with no waving of hands nor laughter are not only dull when you view
them later, but also put the capability of the audio-recording function of the
camcorder to a waste.
When recording, induce more reactions by enthusiastically waving your
hands or shouting out "Is it fun?" and the like.
Capturing the Best Moment in a Video as a Still Image
Shots with the eyes closed are often taken by accident. To reduce such
mistakes, make use of the function to capture still images from videos.
As videos are actually continuous recording of 60 still images within 1 minute,
using this function allows you to select the best moment and save it as a still
image.
“Capturing a Still Image in the Video During Playback” (A p. 125)
.
Photo by just that good guy jim
Creative Commons Attribution-No Derivative Works 3.0
Video Playback in Progress
.
Creative Commons Attribution-No Derivative Works 3.0
.
Photo by just that good guy jim
Creative Commons Attribution-No Derivative Works 3.0
Video Playback in Progress
Useful Shooting Techniques
10
Advanced Operation with Backlight Compensation
When the subject’s face is in backlight or when the expression cannot be
seen clearly, the Intelligent Auto function of this unit automatically increases
its brightness for recording.
If Intelligent Auto fails to function as expected or if the brightness correction
is insufficient, you can increase the brightness by using backlight
compensation in the Manual mode.
“Setting Details” (A p. 86)
o
<Without backlight compensation>
.
o
<With backlight compensation>
.
Useful Shooting Techniques
11
Wi-Fi Capabilities
This unit is equipped with Wi-Fi function.
You can do the following using a smartphone or computer via wireless connection.
Name of Function Capability
Direct Monitoring
0
You can check the image on the camera via direct 1-to-1 connection (Wi-Fi Direct) with a smartphone (or
computer), without the need for an access point (wireless LAN router).
Recording of videos and still images may be performed while monitoring.
“Image Monitoring via Direct Connection (DIRECT MONITORING)” (A p. 14)
GPS Recording
0
You can record the location information of the venue where recording is taking place via direct connection
(Wi-Fi Direct) with a smartphone.
The recorded location information can be used on the Everio MediaBrowser 4 software provided with this
unit.
“Recording the Location Information” (A p. 17)
Outside Monitoring
0
You can check the image on the camera with a smartphone (or computer) via an access point at home
using wireless LAN router.
Recording of videos and still images may be performed while monitoring.
“Image Monitoring via an Access Point at Home (OUTSIDE MONITORING)” (A p. 18)
0
You can check the image on the camera via internet connection with a smartphone (or computer) while
you are outside.
Recording of videos and still images may be performed while monitoring.
“Image Monitoring via the Internet (OUTSIDE MONITORING)” (A p. 20)
Notification Mail
0
A still image is automatically captured and sent via e-mail when faces or movements are detected by the
camera.
You can also set to record videos on the camera during detection.
“Send Still Images via E-mail upon Detection of Face or Movement (DETECT/MAIL SETTING)”
(A p. 23)
Video Mail
0
Videos of up to 15 seconds can be recorded and sent via e-mail.
“Record and Send Videos via E-mail (VIDEO MAIL ATTN.)” (A p. 25)
VIDEO TRANSFERSTILL IMAGE
TRANSFER
0
You can transfer recorded videos or still images using smartphone applications (or computer browsers).
Terms Used in this Guide
0
In this guide, operations on the touch panel are described as “tap”.
0
While the names of the buttons on a smartphone are written as “MENU”
or “RETURN”, they may vary according to the smartphone in use.
Refer also to the instruction manual of your smartphone.
Using Wi-Fi
12
Operating Environment
To use the smartphone application “Everio sync.”, it is necessary to meet
the following requirements.
Android Smartphone
A OS: Android2.1 or higher
(This unit is not guaranteed to operate with all models.)
B Supports GPS function (for GPS recording)
C Able to connect to the internet or “Android Market” (required for
software installation)
iPhone/iPad
A OS: iOS4.3.5 or higher
(This unit is not guaranteed to operate with all models.)
B Able to connect to the internet or “App Store” (required for software
installation)
Computer
To check the image on the camera from a computer browser and to transfer
videos/still images, it is necessary to meet the following requirements.
A OS: Windows 7
B Supports wireless LAN or wired LAN
(For direct connections between the camera and computer, support
for wireless LAN is required.)
C Installation of Windows Media Player 12 or later
0
Confirmed operating environment:
Internet Explorer 9 or later
Caution :
0
There is no guarantee that the operations will work with all computer
environments. For example, the video download feature of mobile safari
browser, etc. is not supported.
Precautions on Using Wi-Fi
Cautions on Wi-Fi Function
0
Operation is not guaranteed on all devices.
0
This function is not designed for disaster or crime prevention.
0
To prevent the situation of forgetting to turn off the power, this unit will turn
off automatically after 10 days of continuous usage.
0
Communication may not be carried out properly near radio equipment or
broadcasting stations. In this case, change the location accordingly.
0
Radio wave interference by Bluetooth devices
Bluetooth devices make use of the same frequency bandwidth (2.4 GHz)
as that of Wi-Fi devices. Using this product near such devices may cause
radio wave interference, and result in a drop in communication speed or
connection failure. In this case, turn off the power of devices that are not
in use.
0
Security of Wireless LAN
An advantage of wireless LAN is that instead of using a LAN cable, it
transmits information using radio waves, thus enabling LAN connection
to be established within the area covered by the radio waves. However,
as radio waves penetrate through objects (such as walls) within the range
that they cover, security issues, such as interception of transmission or
illegal access, may arise if security settings are not configured.
Before you connect to the network in a wireless LAN environment, read
through the instruction manual for the wireless LAN device in use, and
configure the security settings accordingly. Failure to do so may increase
the risk of personal information being intercepted, such as user names,
passwords, and the content of your mails, or illegal access to the network.
0
Due to the design of wireless LAN, note that security may be breached by
unusual or unforeseeable means.
0
For more details on wireless LAN and network security, please consult the
manufacturer of your wireless LAN device.
0
JVC shall not be liable for any security issues, troubles, damages or losses
arising from the use of this feature.
Radio Waves Used by this Product
This product makes use of radio waves in the ISM band (2.4 GHz).
Although a radio station license is not required for using this product, please
take note of the following.
o
Do not use this product near the following places.
0
Industrial, scientific, or medical equipment, such as microwave ovens and
pacemakers
0
Specified low-power radio stations (radio station license not required)
0
Bluetooth devices
Equipment such as the above mentioned devices makes use of the same
frequency bandwidth as that of Wi-Fi.
Using this product near the above equipment may cause radio wave
interference, and result in communication failure or a drop in communication
speed.
o
Avoid using this product near a TV or radio set.
TV or radio sets make use of a radio wave frequency bandwidth that is
different from that of Wi-Fi, and therefore has no effect on communication
by this product or the TV/radio set.
However, when a TV/radio set is placed close to a Wi-Fi product,
electromagnetic waves emitted by the Wi-Fi product may cause noise to
occur in the sound or images of the TV/radio.
o
Radio signals are unable to penetrate through reinforced
steel, metal, or concrete.
The radio waves used by this product are unable to penetrate through
reinforced steel, metal, or concrete materials.
It may difficult for communication to be established if two rooms or floors are
separated by these materials.
*Communication may also get weaker when there are human subjects or
parts of the body in between the Wi-Fi devices.
o
Do not connect to wireless networks that you do not have
authorization for.
Once connected, it may be considered as unauthorized access and legal
actions can be taken against you.
Using Wi-Fi
13
o
Do not use the Wi-Fi function outside the country of
purchase.
Depending on the country, there may be restrictions on the use of radio
waves and any violations could be punishable by law.
Exporting/Bringing the Unit Overseas
Permission from the U.S. government may be required when bringing the
unit to an export controlled country set by the U.S. government (such as
Cuba, Iraq, North Korea, Iran, Rwanda, and Syria. As of November, 2011).
For more information, consult the U.S. Embassy Commercial Service.
Image Monitoring via Direct Connection
(DIRECT MONITORING)
You can check the image on the camera via direct connection (Wi-Fi Direct)
with a smartphone (or computer), without the need for an access point
(wireless LAN router).
0
Recording of videos and still images may be performed while monitoring.
.
Caution :
0
This function is not designed for disaster or crime prevention.
0
To prevent the situation of forgetting to turn off the power, this unit will turn
off automatically after 10 days of continuous usage.
0
When not monitoring from a smartphone (or computer), the focus of the
camera is fixed.
0
Recording stops when the smartphone (or computer) is disconnected.
0
Even when monitoring from a smartphone (or computer), the focus of the
camera will be fixed if not operated for more than 3 hours. (Focus works
again when the camera is operated.)
0
You may have difficulty establishing a connection via direct monitoring in
an environment where the camera is placed away from the smartphone
(or computer). In this case, connect using the access point (wireless LAN
router).
“Image Monitoring via an Access Point at Home (OUTSIDE MONITORING)”
(A p. 18)
What You Need
0
Smartphone or Windows computer
(A wireless LAN that is compatible with WPA2 is necessary.)
Necessary Settings
To operate, it is necessary to connect a smartphone (or computer) to the
camera.
There are 2 ways to connect, namely “Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)” and
“Search and Connect”.
Select the appropriate method of connection according to the device.
o
Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)
1
Tap “MENU”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “DIRECT MONITORING” (
S
) in the shortcut menu.
(Operation on this camera)
Using Wi-Fi
14
.
MENU
3
Tap “WPS”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
********************************
WPSSTOP
PASS:********************************
SSID:********************************
CONNECTING
DIRECT MONITORING
4
Activate WPS on the smartphone (or computer) within 2 minutes.
(Operation on the smartphone (or computer))
0
To activate WPS, refer to the instruction manual of the device in use.
5
A connection is established and Q appears on the camera’s screen.
.
CONTROLLED BY REMOTE
CAMERA NETWORK INFO.
CAMERA OPERATION
STOP
CURRENTLY BEING
DIRECT MONITORING
o
Search and Connect
1
Tap “MENU”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “DIRECT MONITORING” (
S
) in the shortcut menu.
(Operation on this camera)
.
MENU
3
Check the SSID and PASS shown on the camera’s screen, then add the
smartphone (or computer) to connect.
(Operation on the smartphone (or computer))
.
WPSQUIT
********************************
PASS:********************************
SSID:********************************
CONNECTING
DIRECT MONITORING
0
For details on connecting your smartphone (or computer) to a Wi-Fi
network, please refer to the instruction manual of the phone terminal
in use.
4
A connection is established and
Q
appears on the camera’s screen.
.
CONTROLLED BY REMOTE
CURRENTLY BEING
CAMERA NETWORK INFO.
CAMERA OPERATION
QUIT
DIRECT MONITORING
Using Wi-Fi
15
Operation Method
o
Smartphone (Android / iPhone)
Memo :
0
It is necessary to install the application on the smartphone.
“Installing Smartphone Applications” (A p. 43)
1
Start “Everio Sync.” on the smartphone after setting direct monitoring.
.
2
The smartphone starts to search for the camera automatically.
.
0
Once the camera is found, it will be connected.
3
A connection is established.
(Adds application screen on the smartphone.)
0
Tap “CAMERA OPERATION” on the camera to enable operations
from it.
When operating from the camera, tap J on the camera to enable
operations from the smartphone application.
0
Using smartphone applications
“Using Smartphone Applications” (A p. 43)
0
To end operations, tap “STOP”.
o
Computer (Windows 7)
1
Tap “CAMERA NETWORK INFO.” after setting direct monitoring.
(Operation on this camera)
.
CONTROLLED BY REMOTE
CURRENTLY BEING
CAMERA NETWORK INFO.
CAMERA OPERATION
QUIT
DIRECT MONITORING
0
The URL for the computer to connect to appears.
2
Check the URL.
(Adds network information screen.)
0
After checking the URL, tap “QUIT” to return to the previous screen.
3
Start Internet Explorer (web browser) on the computer and enter the
URL.
0
Using the Wi-Fi function from the web browser
“Using the Wi-Fi Function from a Web Browser” (A p. 49)
0
To end operations, tap “STOP”.
Using Wi-Fi
16
Recording the Location Information
You can record the location information of the venue where recording is
taking place via direct connection (Wi-Fi Direct) with a smartphone.
.
GPS
Memo :
0
To obtain the location information, it is necessary to start the smartphone
application and connect it to the camera.
“Using Smartphone Applications” (A p. 43)
0
Activate the GPS function of the smartphone in advance.
0
The recorded location information can be used on the software provided
with this unit.
For more information, refer to “MediaBrowser Help”.
What You Need
0
Smartphone
Necessary Settings
To operate, it is necessary to connect a smartphone to the camera.
There are 2 ways to connect, namely “Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)” and
“Search and Connect”.
Select the appropriate method of connection according to the device.
o
Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)
1
Tap “MENU”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “DIRECT MONITORING” (
S
) in the shortcut menu.
(Operation on this camera)
.
MENU
3
Tap “WPS”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
WPSQUIT
********************************
PASS:********************************
SSID:********************************
CONNECTING
DIRECT MONITORING
4
Activate WPS on the smartphone within 2 minutes.
(Operation on the smartphone)
0
To activate WPS, refer to the instruction manual of the device in use.
0
A connection is established and
Q
appears on the camera’s screen.
o
Search and Connect
1
Tap “MENU”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “DIRECT MONITORING” (
S
) in the shortcut menu.
(Operation on this camera)
.
MENU
3
Check the SSID and PASS shown on the camera’s screen, then register
them on the smartphone to connect.
(Operation on the smartphone)
.
WPSQUIT
********************************
PASS:********************************
SSID:********************************
CONNECTING
DIRECT MONITORING
0
A connection is established and Q appears on the camera’s screen.
0
For details on connecting your smartphone to a Wi-Fi network, please
refer to the instruction manual of the phone terminal in use.
Using Wi-Fi
17
Operation Method
1
Tap “CAMERA OPERATION” after setting direct monitoring.
(Operation on this camera)
.
CONTROLLED BY REMOTE
CURRENTLY BEING
CAMERA NETWORK INFO.
CAMERA OPERATION
QUIT
DIRECT MONITORING
0
The recording mode starts on this camera.
2
Activate the GPS function of the smartphone and start the application
on it.
(Check the “LOC INFO TRANS INT”)
“Using Smartphone Applications” (A p. 43)
3
Start recording.
(Operation on this camera)
.
.
11:00AM
0
Z appears on the camera’s screen.
0
Tap J to return to the previous screen.
0
To end operations, tap “STOP”.
Memo :
0
Manual recording cannot be performed.
0
It is not possible to switch to the playback mode.
0
When operations from this unit are enabled, operations from the
smartphone do not work. To operate from a smartphone, tap J.
Image Monitoring via an Access Point at
Home (OUTSIDE MONITORING)
You can check the image on the camera with a smartphone (or computer)
via an access point at home using wireless LAN router.
0
Recording of videos and still images may be performed while monitoring.
.
Caution :
0
This function is not designed for disaster or crime prevention.
0
To prevent the situation of forgetting to turn off the power, this unit will turn
off automatically after 10 days of continuous usage.
0
When not monitoring from a smartphone (or computer), the focus of the
camera is fixed.
0
Recording stops when the smartphone (or computer) is disconnected.
0
Even when monitoring from a smartphone (or computer), the focus of the
camera will be fixed if not operated for more than 3 hours. (Focus works
again when the camera is operated.)
What You Need
0
Smartphone or Windows computer
0
Wireless LAN router (use a product that has a Wi-Fi certification logo)
Memo :
0
Depending on the wireless LAN router in use and signal strength, you may
experience connection problems or slow connections.
Necessary Settings
0
To operate, it is necessary to register the access point (wireless LAN
router) for the camera to connect to.
“Registering the Access Points to Connect (“ACCESS POINTS”)”
(A p. 35)
0
In addition, it is also necessary to connect the smartphone (or computer)
to the access point in advance.
*The above settings are not necessary if they have already been set for other
functions.
0
For details on connecting your smartphone (or computer) to a Wi-Fi
network, please refer to the instruction manual of the phone terminal in
use.
Using Wi-Fi
18
Operation Method
o
Smartphone (Android / iPhone)
Memo :
0
It is necessary to install the application on the smartphone.
“Installing Smartphone Applications” (A p. 43)
1
Tap “MENU”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Wi-Fi” (
Q
) in the shortcut menu.
(Operation on this camera)
.
MENU
3
Tap “OUTSIDE MONITORING”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
OUTSIDE MONITORING
Wi-Fi
4
Start “Everio Sync.” on the smartphone.
.
5
The smartphone starts to search for the camera automatically.
.
0
If the camera cannot be found, enter the URL (LAN) displayed in
“CAMERA NETWORK INFO.” directly.
To display “CAMERA NETWORK INFO.”, refer to “Computer
(Windows 7)”.
6
Log in with your username and password.
(if authentication cannot be achieved)
0
The username is “everio” and the default password is “0000”.
“Changing the Settings” (A p. 27)
0
Using smartphone applications
“Using Smartphone Applications” (A p. 43)
0
To end operations, tap “STOP”.
o
Computer (Windows 7)
1
Tap “MENU”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Wi-Fi” (
Q
) in the shortcut menu.
(Operation on this camera)
.
MENU
3
Tap “OUTSIDE MONITORING”.
(Operation on this camera)
Using Wi-Fi
19
.
OUTSIDE MONITORING
Wi-Fi
4
Tap “CAMERA NETWORK INFO.”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
CAMERA NETWORK INFO.
QUIT
CONTROLLED BY REMOTE
CURRENTLY BEING
OUTSIDE MONITORING
0
The URL (LAN) for the computer to connect to appears.
5
Check the URL (LAN).
.
QUIT
CAMERA NETWORK INFO.
URL(LAN):http://***************
***************/
0
After checking the URL, tap “QUIT” to return to the previous screen.
6
Start Internet Explorer (web browser) on the computer and enter the
URL.
7
Log in with your username and password.
0
The username is “everio” and the default password is “0000”.
“Changing the Settings” (A p. 27)
0
Using the Wi-Fi function from the web browser
“Using the Wi-Fi Function from a Web Browser” (A p. 49)
0
To end operations, tap “STOP”.
Image Monitoring via the Internet (OUTSIDE
MONITORING)
You can check the image on the camera via internet connection with a
smartphone (or computer).
*Connection to the internet is established via a wireless LAN router.
0
Recording of videos and still images may be performed while monitoring.
.
Caution :
0
Too much usage may cause high communication fees to be incurred, and
there may be a limit to the volume of communication. For more details,
please check your Internet or smartphone subscription.
0
If the network connection is slow, video images may appear jumpy, or
audio sound may be interrupted or delayed.
0
This function is not designed for disaster or crime prevention.
0
To prevent the situation of forgetting to turn off the power, this unit will turn
off automatically after 10 days of continuous usage.
0
When not monitoring from a smartphone (or computer), the focus of the
camera is fixed.
0
Recording stops when the smartphone (or computer) is disconnected.
0
Even when monitoring from a smartphone (or computer), the focus of the
camera will be fixed if not operated for more than 3 hours. (Focus works
again when the camera is operated.)
0
To monitor images while you are out, make sure in advance that you can
establish a connection via the Internet by entering the URL (WAN)
displayed in “Network Information”.
However, you cannot monitor (operate) in the same way as while you are
out when your smartphone (or computer) is connected to a home network
via Wi-Fi.
0
You are recommended to change your password periodically. Also, avoid
using easily guessable passwords, such as birth dates.
“Setting the Password (OUT MONITORING SET)” (A p. 28)
0
There is no guarantee that the operations will work with all computer
environments. For example, the video download feature of mobile safari
browser, etc. is not supported.
Setting Multiple Cameras in the Same Network
Take note of the following.
0
When UPnP is in use, cameras that are connected to the network later will
be connected via the internet.
0
To set up multiple cameras, you need to fix the IP address for each of the
cameras (configure the LAN settings of the access point manually). In
addition, it is also necessary to perform settings of the wireless LAN router
in use manually. (For setting details, refer to the instruction manual of the
wireless LAN router in use.)
“Editing LAN Settings of Access Points (Wireless LAN Router)”
(A p. 39)
Using Wi-Fi
20
What You Need
0
Smartphone or Windows computer
0
Wireless LAN router that supports UPnP (use a product that has a Wi-Fi
certification logo)
To check whether UPnP is supported, please refer to the instruction manual
of the wireless LAN router in use.
0
Internet connection with an obtainable global IP address
Memo :
0
Depending on the wireless LAN router in use and signal strength, you may
experience connection problems or slow connections.
Necessary Settings
To operate, it is necessary to connect the camera to the internet via an
access point (UPnP compatible wireless LAN router) in the house. As such,
the following settings are required.
*The above settings are not necessary if they have already been set for other
functions.
0
Registering an access point
“Registering the Access Points to Connect (“ACCESS POINTS”)”
(A p. 35)
0
Obtaining a dynamic DNS account
“Obtaining a Dynamic DNS (DDNS) Account” (A p. 29)
0
Setting the account on this camera
“Setting Dynamic DNS (DDNS) on this Camera (OUT MONITORING SET)”
(A p. 29)
Caution :
0
Even if registration is done correctly to the camera, access may be
temporarily unavailable such as when the dynamic DNS server is down.
To check whether the dynamic DNS server is working properly, access
and check the DDNS server with a computer, etc.
Operation Method
o
Smartphone (Android / iPhone)
Memo :
0
It is necessary to install the application on the smartphone.
“Installing Smartphone Applications” (A p. 43)
1
Tap “MENU”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Wi-Fi” (
Q
) in the shortcut menu.
(Operation on this camera)
.
MENU
3
Tap “OUTSIDE MONITORING”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
OUTSIDE MONITORING
Wi-Fi
4
Tap “CAMERA NETWORK INFO.”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
CAMERA NETWORK INFO.
QUIT
CONTROLLED BY REMOTE
CURRENTLY BEING
OUTSIDE MONITORING
0
The URL (WAN) for the smartphone to connect to appears.
(Does not appear if DDNS is not set or set incorrectly.)
0
[LUPnP] is displayed when UPnP cannot be used.
5
Check the URL (WAN).
.
URL(LAN):http://***************
***************/
QUIT
***************/
URL(WAN):http://***************
CAMERA NETWORK INFO.
0
After checking the URL, tap “QUIT” to return to the previous screen.
6
Start “Everio Sync.” on the smartphone.
Using Wi-Fi
21
.
7
Enter the confirmed URL (WAN) directly.
8
Log in with your username and password.
(if authentication cannot be achieved)
0
The username is “everio” and the default password is “0000”.
“Changing the Settings” (A p. 27)
0
Using smartphone applications
“Using Smartphone Applications” (A p. 43)
0
To end operations, tap “STOP”.
o
Computer (Windows 7)
1
Tap “MENU”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Wi-Fi” (
Q
) in the shortcut menu.
(Operation on this camera)
.
MENU
3
Tap “OUTSIDE MONITORING”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
OUTSIDE MONITORING
Wi-Fi
4
Tap “CAMERA NETWORK INFO.”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
CAMERA NETWORK INFO.
QUIT
CONTROLLED BY REMOTE
CURRENTLY BEING
OUTSIDE MONITORING
0
The URL (WAN) for the computer to connect to appears.
(Does not appear if DDNS is not set or set incorrectly.)
5
Check the URL (WAN).
.
URL(LAN):http://***************
***************/
QUIT
***************/
URL(WAN):http://***************
CAMERA NETWORK INFO.
0
After checking the URL, tap “QUIT” to return to the previous screen.
6
Start Internet Explorer (web browser) on the computer and enter the
URL.
7
Log in with your username and password.
0
The username is “everio” and the default password is “0000”.
“Changing the Settings” (A p. 27)
0
Using the Wi-Fi function from the web browser
“Using the Wi-Fi Function from a Web Browser” (A p. 49)
Using Wi-Fi
22
0
To end operations, tap “STOP”.
Send Still Images via E-mail upon Detection
of Face or Movement (DETECT/MAIL
SETTING)
A still image is automatically captured and sent via e-mail when faces or
movements are detected by the camera.
Children may, for example, send still images to their parents via the camera
to inform them of the happenings at home.
.
Memo :
0
The size of the still image that is captured in “DETECT/MAIL SETTING” is
640 x 360.
0
Operation via connection to a smartphone (or computer) using “OUTSIDE
MONITORING” may be performed even during detection standby.
0
When the camera is connected to a smartphone (or computer), “DETECT/
MAIL SETTING” will be temporarily unavailable.
0
You can set to record videos on this unit automatically during detection.
“Recording on this unit” (A p. 27)
0
To prevent too many e-mails from being sent in case of detections
occurring frequently, you can set the interval of e-mail delivery.
“Setting detection interval” (A p. 27)
Caution :
0
This function is not designed for disaster or crime prevention.
0
To prevent the situation of forgetting to turn off the power, this unit will turn
off automatically after 10 days of continuous usage.
0
While on standby for notification mails, the focus is fixed. Perform the
camera settings first, then enable notification mails.
Focus may not be set correctly if the notification mails start before camera
settings are made. In this case, disable notification mails temporarily, then
enable it again.
0
Be careful not to cause too much sending of e-mails. Depending on the
internet provider that provides the e-mail service, the e-mails may be
marked as spam or the usage limited may be exceeded.
Be sure to check the terms of the internet provider in advance to find out
if there are any restrictions on the number or size of e-mails that can be
sent.
0
When setting another person as the recipient, be sure to obtain his/her
consent in advance.
0
JVC will not be responsible for any trouble that occurs upon the sending
of mails.
What You Need
0
Wireless LAN router (use a product that has a Wi-Fi certification logo)
0
Internet connection
0
Account for sending e-mails (Supports SMTP. E-mail services that is only
accessible from the web cannot be used.)
Necessary Settings
To send e-mails, the following settings are required.
*The above settings are not necessary if they have already been set for other
functions.
0
Registering an access point
“Registering the Access Points to Connect (“ACCESS POINTS”)”
(A p. 35)
0
Setting the account for sending e-mails
“Setting the Sender’s E-mail Address” (A p. 30)
0
Registering the recipient’s e-mail address
“Registering the Recipient’s E-mail Address” (A p. 33)
o
Selecting the Recipient’s E-mail Address
1
Tap “MENU”.
(Operation on this camera)
Using Wi-Fi
23
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Wi-Fi” (Q) in the shortcut menu.
(Operation on this camera)
.
MENU
3
Tap “DETECT/MAIL SETTING”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
DETECT/MAIL SETTING
Wi-Fi
4
Tap “RECIPIENT'S EMAIL”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
RECIPIENT'S EMAIL
DETECT/MAIL SETTING
5
Tap the e-mail address to be set as recipient.
(Operation on this camera)
.
SET
RECIPIENT'S EMAIL
0
An icon a appears beside the recipient’s e-mail address.
0
After setting, tap “SET”.
0
Settings will not be saved until “SET” is tapped.
Operation Method
1
Set up the camera at the recording location.
2
Tap “MENU”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
3
Tap “Wi-Fi” (Q) in the shortcut menu.
(Operation on this camera)
.
MENU
4
Tap “DETECT/MAIL”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
DETECT/MAIL
Wi-Fi
0
Images are captured automatically when moving subjects or human
faces appear on the camera’s screen. (The PHOTO icon appears on
the screen upon detection.)
“Changing the Settings” (A p. 27)
0
The captured still images will be sent via e-mail to the selected
recipients.
Using Wi-Fi
24
Record and Send Videos via E-mail (VIDEO
MAIL ATTN.)
Videos of up to 15 seconds can be recorded and sent via e-mail.
With this function, short videos can be delivered easily even on a daily basis,
such as to show the growing up of small children to their distant
grandparents.
.
Memo :
0
Specifications of the videos sent via video mail are as follows:
System: MP4
Video:
- H.264/MPEG-4 AVC baseline profile codec
- 640 x 360 resolution
- 30p frame rate
- 1 Mbps bit rate
Audio:
- Advanced Audio Coding (AAC) system
- 48 kHz sampling rate
- 16 bit
- 2 channels
Caution :
0
Be careful not to cause too much sending of e-mails. Depending on the
internet provider that provides the e-mail service, the e-mails may be
marked as spam or the usage limited may be exceeded.
Be sure to check the terms of the internet provider in advance to find out
if there are any restrictions on the number or size of e-mails that can be
sent.
0
When setting another person as the recipient, be sure to obtain his/her
consent in advance.
0
Depending on the e-mail service provider, the sending of video mail may
not be supported.
0
Too much usage may cause high communication fees to be incurred, and
there may be a limit to the volume of communication. For more details,
please check your Internet or smartphone subscription.
0
JVC will not be responsible for any trouble that occurs upon the sending
of mails.
0
Videos captured via video mail are not saved to the camera or SD card.
0
Videos that have already been captured cannot be sent.
What You Need
0
Wireless LAN router (use a product that has a Wi-Fi certification logo)
0
Internet connection
0
Account for sending e-mails (Supports SMTP. E-mail services that is only
accessible from the web cannot be used.)
Necessary Settings
To send e-mails, the following settings are required.
*The above settings are not necessary if they have already been set for other
functions.
0
Registering an access point
“Registering the Access Points to Connect (“ACCESS POINTS”)”
(A p. 35)
0
Setting the account for sending e-mails
“Setting the Sender’s E-mail Address” (A p. 30)
0
Registering the recipient’s e-mail address
“Registering the Recipient’s E-mail Address” (A p. 33)
o
Selecting the Recipient’s E-mail Address
1
Tap “MENU”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Wi-Fi” (
Q
) in the shortcut menu.
(Operation on this camera)
.
MENU
3
Tap “VIDEO MAIL ATTN.”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
VIDEO MAIL ATTN.
Wi-Fi
4
Tap the e-mail address to be set as recipient.
(Operation on this camera)
.
SET
VIDEO MAIL ATTN.
0
An icon a appears beside the recipient’s e-mail address.
0
After setting, tap “SET”.
0
Settings will not be saved until “SET” is tapped.
Using Wi-Fi
25
Operation Method
1
Tap “MENU”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “VIDEO MAIL” (
R
) in the shortcut menu.
(Operation on this camera)
.
MENU
3
Start recording.
.
0
Recording starts after the countdown (5 seconds).
.
0
You can allow the recording to be performed for 15 seconds or press
the START/STOP button to stop.
4
Tap “SEND”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
PLAY TO CHECK
STOP
SEND
SEND THIS VIDEO?
VIDEO MAIL
0
Sending of the video mail starts.
0
To check the file, tap “PLAY TO CHECK”.
0
When it is complete, tap “OK”.
Changing the Settings
To use the Wi-Fi function, it may be necessary to perform some settings on
the camera and smartphone (or computer).
0
Registering the access points to connect (wireless LAN router)
“Registering the Access Points to Connect (“ACCESS POINTS”)”
(A p. 35)
0
Obtaining a dynamic DNS account
“Obtaining a Dynamic DNS (DDNS) Account” (A p. 29)
0
Setting the account on this camera
“Setting Dynamic DNS (DDNS) on this Camera (OUT MONITORING SET)”
(A p. 29)
0
Setting the sender’s e-mail address
“Setting the Sender’s E-mail Address” (A p. 30)
0
Registering the recipient’s e-mail address
“Registering the Recipient’s E-mail Address” (A p. 33)
Using Wi-Fi
26
Menu Settings
Setting Details
OUT MONITORING SET Configures various settings related to outside monitoring.
0
PASSWORD (Default: “0000”)
Selects the password to access the camera.
“Setting the Password (OUT MONITORING SET)” (A p. 28)
0
UPnP (Default: “ON”)
Sets the UPnP of the camera.
OFF: Disables UPnP.
ON: Enables UPnP.
“Setting the UPnP of this Camera (OUT MONITORING SET)” (A p. 28)
0
DDNS SETTING
Configures various settings related to DDNS.
“Setting Dynamic DNS (DDNS) on this Camera (OUT MONITORING SET)” (A p. 29)
VIDEO MAIL ATTN. Selects the recipient’s e-mail address for video mails.
“Record and Send Videos via E-mail (VIDEO MAIL ATTN.)” (A p. 25)
DETECT/MAIL SETTING Configures various settings related to notification mails.
0
RECIPIENT'S EMAIL
Selects the recipient’s e-mail address for notification mails.
“Registering the Recipient’s E-mail Address” (A p. 33)
0
DETECTION METHOD (Default: “MOTION DETECTION”)
Sets the detection method to start recording.
MOTION DETECTION: Starts recording upon detection of subject’s movements.
FACE DETECTION: Starts recording upon detection of human faces.
“Setting the Detection Method of this Camera (DETECT/MAIL SETTING)” (A p. 34)
0
DETECTION INTERVAL (Default: “10 minutes”)
Sets the time period to enable detection again after the previous one.
“Setting the Detection Interval of this Camera (DETECT/MAIL SETTING)” (A p. 34)
0
SELF RECORDING (Default: “ON”)
Sets whether to record videos on this camera during detection.
OFF: Does not record videos on this camera.
ON: Records videos on this camera.
“Setting Self Recording on this Camera (DETECT/MAIL SETTING)” (A p. 35)
NETWORK SETTINGS Configures various settings related to the network.
0
ACCESS POINTS
Adds, deletes, or perform LAN settings of access points (wireless LAN router).
“Registering the Access Points to Connect (“ACCESS POINTS”)” (A p. 35)
0
Wi-Fi DIRECT SETTING
Configures various settings related to direct monitoring.
PASSWORD
Sets the password for direct monitoring.
ENFORCED GROUP OWNER (Default: “ON”)
Sets whether to enforce authorization of the group owner.
OFF: Set this if connection to devices that support Wi-Fi Direct fails. (When set to OFF, connection to
devices that do not support Wi-Fi Direct will be disabled.)
ON: It is recommended to set this usually.
“Setting the Password (DIRECT MONITORING)” (A p. 40)
“Setting the Enforced Group Owner (DIRECT MONITORING)” (A p. 41)
0
MAIL SETTING
Sets the e-mail addresses of the sender and recipient.
“Setting the Sender’s E-mail Address” (A p. 30)
“Registering the Recipient’s E-mail Address” (A p. 33)
0
MAC ADDRESS
Displays the MAC address of the camera.
(The above shows the MAC address when connected to an access point, while the below shows the
address during direct connection.)
“Checking the MAC Address of this Camera” (A p. 41)
0
SET FROM WEB BROWSER
Enables configuration of the camera settings from a web browser.
“Using the Wi-Fi Function from a Web Browser” (A p. 49)
0
LOCK SETTINGS
Sets a password to prevent others from seeing the network settings.
“Protecting the Network Settings with a Password” (A p. 42)
0
INITIALIZATION
Returns the network settings to their default values.
“Initializing the Network Settings” (A p. 42)
Using Wi-Fi
27
Setting the Password (OUT MONITORING SET)
Sets the password to access the camera. (Not more than 8 characters)
1
Tap “MENU”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Wi-Fi” (
Q
) in the shortcut menu.
(Operation on this camera)
.
MENU
3
Tap “OUT MONITORING SET”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
OUT MONITORING SET
Wi-Fi
4
Tap “PASSWORD”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
OUT MONITORING SET
PASSWORD
SET
5
Enter the password.
(Operation on this camera)
.
DELETE
PASSWORD
SET
CANCEL
0
Tap on the on-screen keyboard to enter characters. The character
changes with every tap.
0
Tap “DELETE” to delete a character.
0
Tap “CANCEL” to exit.
0
Tap “A/a/1” to select character input type from upper case letter, lower
case letter, and number.
0
Tap E or F to move one space to the left or right.
0
After setting, tap “SET”.
Setting the UPnP of this Camera (OUT MONITORING SET)
Sets the UPnP of the camera.
1
Tap “MENU”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Wi-Fi” (
Q
) in the shortcut menu.
(Operation on this camera)
.
MENU
3
Tap “OUT MONITORING SET”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
OUT MONITORING SET
Wi-Fi
4
Tap “UPnP”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
SET
UPnP
OUT MONITORING SET
0
Tap “ON” or “OFF”.
0
Select “ON” to enable UPnP.
0
Select “OFF” to disable UPnP.
0
After setting, tap “SET”.
Using Wi-Fi
28
Obtaining a Dynamic DNS (DDNS) Account
By obtaining a dynamic DNS account, this unit may be used on the web as
usual even if the IP address changes when it is connected to the internet.
0
Only the JVC dynamic DNS service can be set on this camera.
To obtain (register) an account, perform the following steps.
1
Access the following URL and register for an account.
(Operation on a computer or smartphone)
https://dd3.jvckenwood.com/user/
Set your e-mail address as the username.
2
Check that you have received a confirmation e-mail to the address used
in registration, and access the URL stated in the e-mail.
(Operation on a computer or smartphone)
3
Set the username and password used in registration on the camera.
(Operation on this camera)
“Setting Dynamic DNS (DDNS) on this Camera (OUT MONITORING
SET)” (A p. 29)
4
Execute “OUTSIDE MONITORING”.
(Operation on this camera)
If “OUTSIDE MONITORING” is executed while dynamic DNS settings
are enabled, the camera will access the dynamic DNS server.
5
Tap “CAMERA NETWORK INFO.” to check that the URL (WAN) is
displayed.
(Registration complete)
“Image Monitoring via the Internet (OUTSIDE MONITORING)”
(A p. 20)
Caution :
0
Registration will be canceled if you do not access the dynamic DNS server
from the camera within 3 days.
Perform the registration again in this case.
0
Registration will not be complete if the username and password set on this
camera are incorrect. Be sure to check that they are correct.
0
Successful registration will be canceled too if you do not access the
dynamic DNS server for 1 year.
Setting Dynamic DNS (DDNS) on this Camera (OUT
MONITORING SET)
Sets the dynamic DNS information of the obtained account on the camera.
1
Tap “MENU”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Wi-Fi” (
Q
) in the shortcut menu.
(Operation on this camera)
.
MENU
3
Tap “OUT MONITORING SET”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
OUT MONITORING SET
Wi-Fi
4
Tap “DDNS SETTING”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
OUT MONITORING SET
DDNS SETTING
SET
5
Tap “DDNS”, then tap “ON”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
ON
DOMAIN NAME
PASSWORD
USERNAME
STREAM SERVER SETTING
DDNS
Using Wi-Fi
29
6
Enter the DDNS settings (username/password).
(Operation on this camera)
.
CANCELSET
DELETE
USERNAME
0
Tap “USERNAME” or “PASSWORD” to display the respective input
screens.
0
Tap on the on-screen keyboard to enter characters. The character
changes with every tap.
0
Tap “DELETE” to delete a character.
0
Tap “CANCEL” to exit.
0
Tap “A/a/1” to select character input type from upper case letter, lower
case letter, and number.
0
Tap
E
or
F
to move one space to the left or right.
0
After setting, tap “SET”.
Memo :
0
Only the JVC dynamic DNS service can be set on this camera.
Setting the Sender’s E-mail Address
Sets the address to be used for sending e-mails on the camera.
Memo :
0
By using Gmail as the sender’s mail address, some of the settings can be
omitted.
Use of Gmail is recommended for users who have a Gmail account.
1
Tap “MENU”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Wi-Fi” (
Q
) in the shortcut menu.
(Operation on this camera)
.
MENU
3
Tap “NETWORK SETTINGS”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
Wi-Fi
NETWORK SETTINGS
4
Tap “MAIL SETTING”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
MAIL SETTING
NETWORK SETTINGS
5
Tap “SENDER'S EMAIL”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
SENDER'S EMAIL
RECIPIENT'S EMAIL
MAIL SETTING
0
Enter the e-mail address and tap “SET”.
Using Wi-Fi
30
.
SENDER'S EMAIL
CANCEL
SET
DELETE
0
Tap on the on-screen keyboard to enter characters. The character
changes with every tap.
0
Tap “DELETE” to delete a character.
0
Tap “CANCEL” to exit.
0
Tap “A/a/1” to select character input type from upper case letter, lower
case letter, and number.
0
Tap E or F to move one space to the left or right.
0
After setting, tap “SET”.
6
Tap “SMTP SERVER” (not necessary in the case of Gmail)
(Operation on this camera)
.
SMTP SERVER
MAIL SETTING
0
Enter the SMTP server and tap “SET”.
.
CANCEL
SET
DELETE
SMTP SERVER
0
This is automatically configured if the sender’s mail address is Gmail.
0
Tap on the on-screen keyboard to enter characters. The character
changes with every tap.
0
Tap “DELETE” to delete a character.
0
Tap “CANCEL” to exit.
0
Tap “A/a/1” to select character input type from upper case letter, lower
case letter, and number.
0
Tap E or F to move one space to the left or right.
0
After setting, tap “SET”.
7
Tap “SMTP PORT” (not necessary in the case of Gmail)
.
SET
SMTP PORT
MAIL SETTING
0
Change the SMTP port number (if necessary) and tap “SET”.
.
CANCEL
SET
DELETE
SMTP PORT
0
This is automatically configured if the sender’s mail address is Gmail.
0
Tap on the on-screen keyboard to enter characters. The character
changes with every tap.
0
Tap “DELETE” to delete a character.
0
Tap “CANCEL” to exit.
0
Tap E or F to move one space to the left or right.
0
After setting, tap “SET”.
8
Tap “AUTHENTICATE METHOD” (not necessary in the case of Gmail)
.
AUTHENTICATE METHOD
SET
MAIL SETTING
0
Tap the desired “AUTHENTICATE METHOD”.
.
SMTP(TLS)
SMTP(SSL)
SMTP
NONE
AUTHENTICATE METHOD
0
This is automatically configured if the sender’s mail address is Gmail.
9
Tap “USERNAME”.
.
USERNAME
AUTHENTICATE METHOD
MAIL SETTING
0
This is automatically configured if the sender’s mail address is Gmail.
0
Enter the username and tap SET.
.
CANCEL
SET
DELETE
USERNAME
0
For Gmail mail addresses, enter the name to the left of “@”.
0
Tap on the on-screen keyboard to enter characters. The character
changes with every tap.
0
Tap “DELETE” to delete a character.
0
Tap “CANCEL” to exit.
0
Tap “A/a/1” to select character input type from upper case letter, lower
case letter, and number.
0
Tap E or F to move one space to the left or right.
0
After setting, tap “SET”.
10
Tap “PASSWORD”.
.
PASSWORD
MAIL SETTING
0
Enter the password and tap “SET”.
Using Wi-Fi
31
.
CANCEL
SET
DELETE
PASSWORD
0
Tap on the on-screen keyboard to enter characters. The character
changes with every tap.
0
Tap “DELETE” to delete a character.
0
Tap “CANCEL” to exit.
0
Tap “A/a/1” to select character input type from upper case letter, lower
case letter, and number.
0
Tap E or F to move one space to the left or right.
0
After setting, tap “SET”.
11
After setting all the necessary items, tap “SET”.
.
SET
SMTP PORT
SMTP SERVER
RECIPIENT'S EMAIL
MAIL SETTING
0
Settings will not be saved until “SET” is tapped.
SENDER'S EMAIL Enter the sender’s e-mail address.
SMTP SERVER Enter the SMTP server address.
SMTP PORT Set this when the SMTP port number needs to be
changed.
AUTHENTICATE
METHOD
Set this when the authentication method needs to
be changed.
USERNAME Enter the username.
PASSWORD Enter the password.
Caution :
0
It is necessary to obtain an e-mail account in advance.
0
Some web-based mail addresses do not support this feature.
0
These are Gmail settings as of January 2012.
Perform setting manually if changes have been made to the Gmail
specifications.
0
To make use of addresses other than Gmail, please consult the mail
service provider (Internet provider, etc.) for information on the settings.
Using Wi-Fi
32
Registering the Recipient’s E-mail Address
Registers the e-mail addresses of recipients on the camera.
1
Tap “MENU”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Wi-Fi” (
Q
) in the shortcut menu.
(Operation on this camera)
.
MENU
3
Tap “NETWORK SETTINGS”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
Wi-Fi
NETWORK SETTINGS
4
Tap “MAIL SETTING”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
MAIL SETTING
NETWORK SETTINGS
5
Tap “RECIPIENT'S EMAIL”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
SENDER'S EMAIL
RECIPIENT'S EMAIL
MAIL SETTING
6
Tap “ADD”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
ADD
RECIPIENT'S EMAIL
7
Enter the recipient’s e-mail address.
.
CANCELSET
DELETE
RECIPIENT'S EMAIL
0
Tap on the on-screen keyboard to enter characters. The character
changes with every tap.
0
Tap “DELETE” to delete a character.
0
Tap “CANCEL” to exit.
0
Tap “A/a/1” to select character input type from upper case letter, lower
case letter, and number.
0
Tap E or F to move one space to the left or right.
0
After setting, tap “SET”.
Memo :
0
Up to 8 e-mail addresses can be registered as recipients.
Caution :
0
When setting another person as the recipient, be sure to obtain his/her
consent in advance.
0
Check whether notifications indicating errors have been sent to the
sender’s e-mail address. (Make use of a computer or similar devices as it
is not possible to check from the camera.)
If no notifications are received: Refer to “Unable to send e-mails.” and adjust
the settings accordingly.
If notifications are received: Check the content of the notification.
*Note
Do not continue sending e-mails with the same settings if you receive error
notifications. Depending on the provider, you may be marked as a sender
of spam (junk mail).
Using Wi-Fi
33
Setting the Detection Method of this Camera (DETECT/MAIL
SETTING)
Sets the detection method to start recording.
1
Tap “MENU”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Wi-Fi” (
Q
) in the shortcut menu.
(Operation on this camera)
.
MENU
3
Tap “DETECT/MAIL SETTING”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
DETECT/MAIL SETTING
Wi-Fi
4
Tap “DETECTION METHOD”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
DETECTION METHOD
DETECT/MAIL SETTING
0
Tap “MOTION DETECTION” or “FACE DETECTION”.
0
Select “MOTION DETECTION” to start recording upon detection of
subject’s movements.
0
Select “FACE DETECTION” to start recording upon detection of
human faces.
Setting the Detection Interval of this Camera (DETECT/MAIL
SETTING)
Sets the time period to enable detection again after the previous one.
1
Tap “MENU”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Wi-Fi” (
Q
) in the shortcut menu.
(Operation on this camera)
.
MENU
3
Tap “DETECT/MAIL SETTING”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
DETECT/MAIL SETTING
Wi-Fi
4
Tap “DETECTION INTERVAL”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
DETECT/MAIL SETTING
DETECTION INTERVAL
0
Set the interval to perform detection. By default, it is set to 10 minutes.
Using Wi-Fi
34
Setting Self Recording on this Camera (DETECT/MAIL
SETTING)
Sets whether to record videos on this camera during detection.
1
Tap “MENU”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Wi-Fi” (
Q
) in the shortcut menu.
(Operation on this camera)
.
MENU
3
Tap “DETECT/MAIL SETTING”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
DETECT/MAIL SETTING
Wi-Fi
4
Tap “SELF RECORDING”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
SELF RECORDING
DETECT/MAIL SETTING
0
Tap “ON” or “OFF”.
0
Select “ON” to record videos on this camera.
0
Select “OFF” not to record videos on this camera.
Registering the Access Points to Connect (“ACCESS
POINTS”)
There are 4 ways to register the access points (wireless LAN router) for
connection.
Wi-Fi Protected
Setup (WPS)
Registration
This is the easiest way of registration.
Authentication method and wireless LAN setup are
performed automatically in WPS, allowing easy
registration of connection settings between
devices.
Search and
Register
A search is conducted to locate access points.
Select and register an access point from the list of
search results.
Manual
Registration
Enter the name and authentication method
manually to register an access point.
WPS PIN
Registration
Enter the WPS PIN code of the camera to the
access point to register.
Memo :
0
By registering multiple access points, you can change connection to
another access point by tapping on the desired one from the list.
o
Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) Registration
1
Tap “MENU”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Wi-Fi” (
Q
) in the shortcut menu.
(Operation on this camera)
.
MENU
3
Tap “NETWORK SETTINGS”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
Wi-Fi
NETWORK SETTINGS
Using Wi-Fi
35
4
Tap “ACCESS POINTS”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
ACCESS POINTS
NETWORK SETTINGS
5
Tap “ADD”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
ADD
ACCESS POINTS
6
Tap “EZ REGISTRATION WPS”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
EZ REGISTRATION WPS
ADD
7
Activate WPS of the access point (wireless LAN router) within 2 minutes.
0
To activate WPS, refer to the instruction manual of the device in use.
8
After registration is complete, tap “OK” on the camera’s screen.
(Operation on this camera)
.
OK
WPS
WPA2
ENCRYPTION METHOD
SSID:********************************
REGISTERED
o
Search and Register
1
Tap “MENU”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Wi-Fi” (
Q
) in the shortcut menu.
(Operation on this camera)
.
MENU
3
Tap “NETWORK SETTINGS”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
Wi-Fi
NETWORK SETTINGS
4
Tap “ACCESS POINTS”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
ACCESS POINTS
NETWORK SETTINGS
5
Tap “ADD”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
ADD
ACCESS POINTS
Using Wi-Fi
36
6
Tap “SEARCH”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
ADD
SEARCH
0
The search results appear on the camera’s screen.
7
Tap the name (SSID) of the desired access point from the list of search
results.
(Operation on this camera)
.
SEARCH AGAIN
SEARCH
8
Enter the password.
(Operation on this camera)
.
DELETE
PASSWORD
SET
CANCEL
0
Tap on the on-screen keyboard to enter characters. The character
changes with every tap.
0
Tap “DELETE” to delete a character.
0
Tap “CANCEL” to exit.
0
Tap “A/a/1” to select character input type from upper case letter, lower
case letter, and number.
0
Tap E or F to move one space to the left or right.
0
The password is not required if the wireless LAN router is not security
protected.
9
After registration is complete, tap “OK” on the camera’s screen.
(Operation on this camera)
.
OK
WPS
WPA2
ENCRYPTION METHOD
SSID:********************************
REGISTERED
o
Manual Registration
1
Tap “MENU”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Wi-Fi” (
Q
) in the shortcut menu.
(Operation on this camera)
.
MENU
3
Tap “NETWORK SETTINGS”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
Wi-Fi
NETWORK SETTINGS
4
Tap “ACCESS POINTS”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
ACCESS POINTS
NETWORK SETTINGS
5
Tap “ADD”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
ADD
ACCESS POINTS
6
Tap “MANUAL”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
MANUAL
ADD
Using Wi-Fi
37
7
Enter the name (SSID) of the access point (wireless LAN router) and tap
“SET”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
SSID
CANCELSET
DELETE
0
Tap on the on-screen keyboard to enter characters. The character
changes with every tap.
0
Tap “DELETE” to delete a character.
0
Tap “CANCEL” to exit.
0
Tap “A/a/1” to select character input type from upper case letter, lower
case letter, and number.
0
Tap E or F to move one space to the left or right.
8
Select the type of authentication method (security).
(Operation on this camera)
.
NONE
TYPE OF SECURITY
WPA2
WPA
WEP
0
Select according to the setting of your router.
9
When authentication method is not set to “NONE”, enter a password
and tap “SET”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
DELETE
PASSWORD
SET
CANCEL
0
Tap on the on-screen keyboard to enter characters. The character
changes with every tap.
0
Tap “DELETE” to delete a character.
0
Tap “CANCEL” to exit.
0
Tap “A/a/1” to select character input type from upper case letter, lower
case letter, and number.
0
Tap E or F to move one space to the left or right.
10
After registration is complete, tap “OK” on the camera’s screen.
(Operation on this camera)
.
OK
WPS
WPA2
ENCRYPTION METHOD
SSID:********************************
REGISTERED
o
WPS PIN Registration
1
Tap “MENU”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Wi-Fi” (
Q
) in the shortcut menu.
(Operation on this camera)
.
MENU
3
Tap “NETWORK SETTINGS”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
Wi-Fi
NETWORK SETTINGS
4
Tap “ACCESS POINTS”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
ACCESS POINTS
NETWORK SETTINGS
5
Tap “ADD”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
ADD
ACCESS POINTS
Using Wi-Fi
38
6
Tap “WPS PIN”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
WPS PIN
ADD
0
The PIN code appears.
7
Enter the PIN code displayed on the camera to the access point
(wireless LAN router).
0
For details on how to enter the PIN code, refer to the instruction
manual of the device in use.
8
Tap “START”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
QUIT
THEN TOUCH "START"
TO ACCESS POINT
ENTER THIS NUMBER
PIN:********
WPS PIN
START
0
Tap “START” after entering PIN code to the wireless LAN router.
(Connection cannot be established if “START” is tapped before
entering the code.)
9
After registration is complete, tap “OK” on the camera’s screen.
(Operation on this camera)
.
OK
WPS
WPA2
ENCRYPTION METHOD
SSID:********************************
REGISTERED
Editing LAN Settings of Access Points (Wireless LAN Router)
Change accordingly such as when you want to fix the IP address for the
camera.
1
Tap “MENU”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Wi-Fi” (
Q
) in the shortcut menu.
(Operation on this camera)
.
MENU
3
Tap “NETWORK SETTINGS”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
Wi-Fi
NETWORK SETTINGS
4
Tap “ACCESS POINTS”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
ACCESS POINTS
NETWORK SETTINGS
5
Tap “UPDATE”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
MyHome
DELETE
ADD
UPDATE
ACCESS POINTS
0
Tap 3 or 2 to select an item to edit or delete.
0
To change connection to another access point, tap on the desired
access point.
6
Perform the LAN settings. (when “DHCP” is set to “OFF”)
(Operation on this camera)
.
SET
SUBNET MASK
IP ADDRESS
OFF
DHCP
LAN SETTINGS
0
After setting, tap “SET”.
0
LAN settings comprise of the following items.
DHCP
ON: Obtains IP address from the DHCP server
automatically.
OFF: Settings of “IP ADDRESS”, “SUBNET
MASK”, “DEFAULT GATEWAY”, “PRIMARY
DNS”, and “SECONDARY DNS” are required.
IP ADDRESS Enter the IP address.
SUBNET MASK Enter the subnet mask.
DEFAULT
GATEWAY
Enter the default gateway.
PRIMARY DNS /
SECONDARY DNS
Enter the IP addresses of the primary and
secondary DNS servers.
Using Wi-Fi
39
Setting the Password (DIRECT MONITORING)
Sets the password for direct monitoring. (8 to 32 characters)
1
Tap “MENU”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Wi-Fi” (
Q
) in the shortcut menu.
(Operation on this camera)
.
MENU
3
Tap “NETWORK SETTINGS”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
Wi-Fi
NETWORK SETTINGS
4
Tap “Wi-Fi DIRECT SETTING”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
NETWORK SETTINGS
Wi-Fi DIRECT SETTING
5
Tap “PASSWORD”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
Wi-Fi DIRECT SETTING
PASSWORD
SET
6
Enter the password.
(Operation on this camera)
.
DELETE
PASSWORD
SET
CANCEL
0
Tap on the on-screen keyboard to enter characters. The character
changes with every tap.
0
Tap “DELETE” to delete a character.
0
Tap “CANCEL” to exit.
0
Tap “A/a/1” to select character input type from upper case letter, lower
case letter, and number.
0
Tap E or F to move one space to the left or right.
0
After setting, tap “SET”.
Using Wi-Fi
40
Setting the Enforced Group Owner (DIRECT MONITORING)
Sets whether to enforce authorization of the group owner.
1
Tap “MENU”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Wi-Fi” (
Q
) in the shortcut menu.
(Operation on this camera)
.
MENU
3
Tap “NETWORK SETTINGS”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
Wi-Fi
NETWORK SETTINGS
4
Tap “Wi-Fi DIRECT SETTING”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
NETWORK SETTINGS
Wi-Fi DIRECT SETTING
5
Tap “ENFORCED GROUP OWNER”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
Wi-Fi DIRECT SETTING
SET
ENFORCED GROUP OWNER
0
Tap “ON” or “OFF”.
0
It is recommended to select “ON” usually.
If connection to devices that support Wi-Fi Direct fails, set to “OFF”.
0
After setting, tap “SET”.
Memo :
0
When set to “OFF”, connection to devices that do not support Wi-Fi Direct
will be disabled.
Checking the MAC Address of this Camera
Displays the MAC address of the camera.
1
Tap “MENU”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Wi-Fi” (
Q
) in the shortcut menu.
(Operation on this camera)
.
MENU
3
Tap “NETWORK SETTINGS”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
Wi-Fi
NETWORK SETTINGS
4
Tap “MAC ADDRESS”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
NETWORK SETTINGS
MAC ADDRESS
0
The MAC address of the camera appears.
(The above shows the MAC address when connected to an access
point, while the below shows the address during direct connection.)
0
After setting, tap “SET”.
Using Wi-Fi
41
Protecting the Network Settings with a Password
Sets a password to lock and protect the network settings.
1
Tap “MENU”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Wi-Fi” (
Q
) in the shortcut menu.
(Operation on this camera)
.
MENU
3
Tap “NETWORK SETTINGS”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
Wi-Fi
NETWORK SETTINGS
4
Tap “LOCK SETTINGS”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
NETWORK SETTINGS
LOCK SETTINGS
5
Enter the password.
(Operation on this camera)
.
123
456
789
0
SET CANCEL
DELETE
PASSWORD
0
Tap on the on-screen keyboard to enter characters. The character
changes with every tap.
0
Tap “DELETE” to delete a character.
0
Tap “CANCEL” to exit.
0
Tap E or F to move one space to the left or right.
0
After setting, tap “SET”.
Initializing the Network Settings
Returns the network settings to their default values.
1
Tap “MENU”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Wi-Fi” (
Q
) in the shortcut menu.
(Operation on this camera)
.
MENU
3
Tap “NETWORK SETTINGS”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
Wi-Fi
NETWORK SETTINGS
4
Tap “INITIALIZATION”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
INITIALIZATION
NETWORK SETTINGS
5
Tap “YES”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
NOYES
RESET TO THE FACTORY PRESET?
DO YOU WANT THE SETTINGS
INITIALIZATION
0
To cancel, tap “NO”.
0
When “YES” is tapped, the network settings return to their default
values.
Using Wi-Fi
42
Using Smartphone Applications
By using smartphone applications, you can connect to the camera and make
use of the Wi-Fi function.
Installing Smartphone Applications
o
Android Smartphone
1
Tap [Market] on the application list.
2
Search for the “Everio Sync.” application.
3
Tap on the “Everio Sync.” application.
0
The detailed information of the application is displayed.
4
Tap [Download].
0
For applications that access data or functions of this unit, a screen
that shows the data or functions that will be used is displayed.
5
Confirm the content and tap [Agree and Download].
0
Downloading starts.
Deleting the Application
A Tap [Market] on the application list.
B Press the menu button and tap [My apps].
0
A list of previously downloaded applications is displayed.
C Tap on the “(pending)” application.
D Tap [Uninstall], then tap [OK].
Memo :
The specifications of Android Market are subject to changes without prior
notice.
For operating details, refer to the help file of Android Market.
o
iPhone/iPad
1
Tap [App Store] on the home screen.
2
Search for the “Everio Sync.” application.
3
Tap on the “Everio Sync.” application.
0
The detailed information of the application is displayed.
4
Tap [FREE]F[INSTALL].
0
Enter your password on the password entry screen.
0
Downloading starts.
0
The downloaded application will be added to the home screen
automatically.
Deleting the Application
A Press and hold the “Everio Sync.” application on the home screen.
B Tap L to confirm the deletion.
Memo :
The specifications of App Store are subject to changes without prior
notice.
For operating details, refer to the help file of App Store.
Operating the Smartphone Applications
0
Indications on the screen
“Indications on the Screen” (A p. 43)
0
Transferring videos
“Transferring Videos” (A p. 44)
0
Transferring still images
“Transferring Still Images” (A p. 45)
0
Changing the settings
“Changing the Settings” (A p. 47)
Indications on the Screen
Android Smartphone
o
Recording Screen
.
To Index Screen
Still Image Recording Button
Video Recording Start Button
Zoom Button
Zoom Position
Enable/Disable GPS
(icon shown is when
disabled)
Running on Battery (icon
shown on left is when battery
power is less than 30 %)
Running on AC Adapter
Recording in Progress
Record-Standby
Video Recording Stop Button
o
Video Index Screen
.
To Still Image Index Screen
To Recording Screen
Recording Date/Time
Thumbnail
o
Still Image Index Screen
.
To Recording Screen
Recording Date/Time
Thumbnail
To Video Index Screen
0
To exit the application, press the “Return” button.
iPhone
o
Recording Screen
.
To Still Image Index Screen
To Video Index Screen
To Settings Screen
Using Wi-Fi
43
Caution :
0
“Everio Sync.” for iPhone/iPad cannot be used when the iPhone/iPad is
connected to the mobile phone network. To make use of this feature,
connect to the camera or an access point via Wi-Fi.
o
Video Index Screen
.
To Still Image Index Screen
To Recording Screen
o
Still Image Index Screen
.
To Video Index Screen
To Recording Screen
0
To exit the application, press the “Home” button.
Transferring Videos
You can transfer recorded videos to your smartphone.
0
The video to be forwarded is converted to the following format.
System: MP4
Video:
- H.264/MPEG-4 AVC baseline profile codec
- 640 x 360 resolution
- 30p frame rate
- 1 Mbps bit rate
Audio:
- Advanced Audio Coding (AAC) system
- 48 kHz sampling rate
- 16 bit
- 2 channels
1
Start “Everio Sync.” on the smartphone.
.
2
Tap
U
.
.
3
Tap on the thumbnail to transfer.
.
4
Tap on the start point (starting time) of the video to transfer.
Using Wi-Fi
44
.
0
The start point and length of video are displayed in the unit set in “VID
LENGTH TO TRANS”. (Display shown is when set to 30 seconds)
0
To have a more detailed setting for the start point and length of video,
tap “MANUAL”.
0
A progress status is displayed on the smartphone during preparation
for the transfer and while transferring.
0
To cancel the transfer, tap “CANCEL”.
5
Set the start point and length of video, then tap “TRANSFER”.
(only when MANUAL is tapped in step 4)
.
0
A progress status is displayed on the smartphone during preparation
for the transfer and while transferring.
0
To cancel the transfer, tap “CANCEL”.
6
After transferring is complete, tap “OK”.
.
0
To play back the video, tap “CHECK”. (Android only)
0
To upload (share) the video, tap “SHARE”. (Android only)
Tap the desired service to start the uploading process.
To make use of a service, it is necessary to perform registration
beforehand.
Transferring Still Images
You can transfer recorded still images to your smartphone.
1
Start “Everio Sync.” on the smartphone.
.
2
(For Android) Tap
U
.
(For iPhone) Tap
B
.
Using Wi-Fi
45
.
3
Tap V. (Android only)
.
4
Tap on the thumbnail to transfer.
.
0
A progress status is displayed on the smartphone during preparation
for the transfer and while transferring.
0
To cancel the transfer, tap “CANCEL”.
5
After transferring is complete, tap “OK”.
.
0
To play back the still image, tap “CHECK”. (Android only)
0
To upload (share) the still image, tap “SHARE”. (Android only)
Tap the desired service to start the uploading process.
To make use of a service, it is necessary to perform registration
beforehand.
Using Wi-Fi
46
Changing the Settings
You can change the settings of the smartphone applications.
o
Android Smartphone
1
Press the MENU button.
.
2
Tap “SET”.
.
3
Change the settings on the menu as desired.
.
Item Details
MONITORING Turns monitoring of the recording screen on/
off.
LOC INFO TRANS INT Sets the time interval for sending location
information.
VID LENGTH TO
TRANS
Sets the length of video to transfer.
URL Enter the URL when using outside monitoring.
HTTP
AUTHORIZATION
Enter the required username and password
when using outside monitoring.
The username is “everio” (fixed) and the default
password is “0000”.
(can be changed from camera)
CHANGE
BACKGROUND
COLOR
Changes the background.
LICENSE
AGREEMENT
Displays the license agreement of the
smartphone application.
Memo :
0
When connecting to outside monitoring, you will be prompted to enter the
URL or HTTP authorization if they are not entered or entered incorrectly.
Using Wi-Fi
47
o
iPhone
1
Tap “Q”.
.
2
Change the settings on the menu as desired.
.
Item
Details
MONITORING Turns monitoring of the recording screen on/
off.
LOC INFO TRANS INT Sets the time interval for sending location
information.
CHANGE
BACKGROUND
COLOR
Changes the background.
LENGTH OF VIDEO Sets the length of video to transfer.
URL Enter the URL when using outside monitoring.
USERNAME Enter the required username when using
outside monitoring. The username is “everio”.
(fixed)
PASSWORD Enter the required password when using
outside monitoring. By default, the password is
“0000”.
(can be changed from camera)
Memo :
0
When connecting to outside monitoring, you will be prompted to enter the
URL, username, or password if they are not entered or entered incorrectly.
Using Wi-Fi
48
Using the Wi-Fi Function from a Web Browser
You can connect to the camera and make use of the Wi-Fi function from the web browser of a computer.
0
Indications on the screen
“Indications on the Screen” (A p. 49)
0
Changing the settings
“Making Camera Settings from a Web Browser” (A p. 51)
Indications on the Screen
o
Recording Screen
.
Full HD: 1920x1080 / MPEG-2 TS format
MotionJPEG: 640x360 / MotionJPEG format
SD: 720x480 / MPEG-2 TS format
Stream Format Selection (click “SET” to apply)Select the video format when
monitoring from a browser.
To Still Image Index Screen
To DETECT/MAIL SETTING Screen
To Video Index Screen
Reload
Caution :
0
Features of the stream format are as follows:
Full HD/SD (MPEG-2 TS format)
- Sound of the camera can be checked from the browser.
- Recording and zoom operations cannot be performed from the browser.
MotionJPEG
- Sound of the camera cannot be played back from the browser.
- Recording and zoom operations can be performed from the browser.
0
The monitor’s image stops automatically after monitoring is performed continuously for 12 hours in Full HD or SD. (To resume, press the reload button)
0
To use Full HD or SD, it is necessary to install Media Player 12 in advance.
0
When the video recording quality is set to SSW/SEW on the camera, Full HD will not take effect even if selected.
0
The full screen button is not displayed when the stream format is MotionJPEG.
0
Lagging of the screen may be caused by the network speed or computer performance.
0
If lagging is severe, reload the screen regularly.
(It may take some time for the screen to be displayed after reloading.)
0
For Full HD, make use of a computer with the following system requirements.
CPU Intel Core 2 Duo 2 GHz or higher
2 GB memory or higher
Using Wi-Fi
49
o
Video Index Screen
.
Page Forward/Back
To Recording Screen
0
To download a video, click on the thumbnail.
o
Still Image Index Screen
.
0
To download a still image, click on the thumbnail.
o
DETECT/MAIL SETTING Screen
Notification mail settings such as detection method and recipient’s e-mail address can be changed even when the camera is out of reach.
.
*A check mark appears on the selected address.
Registered e-mail addresses of recipients in Everio (Up to 8)
(click “REG.” to apply)
Notification Mail Settings
Using Wi-Fi
50
Making Camera Settings from a Web Browser
You can change the camera settings from a web browser.
1
Tap “MENU”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Wi-Fi” (
Q
) in the shortcut menu.
(Operation on this camera)
.
MENU
3
Tap “NETWORK SETTINGS”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
Wi-Fi
NETWORK SETTINGS
4
Tap “SET FROM WEB BROWSER”.
(Operation on this camera)
.
NETWORK SETTINGS
SET FROM WEB BROWSER
5
Check the SSID and PASS shown on the camera’s screen, then register
them on the computer to connect.
(Operation on this camera)
.
WPS
********************************
QUIT
PASS:********************************
SSID:********************************
CONNECT USING Wi-Fi
SET FROM WEB BROWSER
0
When the computer is connected to the camera, a URL appears on
the camera.
6
Check the URL shown on the camera’s screen, then enter it on the
Internet Explorer (web browser).
(Operation on this camera)
.
QUIT
FROM YOUR WEB BROWSER
TO THE FOLLOWING URL
CHANGE SETTING BY CONNECTING
SET FROM WEB BROWSER
http://***.***.***.***:*****/
0
To exit, tap “QUIT”.
You can change the Wi-Fi function of the camera from a web
browser.
“Adding/Changing/Deleting an Access Point” (A p. 52)
“ OUT MONITORING SET ” (A p. 53)
“ Wi-Fi DIRECT SETTING ” (A p. 53)
“ MAIL SETTING ” (A p. 53)
Using Wi-Fi
51
Adding/Changing/Deleting an Access Point
To search and add “ACCESS POINTS”
1
Click “ACCESS POINTS”.
.
2
Click “SEARCH”.
.
3
Click on the access point you want to add.
.
0
Click “SEARCH AGAIN” to perform search for an access point again.
4
Enter the password, and click “REG.”.
.
0
Password entry is not required if the access point is security
protected.
5
Click “OK”.
.
To add “ACCESS POINTS” manually
1
Click “ACCESS POINTS”.
.
2
Click “ADD”.
.
3
Enter “SSID”, “TYPE OF SECURITY”, and “PASSWORD”, and click
“REG.”.
.
.
0
To configure the LAN settings manually, set “DHCP” to OFF, and
enter the necessary information manually.
4
Click “OK”.
.
To change (or delete) an “ACCESS POINTS” registration
1
Click “ACCESS POINTS”.
.
2
Click on a registered access point.
Using Wi-Fi
52
.
3
After changes are made, click “REG.”.
.
.
0
Click “DELETE” on this screen to delete the registered access point.
4
Click “OK”.
.
OUT MONITORING SET
To change “OUT MONITORING SET”
1
Click “OUT MONITORING SET”.
.
2
After changes are made, click “REG.”.
.
0
Click “DELETE” on this screen to delete the registered access point.
3
Click “OK”.
.
Wi-Fi DIRECT SETTING
To change “Wi-Fi DIRECT SETTING”
1
Click “Wi-Fi DIRECT SETTING”.
.
2
After changes are made, click “REG.”.
.
0
Click “DELETE” on this screen to delete the registered access point.
3
Click “OK”.
.
MAIL SETTING
To change “SENDER'S EMAIL” settings
1
Click “MAIL SETTING”.
.
2
Click “SENDER'S EMAIL”.
Using Wi-Fi
53
.
3
Enter the necessary information, and click “REG.”.
.
4
Click “OK”.
.
To add a “RECIPIENT'S EMAIL”
1
Click “MAIL SETTING”.
.
2
Click “RECIPIENT'S EMAIL”.
.
3
Click “ADD”.
.
4
Enter the mail address, and click “REG.”.
.
0
Select the checkbox for “VIDEO MAIL” and “DETECT/MAIL” to set
the address as the recipient.
5
Click “OK”.
.
To change or delete a “RECIPIENT'S EMAIL”
1
Click “MAIL SETTING”.
.
2
Click “RECIPIENT'S EMAIL”.
.
3
Click on the mail address you want to change.
.
4
After changes are made, click “REG.”.
.
0
Click “DELETE” on this screen to delete the registered address.
5
Click “OK”.
Using Wi-Fi
54
.
To change “VIDEO MAIL SETTINGS” settings
1
Click “MAIL SETTING”.
.
2
Click “VIDEO MAIL SETTINGS”.
.
3
After changes are made, click “REG.”.
.
4
Click “OK”.
.
To change “DETECT/MAIL SETTING”
1
Click “MAIL SETTING”.
.
2
Click “DETECT/MAIL SETTING”.
.
3
After changes are made, click “REG.”.
.
4
Click “OK”.
.
Using Wi-Fi
55
Troubleshooting
Direct Monitoring
Trouble Action
Unable to connect to camera.
(URL required)
0
Check whether the Wi-Fi connection is established successfully.
0
Check whether Wi-Fi is connected to “DIRECT-**EVERIO”.
0
Check whether the smartphone (or computer) is connected to the camera.
0
Try again after powering off and on the camera and the terminal (smartphone or computer).
Operations from this unit do not work when
direct monitoring is in use.
0
Operations cannot be performed from this unit when direct monitoring is in use.
Tap “CAMERA OPERATION” on the screen to enable operations from this unit.
When operations from this unit are enabled, operations from the smartphone (or computer) do not work.
Recording stops when the Android / iPhone
application or web browser is closed.
0
When the Android / iPhone application or web browser is closed during recording, the camera gets
disconnected and recording stops.
Unable to browse internet on the computer
when it is connected to the camera.
0
The camera operates as an access point during direct monitoring.
Most computers (or smartphones) cannot be connected to multiple access points at the same time.
As such, internet browsing becomes temporarily unavailable if the computer (or smartphone) has been
connected to the internet via wireless LAN.
0
Reconnect the computer to the wireless LAN router that is usually used for internet connection. If the
computer connects to the camera unintentionally, remove the camera connection from the computer. (The
registered name is “DIRECT-**EVERIO”.)
0
Stop direct monitoring on the camera.
Video or audio is interrupted or delayed
0
If the network speed is slow, videos and audio sound may be interrupted, or delay may become significant.
0
(For web browser) Lagging may become significant due to the performance of the computer.
If the stream format is set to “Full HD”, change to “SD” or “Motion-JPEG” and try again.
“Wi-Fi Specifications” (A p. 59)
0
(For web browser) If lagging is severe, reload the screen regularly.
0
(For smartphone) Try to change the place and time to locate an environment with good signal strength.
The unit turns off automatically.
0
To prevent the situation of forgetting to turn off the power, this unit will turn off automatically after 10 days
of continuous usage.
Unable to set focus.
0
When not monitoring from a smartphone (or computer), the focus of the camera is fixed.
0
Even when monitoring from a smartphone (or computer), the focus of the camera will be fixed if not
operated for more than 3 hours. (Focus works again when the camera is operated.)
Connection gets disconnected, or a
“UNABLE TO CONNECT” message is
displayed
0
Establish connection again at a place with good signal strength. Transmission speed may drop, or
connection may fail if the devices are placed too far away from each other, when there are objects in
between, or when microwave ovens or other wireless devices are in use.
0
If connection cannot be established again, restart the terminal (smartphone or computer).
0
If the camera is too far away from the smartphone (or computer), connection for direct monitoring may be
difficult to be established depending on the environment. In this case, connect via an access point (wireless
LAN router).
Access Point (Wireless LAN Router)
Trouble
Action
Unable to find an access point (wireless LAN
router).
0
Check whether the distance from the access point (wireless LAN router) is too far, or whether there are
shielding materials in between.
0
If the access point (wireless LAN router) in use goes into the SSID stealth mode, perform manual
registration or disable the stealth mode temporarily before registering.
0
In an environment with multiple access points, you may not be able to find the desired access point through
searching. In this case, add the access point manually.
Unable to connect to access point (wireless
LAN router).
0
Check that the password is correct.
0
For manual connection, check that the SSID or authentication method is correct.
Unsure of which access point (wireless LAN
router) to use.
0
If the settings of the access point (wireless LAN router) have never been changed from their default values,
check the following.
- Check whether an adhesive label indicating the initial settings is attached to the body of the access point
(wireless LAN router).
- Check for the default settings in the instruction manual of the access point (wireless LAN router).
Using Wi-Fi
56
Unsure of password for the access point
(wireless LAN router).
Refer to the instruction manual of the access point (wireless LAN router) in use.
Unable to connect via Wi-Fi Protected Setup
(WPS).
0
Simple connection methods other than WPS are not supported. Conduct a search for the access point to
connect.
0
Turn off the power of the camera, then try again.
Outside Monitoring (Connection in the House)
Trouble Action
Unable to connect to camera.
(URL required)
0
Check whether the Wi-Fi connection is established successfully.
0
Check to ensure that the camera and the terminal (smartphone or computer) are connected to the same
access point.
0
Try again after powering off and on the camera and the terminal (smartphone or computer).
Unsure of URL to access from a web
browser.
0
After outside monitoring is started, tap “CAMERA NETWORK INFO.” shown on the camera’s screen.
Enter the address as shown in “URL(LAN):” into the web browser to access it.
No image and sound when accessing from a
web browser.
0
If you have installed third-party video players, images and sounds may not be played back properly.
0
If the stream format is set to “Motion-JPEG” when transferring to the web browser, no sound will be output
from the browser.
0
If recording of the video is in progress, no sound will be output from the browser.
Unable to access the entered URL. (cannot
be found)
0
Check that the camera is properly connected to an access point (wireless LAN router). (Q appears on
the camera’s screen.)
0
Check that the computer is properly connected to an access point (wireless LAN router). Connection
should be possible if it is connected to the internet.
0
Check that the URL is correct.
Unable to access the entered URL.
(password required)
0
Enter your username and password.
The username is “everio” (fixed) and the default password is “0000” (can be changed).
Operations from this unit do not work when
outside monitoring is in use.
0
Operations cannot be performed from this unit when outside monitoring is in use.
Operate from the Android / iPhone application or web browser.
Recording stops when the Android / iPhone
application or web browser is closed.
0
When the Android / iPhone application or web browser is closed during recording, the camera gets
disconnected and recording stops.
Video or audio is interrupted or delayed
0
If the network speed is slow, videos and audio sound may be interrupted, or delay may become significant.
0
(For web browser) Lagging may become significant due to the performance of the computer.
If the stream format is set to “Full HD”, change to “SD” or “Motion-JPEG” and try again.
“Wi-Fi Specifications” (A p. 59)
0
(For web browser) If lagging is severe, reload the screen regularly.
0
(For smartphone) Try to change the place and time to locate an environment with good signal strength.
The unit turns off automatically.
0
To prevent the situation of forgetting to turn off the power, this unit will turn off automatically after 10 days
of continuous usage.
Unable to set focus.
0
When not monitoring from a smartphone (or computer), the focus of the camera is fixed.
0
Even when monitoring from a smartphone (or computer), the focus of the camera will be fixed if not
operated for more than 3 hours. (Focus works again when the camera is operated.)
Connection gets disconnected, or a
“UNABLE TO CONNECT” message is
displayed
0
Establish connection again at a place with good signal strength. Transmission speed may drop, or
connection may fail if the devices are placed too far away from each other, when there are objects in
between, or when microwave ovens or other wireless devices are in use.
0
If connection cannot be established again, restart the terminal (smartphone or computer).
Screen does not refresh or remains black
0
Check if the camera and the access point are properly connected.
Images cannot be detected on the terminal (smartphone or computer) if the camera is disconnected from
the access point halfway through.
Using Wi-Fi
57
Outside Monitoring (Connection from the Internet)
Trouble Action
Unsure of URL to access from a web
browser.
0
After outside monitoring is started, tap “CAMERA NETWORK INFO.” shown on the camera’s screen.
Enter the address as shown in “URL(WAN):” into the web browser to access it.
The URL (WAN) does not appear in the
network information.
0
The URL (WAN) will not appear if dynamic DNS is not set on the camera.
To set dynamic DNS, perform the following steps.
1. Obtain an account with JVC dynamic DNS service using your computer. (URL?)
2. Log in to JVC DNS and obtain the dynamic DNS service. (How?)
3. Set the obtained dynamic DNS username and password on the camera.
*Only the JVC dynamic DNS service can be set on this camera.
Unable to access the entered URL. (cannot
be found)
0
This function cannot be used in an environment with two or more routers.
0
Check that the dynamic DNS username and password are correct.
0
The router in use is not compatible with UPnP, or UPnP is turned off. Check the instruction manual of the
router in use, and turn on UPnP.
0
The “UPnP” of the camera is set to “OFF”. (By default, it is set to “ON”.)
Set “UPnP” to “ON”.
0
Depending on the terms of service with your provider, it may not be possible to obtain a global IP address.
“Confirming global IP address” (A p. 21)
0
Check whether a terminal that uses port 80, such as web servers, has been set in the network. If it is set,
change the port number of the terminal.
0
When a specfic terminal has been set to use port 80 on the router, change the setting such that port 80
can be used by the camera.
0
Try again after powering off and on the camera and the terminal (smartphone or computer).
Video or audio is interrupted or delayed
0
If the network speed is slow, videos and audio sound may be interrupted, or delay may become significant.
0
(For web browser) Lagging may become significant due to the performance of the computer.
If the stream format is set to “Full HD”, change to “SD” or “Motion-JPEG” and try again.
“Wi-Fi Specifications” (A p. 59)
0
(For web browser) If lagging is severe, reload the screen regularly.
0
(For smartphone) Try to change the place and time to locate an environment with good signal strength.
The unit turns off automatically.
0
To prevent the situation of forgetting to turn off the power, this unit will turn off automatically after 10 days
of continuous usage.
Unable to set focus.
0
When not monitoring from a smartphone (or computer), the focus of the camera is fixed.
0
Even when monitoring from a smartphone (or computer), the focus of the camera will be fixed if not
operated for more than 3 hours. (Focus works again when the camera is operated.)
Connection gets disconnected, or a
“UNABLE TO CONNECT” message is
displayed
0
Establish connection again at a place with good signal strength. Transmission speed may drop, or
connection may fail if the devices are placed too far away from each other, when there are objects in
between, or when microwave ovens or other wireless devices are in use.
0
If connection cannot be established again, restart the terminal (smartphone or computer).
Screen does not refresh or remains black
0
Check if the camera and the access point are properly connected.
Images cannot be detected on the terminal (smartphone or computer) if the camera is disconnected from
the access point halfway through.
[LUPnP] is displayed. This appears when UPnP has failed.
0
Check whether the wireless LAN router in use is compatible with UPnP.
(Refer to the instruction manual of the wireless LAN router in use, or consult the manufacturer of the router.)
0
When the wireless LAN router in use is compatible with UPnP, turn on the UPnP function.
0
If the icon does not disappear even when the UPnP function is enabled, turn off and on the power of the
wireless LAN router in use as well as the camera, then try again.
Unable to connect although [LUPnP] is
displayed.
0
When “UPnP” is set to “OFF”, [LUPnP] will not appear.
Set “UPnP” to “ON”.
0
When port 80 has been used by other devices via UPnP, connection cannot be established. Reconnect
the camera.
Using Wi-Fi
58
E-mail (Notification Mail, Video Mail)
Trouble Action
Unable to send e-mails.
0
Check that the settings of the e-mail server are correct.
0
Check that the settings of the sender’s e-mail address are correct.
0
Check that the username and password are correct.
0
If you are using an e-mail service that is not from your provider, it may be necessary to change the SMTP
settings.
0
Some free e-mail services from web browsers or e-mail softwares (SMTP) may have default SMTP settings
that do not allow e-mails to be sent.
Change the SMTP settings to allow sending of e-mails before use.
Sent e-mails are not received.
0
Check whether notifications indicating errors have been sent to the sender’s e-mail address. (Make use
of a computer or similar devices as it is not possible to check from the camera.)
- If no notifications are received: Refer to “Unable to send e-mails.” and adjust the settings accordingly.
- If notifications are received: Check the content of the notification.
*Note: Do not continue sending e-mails with the same settings if you receive error notifications. Depending
on the provider, you may be marked as a sender of spam (junk mail).
Unable to attach images to e-mails.
0
Depending on the provider, some attached files may be deleted. Make use of other free e-mail services.
The unit turns off automatically.
0
To prevent the situation of forgetting to turn off the power, this unit will turn off automatically after 10 days
of continuous usage.
Unable to set focus. (For DETECT/MAIL SETTING)
0
While on standby for notification mails, the focus is fixed. Perform the camera settings first, then enable
notification mails.
Focus may not be set correctly if the notification mails start before camera settings are made. In this case,
disable notification mails temporarily, then enable it again.
Vide/Still Image Transmission
Trouble Action
Unable to transfer videos and still images to
smartphone (or computer).
0
Check the amount of remaining free space in the destination medium (smartphone or computer).
Wi-Fi Specifications
Wi-Fi Specifications
Item Details
Wireless LAN Standard IEEE802.11b/g/n (2.4GHz band)
DIRECT MONITORING / OUTSIDE MONITORING
o
When Using Everio sync.
Item
Details
Supported Terminals iPhone/iPad: iOS 4.3.5 or later
Android: Android 2.1 or later
0
There is no guarantee that the operations will work with all terminals.
0
“Everio Sync.” for iPhone/iPad cannot be used when the iPhone/iPad is connected to the mobile phone
network.
To make use of this feature, connect to the camera or an access point via Wi-Fi.
0
A network environment with a minimum line speed of about 5.3 Mbps is recommended for both the camera
sending the data and the smartphone terminal receiving the data.
If the network speed is too low, video images may appear jumpy, or audio sound may be interrupted or
delayed.
Monitor Screen Video: JPEG 640x360 max. 15 fps
Audio: linear PCM 8kHz 16 bits 1ch
Video Transmission Video: MP4-compliant H.264 Baseline Profile 640x360 30p
Audio: AAC 48kHz 16 bits 2ch
Still Image Transmission JPEG format
Using Wi-Fi
59
o
When Using Web Browser
Item Details
Operating Environment Windows 7:
Internet Explorer 9 or a later version, and Windows Media Player 12 or a later version are installed
0
For Full HD, make use of a computer with the following system requirements.
- CPU: Intel Core 2 Duo 2 GHz or higher
- Memory: 2 GB or higher
0
A network environment with the following line speed is recommended for both the camera sending the
data and the PC receiving the data.
- MotionJPEG: approx. 1.7 Mbps or higher
- Full HD: approx. 10 Mbps or higher
- SD: approx. 3 Mbps or higher
If the network speed is too low, video images may appear jumpy, or audio sound may be interrupted or
delayed.
Monitor Screen
0
MotionJPEG
Video: JPEG 640x360 max. 5 fps
Audio: nil
0
Full HD
Video: MPEG-2 TS compliant H.264 High Profile 1920x1080 60i
Audio: AAC 48kHz 16 bits 2ch
0
SD
Video: MPEG-2 TS compliant H.264 Main Profile 720x480 60i
Audio: AAC 48kHz 16 bits 2ch
Video Transmission MPEG-2TS format (no conversion)
Still Image Transmission JPEG format (no conversion)
VIDEO MAIL
Item Details
Video MP4-compliant H.264 Baseline Profile 640x360 30p
Audio AAC 48kHz 16 bits 2ch
Time Max. 15 seconds
RECIPIENT'S EMAIL
Item Details
Still Image Transmission JPEG 640x360
Using Wi-Fi
60
Verifying the Accessories
If any of the items are missing or defective, consult your JVC dealer or the nearest JVC service center.
Illustration Description
.
AC Adapter
AC-V11U
0
Connects to this unit to charge the battery pack.
It can also be used when recording or playing back videos indoors.
.
Battery Pack
BN-VG114U
0
Attaches to this unit to supply power.
.
AV Cable
0
Connects this unit to a TV to play back recorded images on the TV.
.
USB Cable
(Type A - Mini Type B)
0
Connects this unit to a computer.
.
Core Filter (for AV Cable)
0
The core filter reduces interference when this unit is connected to other devices.
.
Core Filter (for USB Cable)
0
The core filter reduces interference when this unit is connected to other devices.
.
Stylus Pen
0
Use this for operations on the touch screen.
.
Basic User Guide
0
Read well and keep in a safe place where it can be accessed easily when necessary.
.
CD-ROM
0
For installing the provided software on a computer.
Memo :
0
SD cards are sold separately.
“Types of Usable SD Card” (A p. 65)
0
When using the AC adapter overseas, please prepare a commercially available converter plug for the country or region of visit.
“Charging the Battery Pack Overseas” (A p. 71)
Getting Started
61
Attaching the Core Filter
Attach a core filter to the end of the AV cord and USB cable that is connected to this unit.
The core filter reduces interference when this unit is connected to other devices.
.
Wind once (for AV Cable)Wind
twice (for USB Cable)
To be connected to this unit
Release the stopper
3 cm (1-3/16”)
Getting Started
62
Charging the Battery Pack
Charge the battery pack immediately after purchase and when the remaining
battery power is low.
The battery pack is not charged at the time of purchase.
1
Attach the battery pack.
.
0
Align the top of the battery with the mark on this unit, and slide in until
the battery clicks into place.
0
Align the terminal of the battery pack with this unit.
2
Connect the AC adapter to the DC connector.
.
3
Plug in the power.
.
AC Adapter
To AC Outlet
(110 V to 240 V)
0
The charging lamp blinks when charging is in progress.
It goes out when charging is finished.
Memo :
0
To attach any other battery packs besides the supplied one, open the SD
card cover before attaching.
Caution :
Be sure to use JVC battery packs.
0
If you use any other battery packs besides JVC battery packs, safety and
performance cannot be guaranteed.
0
Charging time:
Approx. 2 h 30 m (using supplied battery pack)
The charging time is when the unit is used at 25°C (77°F). If the battery
pack is charged outside the room temperature range of 10°C to 35°C (50°F
to 95°F), charging may take a longer time or it may not start. The
recordable and playable time may also be shortened under some usage
conditions such as at low temperature.
Be sure to use the supplied AC adapter.
0
If you use any other AC adapters besides the supplied AC adapter,
malfunctions may occur.
Rechargeable Batteries
0
When using the battery in a low temperature environment (10°C (50°F) or
below), the operating time may be shortened, or it may not function
properly. When using this unit outdoors in the winter weather, warm the
battery, such as by placing it in the pocket, before attaching it. (Keep away
from direct contact with a warm pack.)
0
Do not expose the battery to excessive heat, such as direct sunlight or fire.
0
After removing the battery, store it in a dry place between 15°C to 25°C
(59°F to 77°F).
0
Keep a 30 % battery level (X) if the battery pack is not to be used for a
long period of time. In addition, fully charge and then fully discharge the
battery pack every 6 months, then continue to store it at a 30 % battery
level (
X
).
Memo :
0
You can connect this unit to the AC adapter to record for long hours
indoors.
(Battery charging begins when the LCD monitor is closed.)
Detaching the Battery Pack
To detach the battery pack, perform the above steps in reverse order.
.
Slide the battery release lever to detach the battery from this unit.
Approximate Battery Charging Time (Using AC Adapter)
Battery Pack Charging Time
BN-VG114U
(Supplied)
2 h 30 m
BN-VG121U 3 h 30 m
BN-VG138U 6 h 10 m
0
When the battery life is reached, the recording time becomes shorter even
if the battery pack is fully charged.
(Replace the battery pack with a new one.)
* The charging time is when the unit is used at 25°C (77°F). If the battery
pack is charged outside the room temperature range of 10°C to 35°C (50°F
to 95°F), charging may take a longer time or it may not start. The recordable
and playable time may also be shortened under some usage conditions such
as at low temperature.
“Approximate Recording Time (Using Battery)” (A p. 112)
Getting Started
63
Grip Adjustment
.
A Open the lever on the strap lock
B Adjust the length of the belt
C Close the lever
Caution :
0
Be sure to fasten the grip belt properly.
If the belt is loose, this unit may drop and result in injuries or damages.
Using as a Hand Strap
Adjust the length of the belt and loop it around your wrist.
.
Inserting an SD Card
Insert a commercially available SD card before recording.
“Types of Usable SD Card” (A p. 65)
“Approximate Video Recording Time” (A p. 112)
1
Close the LCD monitor.
.
2
Open the cover.
.
3
Insert an SD card.
.
Label
0
Insert with the label facing outward.
Warning
0
Make sure not to insert the SD card in the wrong direction.
It may cause damage to the unit and SD card.
0
Turn off the power of this unit before inserting or removing an SD card.
0
Do not touch the metal contact area when inserting the SD card.
0
This unit is not guaranteed to operate with all SD cards. Some SD cards
may not work due to specification changes, etc.
Memo :
0
When “SEAMLESS RECORDING” is set to “ON”, recordings can still be
made to the SD card without stopping when the remaining recording time
on the built-in memory runs out.
“SEAMLESS RECORDING (GZ-EX250)” (A p. 175)
0
Both videos and still images can be recorded on one SD card. It is
recommended to confirm the video operation of the SD card before usage.
0
To record to the card, it is necessary to perform media settings.
When no card is available, set media settings to “BUILT-IN MEMORY” for
recording. (GZ-EX250)
“REC MEDIA FOR VIDEO (GZ-EX250)” (A p. 191)
“REC MEDIA FOR IMAGE (GZ-EX250)” (A p. 191)
0
To use SD cards that have been used on other devices, it is necessary to
format (initialize) the SD card using “FORMAT SD CARD” from media
settings.
“ FORMAT SD CARD ” (A p. 198)
Getting Started
64
Removing the Card
Push the SD card inward once, then pull it out straight.
.
Types of Usable SD Card
The following SD cards can be used on this unit.
Operations are confirmed on the SD cards from the following manufacturers.
0
Panasonic
0
TOSHIBA
0
SanDisk
SD Card
.
0
This unit supports 256 MB to 2 GB SD cards.
0
Use a Class 4 or higher compatible SD card (2 GB) for video recording.
SDHC Card
.
0
Use a Class 4 or higher compatible SDHC card (4 GB to 32 GB) for video
recording.
SDXC Card
.
0
Use a Class 4 or higher compatible SDXC card (Max. 64 GB) for video
recording.
Memo :
0
Using SD cards (including SDHC/SDXC cards) other than those specified
above may result in recording failure or data loss.
0
This unit is not guaranteed to operate with all SD cards. Some SD cards
may not work due to specification changes, etc.
0
To record videos with “VIDEO QUALITY” set to “UXP”, use of a Class 6 or
higher compliant SDHC/SDXC card is recommended.
0
Class 4 and Class 6 are guaranteed to have a minimum transfer rate of 4
MB/s and 6 MB/s respectively during reading or writing of data.
0
You can also use a Class 10 compliant SDHC/SDXC card.
0
Both videos and still images can be recorded on one SD card. It is
recommended to confirm the video operation of the SD card before usage.
0
To protect the data, do not touch the terminals of the SD card.
0
UHS-I SDHC/SDXC cards can be used in the same manner as standard
SDHC/SDXC cards.
UHS Speed Class is not supported.
When your computer cannot recognize the SDXC card
Confirm and update the OS of your computer.
Windows XP /
Windows XP
SP1
Necessary to update to SP2 or higher.
Windows XP
SP2 / Windows
XP SP3
Necessary to download the update software.
(KB955704)
http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/details.aspx?
FamilyID=1cbe3906-ddd1-4ca2-b727-
c2dff5e30f61&displaylang=en
Windows Vista Necessary to update to SP1 or higher.
Windows Vista
SP1 / Windows
Vista SP2
Necessary to download the upgrade software.
(KB975823)
0
32 bit version
http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/en/
details.aspx?FamilyID=2d1abe01-0942-4f8a-
abb2-2ad529de00a1
0
64 bit version
http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/en/
details.aspx?FamilyID=7d54c53f-017c-4ea5-
ae08-34c3452ba315
Windows 7 Necessary to download the upgrade software.
(KB976422)
0
32 bit version
http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/en/
details.aspx?FamilyID=3ee91fc2-a9bc-4ee1-
aca3-2a9aff5915ea
0
64 bit version
http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/en/
details.aspx?FamilyID=73f766dd-7127-4445-
b860-47084587155f
Mac OS X 10.4
Tiger / Mac OS X
10.5 Leopard
Not compatible.
Mac OS X 10.6
Snow Leopard
Necessary to update to 10.6.5 or later.
Getting Started
65
Using the Touch Screen
Icon operation buttons, thumbnails, and menu items are displayed on the
touch screen according to the mode in use.
0
There are two ways to operate the touch screen, namely “tap” and “drag”.
The following are some examples.
A Tap the displayed button (icon) or thumbnail (file) on the touch screen
to make selection.
B Drag the thumbnails on the touch screen to search for the desired file.
.
REC
0:01:23 0:12:340:01:23 0:12:34
MENU
REC
MENU
PLAY
REC
Index ScreenPlayback ScreenRecording Screen
Memo :
0
The touch screen of this unit is pressure-sensitive. When the touch screen
does not respond smoothly, apply slightly more force to your fingertip or
the stylus pen.
0
Tap the buttons (icons) on the touch screen accurately. The buttons may
not respond if they are not tapped on the right area.
0
Do not press or rub with excessive force.
0
If you apply a protect sheet or a sticker, the touch screen may not respond
smoothly.
0
Do not operate the touch screen using an object with a sharp tip.
0
Pressing two or more places at a time may cause a malfunction.
0
Perform “TOUCH SCREEN ADJUST” if the reactive area of the screen is
misaligned with the touched area. (Adjust by lightly tapping with the stylus
pen. Do not press with an object with a sharp tip or do not press hard.)
“ TOUCH SCREEN ADJUST ” (A p. 194)
0
It is recommended to use the stylus pen for handwriting effect.
Getting Started
66
Names of Buttons and Functions on the LCD Monitor
The following screens are displayed during the video and still image modes,
and operate as the touch screens.
Recording Screen (Video/Still Image)
.
MENU
REC
PLAY
1
Video/Still Image Mode Button
0
Switches between video and still image modes.
2
Zoom Button
“Zooming” (A p. 76)
3
Playback Mode Button
0
Switches to the playback mode.
4
Recording Start/Stop Button
0
6: Video Recording Start Button
0
7: Video Recording Stop Button
0
Q
: Still Image Recording Button
5
Menu Button
“Operating the Menu” (A p. 166)
6
Display Button
Switches the display between full (
m
) and simple (
n
) with every tap of
the button.
0
Simple display: Some displays disappear after approximately 3
seconds.
0
Full display: Displays everything. The display button changes from n
to
m
.
0
When the power is turned off, simple display (n) will be set.
7
Recording Mode Button
Switches the recording mode between P Intelligent Auto and H
Manual.
Playback Screen (Video)
.
MENU
REC
00:01:23 00:12:34
1
Video/Still Image Mode Button
0
Switches between video and still image modes.
2
Recording Mode Button
0
Switches to the recording mode.
3
Index Screen Button
“Operation Buttons for Video Playback” (A p. 113)
4
Delete Button
“Deleting the Currently Displayed File” (A p. 122)
5
Menu Button
“Operating the Menu” (A p. 166)
6
Operation Buttons
“Operation Buttons for Video Playback” (A p. 113)
Playback Screen (Still Image)
.
REC
MENU
1
Video/Still Image Mode Button
0
Switches between video and still image modes.
2
Group Playback Button
0
Continuous playback of still images that are recorded continuously
within 2 seconds or with the continuous shooting mode.
“Playing Back Still Images” (A p. 117)
3
Rotate Button
Rotates a still image 90°. (Clockwise/Counterclockwise)
4
Recording Mode Button
0
Switches to the recording mode.
5
Index Screen Button
“Operation Buttons for Still Image Playback” (A p. 117)
6
Delete Button
“Deleting the Currently Displayed File” (A p. 122)
7
Menu Button
“Operating the Menu” (A p. 166)
8
Operation Buttons
“Operation Buttons for Still Image Playback” (A p. 117)
Getting Started
67
Index Screen
.
MENU
REC
1
Video/Still Image Mode Button
0
Switches between video and still image modes.
2
Date Button
“Operation Buttons for Video Playback” (A p. 113)
“Operation Buttons for Still Image Playback” (A p. 117)
3
Playback Mode Button
0
Switches to the playback mode.
4
Delete Button
“Deleting Selected Files” (A p. 122)
5
Playback Media Button (GZ-EX250)
0
Switches between SD card and built-in memory.
6
Menu Button
“Operating the Menu” (A p. 166)
7
Page Forward/Back Button
“Operation Buttons for Video Playback” (A p. 113)
“Operation Buttons for Still Image Playback” (A p. 117)
Menu Screen
.
1
Help Button
2
Menu Items
3
Return Button
4
Common Menu Button
“Operating the Menu” (A p. 166)
5
Close Button
Clock Setting
The “SET DATE/TIME!” screen appears when you turn on this unit for the
first time after purchase, when it has not been used for a long time, or when
the clock is not set yet.
Set the clock before recording.
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
The unit turns on.
0
When the LCD monitor is closed, the unit turns off.
2
Tap “YES” when “SET DATE/TIME!” is displayed.
.
NOYES
SET DATE/TIME!
3
Set the date and time.
.
AM
201211000
TIMEDATE
CLOCK SETTING
JAN
SET
0
When the year, month, day, hour, or minute item is tapped, “3” and
2” will be displayed.
0
Tap 3 or 2 to adjust the year, month, day, hour, and minute.
4
After setting the date and time, tap “SET”.
5
Select the region where you live and tap “SAVE”.
.
GMT
SAVE
CLOCK/AREA SETTING
0
The city name and time difference are displayed.
0
Tap 0 or 1 to select the city name.
Memo :
0
The clock can be reset again later.
“Resetting the Clock” (A p. 69)
0
When using this unit overseas, you can set it to the local time for recording.
“Setting the Clock to Local Time when Traveling” (A p. 72)
0
“SET DATE/TIME!” is displayed when you turn on this unit after it has not
been used for a prolonged period.
Connect the AC adapter for more than 24 hours to charge the internal clock
battery of this unit before setting the clock.
Getting Started
68
Resetting the Clock
Set the clock with “CLOCK ADJUST” from the menu.
1
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
When entering from the recording mode, tap “MENU” again as the
shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Q”.
.
3
Tap “CLOCK ADJUST”.
.
CLOCK ADJUST
COMMON
0
Tap 3 or 2 to move upward or downward for more selection.
4
Tap “CLOCK SETTING”.
.
CLOCK SETTING
CLOCK ADJUST
5
Set the date and time.
.
AM
201211000
TIMEDATE
CLOCK SETTING
JAN
SET
0
When the year, month, day, hour, or minute item is tapped, “3” and
2” will be displayed.
0
Tap 3 or 2 to adjust the year, month, day, hour, and minute.
6
After setting the date and time, tap “SET”.
7
Select the region where you live and tap “SAVE”.
.
GMT
SAVE
CLOCK/AREA SETTING
0
The city name and time difference are displayed.
0
Tap 0 or 1 to select the city name.
Getting Started
69
Changing the Display Language
The language on the display can be changed.
1
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
When entering from the recording mode, tap “MENU” again as the
shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Q” (common).
.
3
Tap “LANGUAGE”.
.
LANGUAGE
COMMON
0
Tap 3 or 2 to move upward or downward for more selection.
4
Tap to the desired language.
.
LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
0
Tap 3 or 2 to move upward or downward for more selection.
Holding this Unit
When holding this unit, keep your elbows close to your sides to prevent
camera shake.
.
0
Hold the LCD monitor with your left hand and adjust the angle accordingly.
Holding the LCD monitor with your left hand helps to stabilize the camera
for recording.
Caution :
0
Be careful not to drop this unit during transportation.
0
Guardians should pay close attention when this unit is being used by
children.
Memo :
0
If camera shake is excessive, use the image stabilizer.
“Reducing Camera Shake” (A p. 104)
Tripod Mounting
This unit can be mounted on a tripod (or monopod). This is useful for
preventing camera shake and recording from the same position.
.
0
To prevent this unit from falling off, check the tripod mounting screw holes
and positioning holes on the unit carefully before mounting, and turn the
screws until they are fastened firmly.
Caution :
0
To prevent injuries or damages which may result if this unit falls off, read
the instruction manual of the tripod (or monopod) to be used and make
sure that it is securely attached.
Memo :
0
It is recommended to use a tripod or monopod when recording in
conditions prone to camera shake (such as in dark places or when zoomed
to the telephoto end).
0
Set the image stabilizer to b (OFF) when using a tripod for recording.
Getting Started
70
“Reducing Camera Shake” (A p. 104)
Using this Unit Overseas
The shape of the power outlet varies according to countries and regions.
To charge the battery pack, you need a converter plug that matches the
shape of the outlet.
“Charging the Battery Pack Overseas” (A p. 71)
Change the date and time display to the local time by selecting your travel
destination in “AREA SETTING” of “CLOCK ADJUST”.
“Setting the Clock to Local Time when Traveling” (A p. 72)
When “ON” is selected in “DST SETTING” of “CLOCK ADJUST”, the time is
set 1 hour ahead.
“Setting Daylight Saving Time” (A p. 72)
Charging the Battery Pack Overseas
The shape of the power outlet varies according to countries and regions.
To charge the battery pack, you need a converter plug that matches the
shape of the outlet.
.
ABBFCO
North America
United States
Canada
Mexico
A
A
A
India
Indonesia
Singapore
Sri Lanka
Thailand
South Korea
China
Japan
Nepal
Pakistan
Bangladesh
Philippines
Vietnam
Hong Kong Special
Administrative Region
Macau Special
Administrative Region
Malaysia
. .
.
. .
A.BF.C
A.C
A.B.BF.C.O
A
C
B.C
C
A.BF.O
A.C
B.BF
B.C
B.BF.C
Europe
Iceland
Ireland
United Kingdom
Italy
Austria
Netherlands
Canary Islands
Greece
Switzerland
Sweden
Spain
Denmark
Germany
Norway
Hungary
Finland
France
Belgium
Poland
Portugal
Romania
C
C
B.BF
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
A.C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
B.C
B.C
C
Asia
Oceania
Australia
Guam
Tahiti
Tonga
New Zealand
Fiji
O
A
C
O
O
O
Argentina
Colombia
Jamaica
Chile
Haiti
Panama
Bahamas
Puerto Rico
Brazil
Venezuela
Peru
O
A
A
B.C
A
A
A
A
A.C
A
A.C
Latin
Middle East
Israel
Iran
Kuwait
Jordan
C
C
B.C
B.BF
Algeria
Egypt
Guinea
Kenya
Zambia
Tanzania
Republic of South Africa
Mozambique
Morocco
A.B.BF.C
B.BF.C
C
B.C
B.BF
B.BF
B.C.BF
C
C
Africa
Getting Started
71
Setting the Clock to Local Time when Traveling
Change the date and time display to the local time by selecting your travel
destination in “AREA SETTING” of “CLOCK ADJUST”.
Restore the region settings after you returned from the trip.
1
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
When entering from the recording mode, tap “MENU” again as the
shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Q”.
.
3
Tap “CLOCK ADJUST”.
.
CLOCK ADJUST
COMMON
0
Tap 3 or 2 to move upward or downward for more selection.
4
Tap “AREA SETTING”.
.
CLOCK ADJUST
AREA SETTING
5
Select the area you are traveling to and tap “SAVE”.
.
GMT
SAVE
AREA SETTING
0
The city name and time difference are displayed.
0
Tap 0 or 1 to select the city name.
Memo :
0
Setting “AREA SETTING” changes the clock time such that time difference
is accounted for.
After returning to your country, re-select the region that was set initially to
restore the original clock settings.
Setting Daylight Saving Time
When “ON” is selected in “DST SETTING” of “CLOCK ADJUST”, the time is
set 1 hour ahead.
1
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
When entering from the recording mode, tap “MENU” again as the
shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Q”.
.
3
Tap “CLOCK ADJUST”.
.
CLOCK ADJUST
COMMON
0
Tap 3 or 2 to move upward or downward for more selection.
4
Tap “DST SETTING”.
.
DST SETTING
CLOCK ADJUST
5
Tap “ON”.
.
OFFON
CURRENT SETTING: OFF
DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME (DST)
DST SETTING
Memo :
0
What is daylight saving time?
Daylight saving time is the system of setting the clock 1 hour ahead for a
fixed period in summer.
It is used mainly in the Western countries.
0
Restore the daylight saving time settings after you returned from the trip.
Getting Started
72
Optional Accessories
You can record for a longer time by using the optional battery pack.
Product Name Description
Battery Pack
0
BN-VG114U
0
BN-VG121U
0
BN-VG138U
0
Provides a longer recording time. It can also be
used as a spare battery pack.
Battery Charger
0
AA-VG1
0
Enables the battery pack to be charged without
using this unit.
HDMI Mini Cable
0
VX-HD310
0
VX-HD315
0
Allows viewing in high picture quality when
connected to a TV.
0
Transmits video, audio, and control signals
between devices.
Memo :
0
The optional accessories above may not be supported in some regions.
0
For more information, refer to the catalog.
0
For details on the provided accessories, refer to “Verifying the
Accessories”.
“Verifying the Accessories” (A p. 61)
Approximate Recording Time (Using Battery)
Battery
Pack
Actual Recording Time Continuous Recording
Time
BN-
VG114U
(Supplied)
1 h 5 m 2 h
BN-
VG121U
1 h 40 m 3 h 5 m
BN-
VG138U
3 h 5 h 30 m
0
The above are values when “LIGHT” is set to “OFF” and “MONITOR
BRIGHTNESS” is set to “3” (standard).
0
The actual recording time may be shorter if zooming is used or if recording
is stopped repeatedly.
(It is recommended to prepare battery packs ready for three times the
expected recording time.)
0
When the battery life is reached, the recording time becomes shorter even
if the battery pack is fully charged.
(Replace the battery pack with a new one.)
Getting Started
73
Taking Videos in Auto Mode
You can record without worrying about the setting details by using the
Intelligent Auto mode. Settings such as exposure and focus will be adjusted
automatically to suit the shooting conditions.
0
In case of specific shooting scenes such as person etc., its icon is
displayed on the screen.
0
Before recording an important scene, it is recommended to conduct a trial
recording.
1
Open the lens cover.
.
2
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Check if the recording mode is A.
3
Check if the recording mode is P Intelligent Auto.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
If the mode is H Manual, tap H on the recording screen to display
the mode switching screen.
Tap P to switch the recording mode to Intelligent Auto.
.
intelligent AUTO
MANUAL
4
Start recording.
.
0
Press again to stop.
0
Some displays disappear after approximately 3 seconds.
Use the n button to change the displays.
Memo :
0
Depending on the subject and shooting conditions, recording may not be
performed properly even in the Intelligent Auto mode.
Indications During Video Recording
.
0:00:00 [2:04]
10:10
MENU
REC
PLAY
Display Icon Description
A
Video Quality Displays the icon of the “VIDEO QUALITY”
setting selected in the recording menu.
“ VIDEO QUALITY ” (A p. 174)
B
TOUCH PRIORITY
AE/AF
Displays the setting of “TOUCH PRIORITY AE/
AF”. By default, it is set to “FACE TRACKING”
.
“Capturing Subjects Clearly (TOUCH
PRIORITY AE/AF)” (A p. 93)
C
Time Displays the current time.
“Clock Setting” (A p. 68)
D
Image Stabilizer Displays the image stabilizer setting.
“Reducing Camera Shake” (A p. 104)
E
Recording Media Displays the icon of the media where videos
are recorded to.
“REC MEDIA FOR VIDEO (GZ-EX250)”
(A p. 191)
F
Battery Indicator Displays the approximate remaining battery
power.
Details of the battery power can be displayed
by pressing the INFO button.
“Checking the Remaining Recording Time”
(A p. 111)
G
Recording Mode Displays the current recording mode of P
(Intelligent Auto) or H (Manual).
H
SEAMLESS
RECORDING
Displays the seamless recording icon when it
is set. q appears if seamless recording
cannot be performed.
“SEAMLESS RECORDING (GZ-EX250)”
(A p. 175)
I
Remaining
Recording Time
Displays the remaining time for video
recording.
“Checking the Remaining Recording Time”
(A p. 111)
J
Scene Counter
(Recorded Time)
Displays the elapsed time of the video that is
currently being recorded.
Recording
74
o
Scenes of Intelligent Auto
Display Icon Description
E
Captures one’s skin beautifully.
A
Allows people to be captured naturally.
D
Focuses at a far distance and captures a sharp
image with vivid colors.
I
Records with minimal noise in the overall image.
B
Allows night scenes to be captured accurately with
minimal noise in the overall image.
J
Prevents colors from fading even when recording
in a bright environment.
G
Records while focusing on a near object.
H
Reproduces the green color of trees vividly.
F
Reproduces the colors of sunset naturally.
C
Adjusts settings so that the subject does not
appear too dark due to backlight.
K
Allows people to be captured naturally with minimal
noise in the overall image.
L
Records while focusing on a near object even in a
dark environment.
Memo :
0
Scenes can be detected according to the shooting conditions and
automatically adjusted in Intelligent Auto mode.
0
Some functions may not work properly depending on the shooting
conditions.
Operation Buttons for Video Recording
.
MENUREC
REC
REC
PLAY
Operation
Button
Description
A
Video/Still Image
Mode
Switches between video and still image
modes.
B
T/W Zoom Allows the same functions as the zoom
lever to be performed.
Camera shake that often occurs when
using the zoom lever can be minimized.
“Zooming” (A p. 76)
C
Playback Mode Switches to the playback mode.
D / E Recording Start
6
Record-Standby
7
Functions as the START/STOP button.
F
MENU Displays the various menus of video
recording.
“Operating the Menu” (A p. 166)
G
Display Button n Switches the display between full (m) and
simple (n) with every tap of the button.
0
Simple display: Some displays
disappear after approximately 3
seconds.
0
Full display: Displays everything. The
display button changes from n to m.
0
When the power is turned off, simple
display (n) will be set.
H
Recording Mode
P/H
Switches the recording mode.
Recording
75
Using the Silent Mode
When the Silent mode is used, the LCD monitor darkens and operation
sounds will not be output. Use this mode to record quietly in dark places such
as during a performance.
.
0
Press and hold the SILENT button to turn on the Silent mode. To turn it
off, press and hold the button again.
0
T appears when “SILENT MODE” is set to “ON”.
Useful Settings for Recording
0
When “QUICK RESTART” is set to “ON”, this unit turns on immediately if
you open the LCD monitor within 5 minutes after the power is turned off
by closing the monitor.
“ QUICK RESTART ” (A p. 193)
0
When “AUTO POWER OFF” is set to “ON”, this unit turns itself off
automatically to conserve power when it is not operated for 5 minutes.
(only when using the battery pack)
“ AUTO POWER OFF ” (A p. 193)
0
When “TOUCH PRIORITY AE/AF” is set to “FACE TRACKING”, this unit
detects faces and automatically adjusts its brightness and focus to record
the faces more clearly.
“Capturing Subjects Clearly (TOUCH PRIORITY AE/AF)” (A p. 93)
0
If the remaining space on the built-in memory runs out while “SEAMLESS
RECORDING” is set to “ON”, recording continues after switching to the
SD card.
“SEAMLESS RECORDING (GZ-EX250)” (A p. 175)
0
When “DATE/TIME RECORDING” is used, the date and time can be
recorded together with the video.
“Recording Videos with Date and Time” (A p. 110)
Caution :
0
Do not expose the lens to direct sunlight.
0
Do not use this unit in the rain, snow, or places with high humidity like the
bathroom.
0
Do not use this unit in places subject to excessive humidity or dust, as well
as places exposed to steam or smoke directly.
0
The power may turn off to protect the circuit if the temperature of this unit
rises too much.
0
Do not remove the battery pack, AC adapter, or SD card when the access
lamp is lighted. The recorded data may become unreadable.
“ACCESS (Access) Lamp” (A p. 200)
0
This unit is a microcomputer-controlled device. Electrostatic discharge,
external noise and interference (from a TV, a radio, etc.) might prevent it
from functioning properly. In such a case, turn off the power, then remove
the AC adapter and battery pack. This unit will be reset.
0
Make a backup of important recorded data.
- It is recommended to copy your important recorded data to a DVD or
other recording media for storage.
- JVC will not be responsible for any lost data.
Memo :
0
Check the remaining recording time in the media before you start shooting.
If there is not enough space, move (copy) the data to a computer or disc.
0
When there are many files in the media, it may take time for them to be
displayed on the playback screen. Wait for a while as the access lamp
appears blinking, which indicates normal operation.
0
Do not forget to make copies after recording!
0
Recording stops automatically as it cannot be performed for 12 or more
consecutive hours according to specifications.
(It may take some time to resume recording.)
0
For long recordings, the file is split into two or more files if the size exceeds
4 GB.
0
You can connect this unit to the AC adapter to record for long hours
indoors.
0
Depending on the shooting conditions, the four corners of the screen may
appear dark, but this is not a malfunction. In this case, change the shooting
conditions by moving the zoom lever, etc.
Zooming
The angle of view can be adjusted using zoom.
0
Use the W end (wide angle end) to shoot a wider field of view.
0
Use the T end (telephoto end) to magnify the subject for shooting.
.
TelephotoWide Angle
0
The following zoom options are available:
- Optical Zoom (1 - 40x)
- Digital Zoom (41 – 200x)
0
You can also use the zoom (T/W) button on the touch screen to zoom.
.
MENU
MENU
PLAY
REC
Zoom Button (T/W)
Memo :
0
When digital zoom is used, the image becomes grainy as it is digitally
enlarged.
0
The zoom ratio range can be changed.
“ ZOOM ” (A p. 174)
Capturing Still Images During Video Recording
Still images can be captured by pressing the SNAPSHOT button while in the
video mode (standby or recording).
.
0
“PHOTO” lights up on the screen when a still image is being captured.
.
0
The still images captured during video recording are saved to the
destination set in “REC MEDIA FOR IMAGE”.
Memo :
0
The size of the still image that is captured in the video mode is 1920 x
1080.
0
Operation is invalid under the following conditions:
- when menu is being displayed
- when remaining recording time or battery power is being displayed
- when “TIME-LAPSE RECORDING” is in use
- when “FACE SUB-WINDOW” is set
- when “ANIMATION EFFECT” is set
- when “DECORATE FACE EFFECT” is set
- when “STAMP” is set
- when “HANDWRITING EFFECT” is set
- when “AUTO REC” is set
- when “DATE/TIME RECORDING” is set
Recording
76
Taking Still Images in Auto Mode
You can record without worrying about the setting details by using the
Intelligent Auto mode.
1
Open the lens cover.
.
2
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Check if the recording mode is B.
3
Check if the recording mode is P Intelligent Auto.
.
MENU
MENU
PLAY
0
If the mode is H Manual, tap H on the recording screen to display
the mode switching screen.
Tap P to switch the recording mode to Intelligent Auto.
.
intelligent AUTO
MANUAL
4
Set the focus on the subject.
.
Press halfway
0
When focused, the focus icon lights up in green.
5
Take a still image.
.
Press fully
0
PHOTO lights up when a still image is being captured.
0
Some displays disappear after approximately 3 seconds.
Use the n button to change the displays.
Memo :
0
Depending on the subject and shooting conditions, recording may not be
performed properly even in the Intelligent Auto mode.
Indications During Still Image Recording
.
[6630]
1/125
10:10
Display Icon Description
A
Image Size Displays the icon of the image size.
0
The size of still images can be changed.
“ IMAGE SIZE ” (A p. 181)
B
TOUCH PRIORITY
AE/AF
Displays the setting of “TOUCH PRIORITY AE/
AF”. By default, it is set to “FACE TRACKING”
.
“Capturing Subjects Clearly (TOUCH
PRIORITY AE/AF)” (A p. 93)
C
Time Displays the current time.
“Clock Setting” (A p. 68)
D
Recording media Displays the icon of the media where still
images are recorded to.
“REC MEDIA FOR IMAGE (GZ-EX250)”
(A p. 191)
E
Battery Indicator “Checking the Remaining Recording Time”
(A p. 111)
F
Recording Mode Displays the current recording mode of P
(Intelligent Auto) or H (Manual).
G
Remaining Number
of Shots
Displays the remaining number of shots for still
image recording.
“Approximate Number of Still Images (Unit:
Number of Shots)” (A p. 112)
H
Recording in
Progress
“PHOTO” appears when a still image is being
captured.
I
Focus Lights up in green when focused.
Recording
77
o
Scenes of Intelligent Auto
Display Icon Description
E
Captures one’s skin beautifully.
A
Allows people to be captured naturally.
D
Focuses at a far distance and captures a sharp
image with vivid colors.
I
Records with minimal noise in the overall image.
B
Allows night scenes to be captured accurately with
minimal noise in the overall image.
J
Prevents colors from fading even when recording
in a bright environment.
G
Records while focusing on a near object.
H
Reproduces the green color of trees vividly.
F
Reproduces the colors of sunset naturally.
C
Adjusts settings so that the subject does not
appear too dark due to backlight.
K
Allows people to be captured naturally with minimal
noise in the overall image.
L
Records while focusing on a near object even in a
dark environment.
Memo :
0
Scenes can be detected according to the shooting conditions and
automatically adjusted in Intelligent Auto mode.
0
Some functions may not work properly depending on the shooting
conditions.
Operation Buttons for Still Image Recording
.
[6630]
MENU
PLAY
Operation
Button
Description
A
Video/Still Image
Mode
Switches between video and still image
modes.
B
T/W Zoom Allows the same functions as the zoom
lever to be performed.
Camera shake that often occurs when
using the zoom lever can be minimized.
“Zooming” (A p. 79)
C
Playback Mode Switches to the playback mode.
D
Snapshot
Q
Functions as the SNAPSHOT button.
However, focus cannot be set by pressing
halfway.
E
MENU Displays the various menus of still image
recording.
“Operating the Menu” (A p. 166)
F
Display Button n Switches the display between full (m) and
simple (n) with every tap of the button.
0
Simple display: Some displays
disappear after approximately 3
seconds.
0
Full display: Displays everything. The
display button changes from n to m.
0
When the power is turned off, simple
display (n) will be set.
G
Recording Mode
P/H
Switches the recording mode.
Recording
78
Using the Silent Mode
When the Silent mode is used, the LCD monitor darkens and operation
sounds will not be output. Use this mode to record quietly in dark places such
as during a performance.
.
0
Press and hold the SILENT button to turn on the Silent mode. To turn it
off, press and hold the button again.
0
T appears when “SILENT MODE” is set to “ON”.
Useful Settings for Recording
0
When “QUICK RESTART” is set to “ON”, this unit turns on immediately if
you open the LCD monitor within 5 minutes after the power is turned off
by closing the monitor.
“ QUICK RESTART ” (A p. 193)
0
When “AUTO POWER OFF” is set to “ON”, this unit turns itself off
automatically to conserve power when it is not operated for 5 minutes.
(only when using the battery pack)
“ AUTO POWER OFF ” (A p. 193)
0
When “TOUCH PRIORITY AE/AF” is set to “FACE TRACKING”, this unit
detects faces and automatically adjusts its brightness and focus to record
the faces more clearly.
“Capturing Subjects Clearly (TOUCH PRIORITY AE/AF)” (A p. 93)
Caution :
0
Do not expose the lens to direct sunlight.
0
Do not use this unit in the rain, snow, or places with high humidity like the
bathroom.
0
Do not use this unit in places subject to excessive humidity or dust, as well
as places exposed to steam or smoke directly.
0
The power may turn off to protect the circuit if the temperature of this unit
rises too much.
0
Do not remove the battery pack, AC adapter, or SD card when the access
lamp is lighted. The recorded data may become unreadable.
“ACCESS (Access) Lamp” (A p. 200)
0
This unit is a microcomputer-controlled device. Electrostatic discharge,
external noise and interference (from a TV, a radio, etc.) might prevent it
from functioning properly. In such a case, turn off the power, then remove
the AC adapter and battery pack. This unit will be reset.
Memo :
0
Before recording an important scene, it is recommended to conduct a trial
recording.
0
The image stabilizer does not work when recording still images.
0
Depending on the shooting conditions, the four corners of the screen may
appear dark, but this is not a malfunction. In this case, change the shooting
conditions by moving the zoom lever, etc.
Zooming
The angle of view can be adjusted using zoom.
0
Use the W end (wide angle end) to shoot a wider field of view.
0
Use the T end (telephoto end) to magnify the subject for shooting.
.
TelephotoWide Angle
0
The following zoom options are available:
- Optical Zoom (1 - 40x)
0
You can also use the zoom (T/W) button on the touch screen to zoom.
.
MENU
MENU
PLAY
Zoom Button (T/W)
Memo :
0
Only optical zoom is available in the still image recording mode.
Recording
79
Manual Recording
You can adjust settings, such as brightness and shutter speed, by using the
manual mode.
Manual recording can be set for both video and still image modes.
1
Open the lens cover.
.
2
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Set the recording mode to either A video or B still image.
0
To switch the mode between video and still image, tap A or B on the
recording screen to display the mode switching screen.
Tap A or B to switch the mode to video or still image respectively.
(You can also use the A/B button on this unit.)
3
Select the Manual recording mode.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
If the mode is P Intelligent Auto, tap P on the recording screen
to display the mode switching screen.
Tap H to switch the recording mode to Manual.
.
intelligent AUTO
MANUAL
4
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
5
Tap “MENU” in the shortcut menu.
.
MENU
6
Tap the item to set manually.
.
SCENE SELECT
VIDEO
0
For details on the various manual settings, refer to “Manual Recording
Menu”.
Memo :
0
The manual settings are displayed only in the manual mode.
Recording
80
Manual Recording Menu
The following items can be set.
Name Description
SCENE SELECT
0
Recordings that suit the shooting conditions
can be performed easily.
“Shooting According to Scene (Subject)”
(A p. 81)
FOCUS
0
Use manual focus if the subject is not
focused automatically.
“Adjusting Focus Manually” (A p. 83)
BRIGHTNESS
ADJUST
0
Overall brightness on the screen can be
adjusted.
0
Use this when recording in a dark or bright
location.
“Adjusting Brightness” (A p. 84)
WHITE BALANCE
0
Overall color on the screen can be adjusted.
0
Use this when the color on the screen
appears differently from the actual color.
“Setting White Balance” (A p. 85)
BACKLIGHT COMP.
0
Corrects the image when the subject
appears dark due to backlight.
0
Use this when shooting against the light.
“Setting Backlight Compensation” (A p. 86)
TELE MACRO
0
Use this to take close-up (macro) shots of the
subject.
“Taking Close-up Shots” (A p. 87)
Shooting According to Scene (Subject)
Common scenes that are often encountered can be recorded with the most
suitable settings.
1
Select the Manual recording mode.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
If the mode is P Intelligent Auto, tap P on the recording screen
to display the mode switching screen.
Tap
H
to switch the recording mode to Manual.
.
intelligent AUTO
MANUAL
2
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
3
Tap “MENU” in the shortcut menu.
.
MENU
4
Tap “SCENE SELECT”.
.
SCENE SELECT
VIDEO
0
Tap 3 or 2 to move upward or downward for more selection.
0
Tap L to exit the menu.
0
Tap J to return to the previous screen.
5
Tap the appropriate scene.
.
SPOTLIGHT
NIGHTALIVE
OFF
SCENE SELECT
Recording
81
0
Tap “OFF” to cancel the selection.
0
Tap 3 or 2 to move upward or downward for more selection.
0
Tap L to exit the menu.
*The image is only an impression.
Setting Effect
b NIGHTALIVE Increases gain and brightens the scene
automatically using a slow shutter when the
surrounding is dark.
To prevent camera shake, use a tripod.
.
g SPOTLIGHT Prevents the human subject from appearing too
bright under light.
.
Memo :
0
All scenes of “SCENE SELECT” cannot be set during “TIME-LAPSE
RECORDING”.
Recording
82
Adjusting Focus Manually
Set this when the focus is not clear in Intelligent Auto or when manual
focusing is desired.
1
Select the Manual recording mode.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
If the mode is P Intelligent Auto, tap P on the recording screen
to display the mode switching screen.
Tap
H
to switch the recording mode to Manual.
.
intelligent AUTO
MANUAL
2
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
3
Tap “MENU” in the shortcut menu.
.
MENU
4
Tap “FOCUS”.
.
FOCUS
VIDEO
0
Tap 3 or 2 to move upward or downward for more selection.
0
Tap L to exit the menu.
0
Tap J to return to the previous screen.
5
Tap “MANUAL”.
.
MANUAL
AUTO
FOCUS
6
Adjust the focus.
.
MENU
MENU
PLAY
REC
SET
0
Tap E to focus on a distant subject.
If E appears blinking, focus cannot be set any further.
0
Tap p to focus on a near subject.
If
p
appears blinking, focus cannot be set any nearer.
7
Tap “SET” to confirm.
.
MENU
MENU
REC
PLAY
0
When focus is confirmed, the focusing frame disappears and E and
p are displayed.
Memo :
0
A subject that is focused at the telephoto (T) end remains in focus when
it is zoomed out to the wide angle (W) end.
Recording
83
Adjusting Brightness
You can adjust the brightness to your preferred level.
1
Select the Manual recording mode.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
If the mode is P Intelligent Auto, tap P on the recording screen
to display the mode switching screen.
Tap
H
to switch the recording mode to Manual.
.
intelligent AUTO
MANUAL
2
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
3
Tap “MENU” in the shortcut menu.
.
MENU
4
Tap “BRIGHTNESS ADJUST”.
.
BRIGHTNESS ADJUST
VIDEO
0
Tap 3 or 2 to move upward or downward for more selection.
0
Tap L to exit the menu.
0
Tap J to return to the previous screen.
5
Tap “MANUAL”.
.
MANUAL
AUTO
BRIGHTNESS ADJUST
6
Adjust the brightness value.
.
PLAY
REC
MENU
SET
0
Compensation range during video recording: -2.0 to +2.0
0
Compensation range during still image recording: -2.0 to +2.0
0
Tap 3 to increase the brightness.
0
Tap 2 to decrease the brightness.
7
Tap “SET” to confirm.
.
Memo :
0
Settings can be adjusted separately for videos and still images.
Recording
84
Setting White Balance
You can set the color tone to suit the light source.
1
Select the Manual recording mode.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
If the mode is P Intelligent Auto, tap P on the recording screen
to display the mode switching screen.
Tap H to switch the recording mode to Manual.
.
intelligent AUTO
MANUAL
2
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
3
Tap “MENU” in the shortcut menu.
.
MENU
4
Tap “WHITE BALANCE”.
.
WHITE BALANCE
VIDEO
0
Tap 3 or 2 to move upward or downward for more selection.
0
Tap L to exit the menu.
0
Tap J to return to the previous screen.
5
Tap the appropriate shooting environment.
.
REC
CLOUD
FINE
MWB
AUTO
0
Tap 3 or 2 to move the cursor.
Setting Details
AUTO Adjusts automatically to the natural colors.
MWB Use this when the problem of unnatural colors is
not resolved.
FINE Set this when shooting outdoors on a sunny day.
CLOUD Set this when shooting on a cloudy day or inside a
shade.
HALOGEN Set this when shooting under illumination such as
a video light.
MARINE:BLUE Set this when shooting the sea at deep water area
(water appears blue) using an optional marine
case.
MARINE:GREEN Set this when shooting the sea at shallow water
area (water appears green) using an optional
marine case.
Using MWB
1
Hold a sheet of plain white paper in front of the lens so that the white
paper fills the screen.
2
Tap “MWB” and keep touching while the icon appears and blinks.
3
Release your touch after the menu disappears and o lights up.
Memo :
0
The setting will not change if “MWB” is being tapped too fast (less than 1
second).
Recording
85
Setting Backlight Compensation
You can correct the image when the subject appears too dark due to
backlight.
1
Select the Manual recording mode.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
If the mode is P Intelligent Auto, tap P on the recording screen
to display the mode switching screen.
Tap H to switch the recording mode to Manual.
.
intelligent AUTO
MANUAL
2
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
3
Tap “MENU” in the shortcut menu.
.
MENU
4
Tap “BACKLIGHT COMP.”.
.
BACKLIGHT COMP.
VIDEO
0
Tap 3 or 2 to move upward or downward for more selection.
0
Tap L to exit the menu.
0
Tap J to return to the previous screen.
5
Tap “ON”.
.
ON
OFF
BACKLIGHT COMP.
0
After setting, the backlight icon l appears.
Recording
86
Taking Close-up Shots
You can take close-up shots of an object using the tele macro function.
.
*The image is only an impression.
1
Select the Manual recording mode.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
If the mode is P Intelligent Auto, tap P on the recording screen
to display the mode switching screen.
Tap H to switch the recording mode to Manual.
.
intelligent AUTO
MANUAL
2
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
3
Tap “MENU” in the shortcut menu.
.
MENU
4
Tap “TELE MACRO”.
.
TELE MACRO
VIDEO
0
Tap 3 or 2 to move upward or downward for more selection.
0
Tap L to exit the menu.
0
Tap J to return to the previous screen.
5
Tap “ON”.
.
ON
OFF
TELE MACRO
0
After setting, the tele macro icon o appears.
Setting Details
OFF Enables close-up shots up to 1 m at the telephoto (T) end.
Enables close-up shots up to 5 cm at the wide angle (W) end.
ON Enables close-up shots up to 50 cm at the telephoto (T) end.
Enables close-up shots up to 5 cm at the wide angle (W) end.
Caution :
0
When you are not taking close-up shots, set “TELE MACRO” to “OFF”.
Otherwise, the image may be blur.
Recording
87
Recording with Effects
You can add animation effects to video recordings.
The animation effects appear when smiles are detected or when the screen
is touched.
Type of Effect Description of Effect
ANIMATION EFFECT Records videos with animation effects.
“Recording with Animation Effects”
(A p. 88)
DECORATE FACE
EFFECT
Detects faces and enables decorations such as
sunglasses to be added.
“Recording with Face Decorations”
(A p. 90)
STAMP Records videos with various decorative
stamps.
“Recording with Decorative Stamps”
(A p. 90)
HANDWRITING
EFFECT
Records videos with your personal handwriting
or drawing.
“Recording with Personal Handwriting”
(A p. 91)
Recording with Animation Effects
You can add animation effects to video recordings.
The animation effects appear when smiles are detected or when the screen
is touched.
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Check if the recording mode is A.
0
If the mode is B still image, tap B on the recording screen to display
the mode switching screen.
Tap A to switch the recording mode. (You can also use the A/B
button on this unit.)
2
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
3
Tap “MENU”. (Go to step 4.)
Alternatively, tap 4 in the shortcut menu. (Go to step 5.)
.
MENU
4
Tap “ANIMATION EFFECT”.
.
ANIMATION EFFECT
VIDEO
0
Tap 3 or 2 to move upward or downward for more selection.
0
Tap L to exit the menu.
0
Tap J to return to the previous screen.
5
Select a desired effect and tap “SET”.
.
SET
0
Tap 0 or 1 to change the effect.
0
Press the START/STOP button the camera to start recording.
Press again to stop.
0
To perform operations other than recording, tap L to cancel the
“ANIMATION EFFECT” first.
Recording
88
During Setting After Setting Note
. .
Animation (effect) appears when
smiles are detected.
.
.
Animation (effect) appears when
smiles are detected.
. .
Animation (effect) appears when
smiles are detected.
.
.
Animation (effect) appears when
smiles are detected.
. .
Animation (effect) appears when the
screen is touched.
. .
Animation (effect) appears when the
screen is touched.
. .
Animation (effect) appears when the
screen is touched.
. .
Animation (effect) appears when the
screen is touched.
Recording
89
Recording with Face Decorations
Detects faces and enables decorations such as sunglasses to be added.
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Check if the recording mode is A.
0
If the mode is B still image, tap B on the recording screen to display
the mode switching screen.
Tap A to switch the recording mode. (You can also use the A/B
button on this unit.)
2
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
3
Tap “MENU”. (Go to step 4.)
Alternatively, tap “DECORATE FACE EFFECT”(5) in the shortcut menu.
(Go to step 5.)
.
MENU
4
Tap “DECORATE FACE EFFECT”.
.
DECORATE FACE EFFECT
VIDEO
0
Tap 3 or 2 to move upward or downward for more selection.
0
Tap L to exit the menu.
0
Tap J to return to the previous screen.
5
Select a desired effect and tap “SET”.
.
SET
0
Tap 0 or 1 to select an item.
0
Press the START/STOP button the camera to start recording.
Press again to stop.
0
To perform operations other than recording, tap L to cancel the
“DECORATE FACE EFFECT” first.
Recording with Decorative Stamps
Records videos with various decorative stamps.
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Check if the recording mode is A.
0
If the mode is B still image, tap B on the recording screen to display
the mode switching screen.
Tap A to switch the recording mode. (You can also use the A/B
button on this unit.)
2
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
3
Tap “MENU”. (Go to step 4.)
Alternatively, tap “STAMP”(7) in the shortcut menu. (Go to step 5.)
.
MENU
4
Tap “STAMP”.
.
STAMP
VIDEO
0
Tap 3 or 2 to move upward or downward for more selection.
0
Tap L to exit the menu.
0
Tap J to return to the previous screen.
5
Select a stamp.
.
1
0:00:00ޓ[0:53]
0
Tap K to start selecting a stamp. Tap on the desired stamp to use.
The number indicates the size of the stamp.
Recording
90
.
1
0
Tap I to scroll through the list of stamps.
0
Tap M to change the size of stamps.
0
Tap J to return to the previous screen.
6
Tap on the screen to add a stamp.
.
0:00:00ޓ[0:53]
1
ON/
OFF
0
Tap Jto delete the stamp.
0
Tap “ON/OFF” to display/hide the stamps.
0
Press the START/STOP button the camera to start recording.
Press again to stop.
0
To perform operations other than recording, tap L to cancel the
“STAMP” first.
Memo :
0
Up to 50 stamps may be added.
0
The added stamps are deleted when the stamp mode ends or when power
is turned off.
Recording with Personal Handwriting
Records videos with your personal handwriting or drawing.
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Check if the recording mode is A.
0
If the mode is B still image, tap B on the recording screen to display
the mode switching screen.
Tap A to switch the recording mode. (You can also use the A/B
button on this unit.)
2
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
3
Tap “MENU”. (Go to step 4.)
Alternatively, tap “HANDWRITING EFFECT”(6) in the shortcut menu. (Go
to step 5.)
.
MENU
4
Tap “HANDWRITING EFFECT”.
.
HANDWRITING EFFECT
VIDEO
0
Tap 3 or 2 to move upward or downward for more selection.
0
Tap L to exit the menu.
0
Tap J to return to the previous screen.
5
Select a line.
.
0:00:00ޓ[0:53]
1
0
Tap G to select the line color and thickness. The number indicates
the thickness of the line.
Recording
91
.
1
0
You can select a color from white, gray, black, etc.
0
Select P to tap and erase part of the line.
0
Tap H to select the line color.
Tap
I
to scroll through the list of colors.
0
Tap
L
to select the line thickness.
0
Tap
J
to return to the previous screen.
6
Start writing and drawing with the provided stylus.
.
0:00:00ޓ[0:53]
1
ON/
OFF
0
Tap J to delete all the lines.
0
Tap “ON/OFF” to display/hide the lines.
0
Press the START/STOP button the camera to start recording.
Press again to stop.
0
To perform operations other than recording, tap L to cancel the
“HANDWRITING EFFECT” first.
Memo :
0
If the writings and drawings appear to be misaligned, correct the touch
position.
“ TOUCH SCREEN ADJUST ” (A p. 194)
0
The writings and drawings are deleted when the handwriting mode ends
or when the power is turned off.
Recording
92
Capturing Subjects Clearly (TOUCH PRIORITY
AE/AF)
“TOUCH PRIORITY AE/AF” is a function that adjusts focus and brightness
based on a tapped position.
By registering the face of a person beforehand, you can enable tracking of
the person even without specific selection during recording.
This function is available for both videos and still images.
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Set the recording mode to either A video or B still image.
0
To switch the mode between video and still image, tap A or B on the
recording screen to display the mode switching screen.
Tap A or B to switch the mode to video or still image respectively.
(You can also use the A/B button on this unit.)
2
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
3
Tap “MENU” in the shortcut menu.
.
MENU
4
Tap “TOUCH PRIORITY AE/AF”.
.
TOUCH PRIORITY AE/AF
VIDEO
0
Tap 3 or 2 to move upward or downward for more selection.
0
Tap L to exit the menu.
0
Tap J to return to the previous screen.
5
Tap the desired setting.
.
COLOR TRACKING
PET TRACKING
FACE TRACKING
OFF
TOUCH PRIORITY AE/AF
.
AREA SELECTCOLOR TRACKING
PET TRACKINGFACE TRACKING
0
Focus and brightness will be adjusted automatically based on the
tapped position (face/color/area). A blue frame appears around the
selected subject (face/color), while a white frame appears around the
selected area.
0
To reset, tap the desired position (face/color/area) again.
0
To cancel “FACE TRACKING”, “PET TRACKING”, or “COLOR
TRACKING”, tap the blue frame.
0
To cancel “AREA SELECT”, tap the white frame.
Setting Details
OFF Deactivates the function.
FACE
TRACKING
e appears on the screen. Recording is performed while
tracking and automatically adjusting the tapped face
(subject) with appropriate focus and brightness. In
addition, a blue frame appears around the tapped face
(subject). (When the face of a person is registered, it
becomes the main subject and the blue frame appears
even without specific selection.)
PET
TRACKING
N appears on the screen. Recording is performed while
tracking and automatically adjusting the tapped pet
(subject) with appropriate focus and brightness. In
addition, a blue frame appears around the tapped pet
(subject).
COLOR
TRACKING
f appears on the screen. Recording is performed while
tracking and automatically adjusting the tapped color
(subject) with appropriate focus and brightness. In
addition, a blue frame appears around the tapped color
(subject).
AREA
SELECT
g appears on the screen. Recording is performed while
automatically adjusting the tapped area (fixed position)
with appropriate focus and brightness. In addition, a
white frame appears around the tapped area.
Memo :
0
When “TOUCH PRIORITY AE/AF” is set, “FOCUS” will be set to “AUTO”
automatically.
0
Tap the selected position (face/color/area) again to cancel the setting.
(Setting remains for registered faces.)
0
Tap on an unselected position (face/color/area) to reset.
0
If the camera loses track of a subject, tap the subject again.
0
Settings are canceled when zoom operation is performed. (“AREA
SELECT” only)
0
When “FACE TRACKING” is set after face registration, the blue frame
appears around the face with the highest priority registered.
0
When recording registered faces using “FACE TRACKING”, focus and
brightness will be adjusted automatically even without specific selection.
In addition, registered faces may be tracked back again even if they are
lost. Therefore, it is recommended to register the faces that are often being
recorded by this camera beforehand.
“Registering Human Face Personal Authentication Information”
(A p. 99)
0
When “COLOR TRACKING” is set, the targeted subject (color) may
change if similar colors are detected. In this case, tap the subject again.
Recording
93
The targeted subject (color) may also be tracked back again if it appears
in the center of the screen within a specific time.
Caution :
0
Subjects near the sides of the LCD monitor may not respond or be
recognized when tapped. In this case, move the subject to the center and
tap again.
0
“FACE TRACKING” may not work properly depending on the shooting
conditions (distance, angle, brightness, etc.) and the subject (direction of
face, etc.). It is also particularly difficult to detect faces in backlight.
0
“PET TRACKING” may not work properly depending on the type of pet,
shooting conditions (distance, angle, brightness, etc.) and the subject
(direction of face, etc.). It is also particularly difficult to detect faces of pets
that are totally black, covered in long hair, or in backlight.
0
“COLOR TRACKING” may not function properly in the following cases:
- when recording subjects with no contrast
- when recording subjects that are moving at high speed
- when recording in a dark place
- when the surrounding brightness changes
0
When “FACE TRACKING” is set, the subject may be lost if the camera is
moved vertically or horizontally very fast. For unregistered faces, they
cannot be tracked back again. To track back the subject, tap on it again.
For registered faces, focus and brightness will be adjusted automatically
even without specific selection. In addition, registered faces may be
tracked back again even if they are lost. Therefore, it is recommended to
register the faces that are often being recorded by this camera
beforehand.
“Registering Human Face Personal Authentication Information”
(A p. 99)
Capturing Smiles Automatically (SMILE SHOT)
“SMILE SHOT” automatically captures a still image upon detection of a
smile.
This function is available for both videos and still images.
Set “TOUCH PRIORITY AE/AF” to “FACE TRACKING” before selecting
“SMILE SHOT”.
“Capturing Subjects Clearly (TOUCH PRIORITY AE/AF)” (A p. 93)
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Set the recording mode to either A video or B still image.
0
To switch the mode between video and still image, tap A or B on the
recording screen to display the mode switching screen.
Tap A or B to switch the mode to video or still image respectively.
(You can also use the A/B button on this unit.)
2
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
3
Tap “MENU”. (Go to step 4.)
Alternatively, tap “SMILE SHOT”(8) in the shortcut menu. (Go to step
5.)
.
MENU
4
Tap “SMILE SHOT”.
.
SMILE SHOT
VIDEO
0
Tap 3 or 2 to move upward or downward for more selection.
0
Tap L to exit the menu.
0
Tap J to return to the previous screen.
5
Tap “ON”.
.
ON
OFF
SMILE SHOT
0
Tap L to exit the menu as the previous screen appears.
6
Point the camera toward the human subject.
0
A still image is automatically captured when smiles are detected.
Recording
94
.
PLAY
REC
MENU
0
PHOTO lights up when a still image is being captured.
0
You can display the name and smile level (%) together with the frame
by setting “SMILE%/NAME DISPLAY” in the menu to “ON” before
recording.
“Setting SMILE%/NAME DISPLAY” (A p. 101)
Memo :
0
The camera is able to detect up to 16 faces. Smile levels will be displayed
for up to 3 of the largest faces displayed on the screen.
0
This function may not work properly depending on the shooting conditions
(distance, angle, brightness, etc.) and the subject (direction of face, smile
level, etc.). It is also difficult to detect a smile in backlight.
0
After a smile is detected and captured, it takes time before the next
recording may be performed.
0
“SMILE SHOT” does not work in the following cases:
- when menu is being displayed
- when remaining recording time or battery power is being displayed
- when “FACE SUB-WINDOW” is set
- when “ANIMATION EFFECT” is set
- when “DECORATE FACE EFFECT” is set
- when “STAMP” is set
- when “HANDWRITING EFFECT” is set
- when “AUTO REC” is set
- when “DATE/TIME RECORDING” is set
“Recording while Displaying a Magnified View of a Selected Face (FACE
SUB-WINDOW)” (A p. 97)
“Recording with Animation Effects” (A p. 88)
Caution :
0
If “TOUCH PRIORITY AE/AF” is not set to “FACE TRACKING”, “SMILE
SHOT” will not work.
0
If appropriate results cannot be obtained, record with “SMILE SHOT” set
to “OFF”.
Recording
95
Capturing Pets Automatically (PET SHOT)
“PET SHOT” automatically captures a still image upon detection of the face
of a pet, such as dogs or cats.
This function is available for both videos and still images.
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Set the recording mode to either A video or B still image.
0
To switch the mode between video and still image, tap A or B on the
recording screen to display the mode switching screen.
Tap A or B to switch the mode to video or still image respectively.
(You can also use the A/B button on this unit.)
2
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
3
Tap “MENU” in the shortcut menu.
.
MENU
4
Tap “PET SHOT”.
.
PET SHOT
VIDEO
0
Tap 3 or 2 to move upward or downward for more selection.
0
Tap L to exit the menu.
0
Tap J to return to the previous screen.
5
Tap “ON”.
.
ON
OFF
PET SHOT
0
Tap L to exit the menu as the previous screen appears.
6
Point the camera toward the pet.
0
A still image is automatically captured when faces of pets are
detected.
.
PLAY
REC
MENU
0
PHOTO lights up when a still image is being captured.
Recording
96
Memo :
0
The camera is able to detect up to 6 faces of pets.
0
“PET SHOT” may not work properly depending on the type of pet, shooting
conditions (distance, angle, brightness, etc.) and the subject (direction of
face, etc.). It is also particularly difficult to detect faces of pets that are
totally black, covered in long hair, or in backlight.
0
Subjects other than your pet may be detected by mistake sometimes.
Make use of “PET SHOT” only for pets such as dogs or cats.
0
After a pet is detected and captured, it takes time before the next recording
may be performed.
0
“PET SHOT” does not work in the following cases:
- when menu is being displayed
- when remaining recording time or battery power is being displayed
- when “FACE SUB-WINDOW” is set
- when “ANIMATION EFFECT” is set
- when “DECORATE FACE EFFECT” is set
- when “STAMP” is set
- when “HANDWRITING EFFECT” is set
- when “AUTO REC” is set
- when “DATE/TIME RECORDING” is set
“Recording while Displaying a Magnified View of a Selected Face (FACE
SUB-WINDOW)” (A p. 97)
“Recording with Effects” (A p. 88)
Caution :
0
When “PET SHOT” is set to “ON”, “TOUCH PRIORITY AE/AF” will be set
to “PET TRACKING” automatically. Even when “PET SHOT” is set to “ON”
, if “TOUCH PRIORITY AE/AF” is not set to “PET TRACKING”, “PET
SHOT” will be set to “OFF” automatically.
0
If appropriate results cannot be obtained, record with “PET SHOT” set to
“OFF”.
Recording while Displaying a Magnified View of a Selected
Face (FACE SUB-WINDOW)
You can record while viewing both the overall image of the scene and
magnified image of a subject’s expression. Frames appear around the faces
that can be magnified. Tap a frame to track and magnify the face in a sub-
window.
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Check if the recording mode is A.
0
If the mode is B still image, tap B on the recording screen to display
the mode switching screen.
Tap A to switch the mode to video. (You can also use the A/B button
on this unit.)
2
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
3
Tap “MENU” in the shortcut menu.
.
MENU
4
Tap “FACE SUB-WINDOW”.
.
FACE SUB-WINDOW
VIDEO
5
Tap on the frame of the face to magnify.
.
0:00:00 [0:54]
PLAY
REC
MENU
0
When the face within a frame is tapped, it is displayed in a sub-
window. The display position of the sub-window is set automatically
according to the position of the tapped face.
0
The frame of the tapped face changes to blue.
0
When the tapped face disappears from the screen, the sub-window
disappears too. When the face reappears on the screen., the sub-
window is displayed again automatically.
0
To exit “FACE SUB-WINDOW”, tap “L”.
Recording
97
Caution :
0
Take note of the following when “FACE SUB-WINDOW” is set.
- Functions such as digital zoom, zoom operation on the touch screen,
simultaneous still image recording, “TIME-LAPSE RECORDING”,
“DECORATE FACE EFFECT”, “STAMP”, “HANDWRITING EFFECT”,
“DATE/TIME RECORDING”, and “AUTO REC” are not available.
- Settings such as “FOCUS” and “BRIGHTNESS ADJUST” are set to
“AUTO” automatically.
- If “TOUCH PRIORITY AE/AF” is set to FACE TRACKING, appropriate
focus and brightness will be adjusted for the person displayed in the sub-
window.
- “ANIMATION EFFECT” is not available.
0
The sub-window display will also be recorded.
Memo :
0
When a face is magnified and displayed in the sub-window, only the name
of the person will be displayed.
(When a face is not registered, the name of the person will not be
displayed.)
0
The face sub-window mode is canceled when the power is turned off.
0
Frames do not appear around the faces in the face sub-window mode as
easily as in the other modes. They appear around the faces that can be
magnified only. The frames do not appear in the following cases:
- when the face of the subject is extremely small
- when the surrounding is too dark or too bright
- when the face appears horizontal or slanted
- when the face appears bigger than the sub-window (such as when it is
zoomed in)
- when a part of the face is hidden
“Registering Human Face Personal Authentication Information”
(A p. 99)
Recording
98
Registering Human Face Personal
Authentication Information
By registering the face of a person beforehand, focus and brightness can be
adjusted automatically by the face tracking function. Up to 6 faces, together
with names and priority levels, can be registered.
It is recommended to register the faces that are often being recorded by this
camera beforehand.
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Set the recording mode to either A video or B still image.
0
To switch the mode between video and still image, tap A or B on the
recording screen to display the mode switching screen.
Tap A or B to switch the mode to video or still image respectively.
(You can also use the A/B button on this unit.)
2
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
3
Tap “MENU” in the shortcut menu.
.
MENU
4
Tap “FACE REGISTRATION”.
.
FACE REGISTRATION
VIDEO
0
Tap 3 or 2 to move upward or downward for more selection.
0
Tap L to exit the menu.
0
Tap J to return to the previous screen.
5
Tap “REGISTER NEW FACE”.
.
CANCEL
EDIT
REGISTER NEW FACE
FACE REGISTRATION
6
Point the camera toward the human subject.
.
STOP
NEED TO FIT FACE IN FRAME
0
Information is collected before face registration recording. The frame
appears blinking while information is being collected.
0
Adjust to fit the face within the frame while it is blinking. The frame
stops blinking and lights up after information collection is complete.
0
To cancel the registration, tap “STOP”.
When “CANCEL FACE RECOGNITION?” appears, tap “YES” to
return to the normal recording mode.
7
Tap “RECORD” and record the face from the front.
.
STOP
RECORD
RECORD THE FRONT VIEW
0
A face is captured to be used on the face registration index screen.
0
Other than tapping “RECORD”, you can also record by pressing the
SNAPSHOT button fully.
0
A sound can be heard when recording is complete.
0
To cancel the registration, tap “STOP”.
When “CANCEL FACE RECOGNITION?” appears, tap “YES” to
return to the normal recording mode.
8
Tap “YES” to continue recording.
.
NOYES
CONTINUE RECORDING?
FACE RECOGNITION ACCURACY,
MORE FACE DATA WILL IMPROVE
CURRENT RECORDING IS OK,
0
To proceed to collect face information in the four directions of up,
down, left, and right, tap “YES”. It is recommended to continue
recording to increase the accuracy of face recognition.
0
To end face registration recording, tap “NO”. Go to step 11.
9
Rotate the face slowly in four directions to register the face information.
.
STOP
ROTATE THE FACE SLOWLY
0
Rotate the face slowly while looking at the camera. A sound can be
heard when recording is complete for each direction. (4 times in total)
Repeat the step until recording (registration) is complete for all
directions.
0
Registration of the four directions may fail depending on the shooting
environment. In this case, tap “STOP” to cancel recording, then tap
“NO” and go to step 11.
0
If the face cannot be properly recognized during recording, register
the face again.
10
Face the camera with a smiling face.
Recording
99
.
STOP
SMILE
RECORD FRONT OF SMILING FACE
0
Recording starts automatically. Using the smile % display as a
reference, smile such that the value is as high as possible.
0
A sound can be heard when recording is complete.
0
To cancel recording of smiling face and proceed to enter a name, tap
“STOP”, then tap “NO” and go to step 11.
11
Tap “OK”.
.
STOP
OK
ENTER A NAME
RECORDING COMPLETED
0
Tapping “OK” registers the recorded face and the screen for entering
a name appears.
0
To cancel the registration, tap “STOP”.
When “CANCEL FACE RECOGNITION?” appears, tap “YES” to
return to the normal recording mode.
12
Tap on the on-screen keyboard to enter a name, then tap “REG.”.
.
CANCELREG.
DELETE
0
Tap “DELETE” to delete a character.
0
Tap “CANCEL” to exit.
0
Tap “A/a/1” to select character input type from upper case letter, lower
case letter, and number.
0
Tap E or F to move one space to the left or right.
0
Up to 8 characters can be entered.
0
How to input characters
Example: To enter “KEN”
Tap “JKL” 2 times F Tap “DEF” 2 times F Tap “MNO” 2 times
13
Tap the desired priority level, then tap “REG.”.
.
KEN
STOPREG.
TOUCH ORDER TO RECOGNIZE
0
Upon registration, the last number is assigned as the priority level.
During face detection, the subject with the highest priority (lowest
number) will be detected.
0
You can change the priority level of a subject by tapping on the
number.
Example: To change the priority level of number 3 to number 1, tap
number 1. The priority level of the registered subject becomes
number 1, while the priority levels of the original number 1 and the
ones below drop by one place. (In this example, the original number
1 becomes number 2, and the orignal number 2 becomes number 3.)
0
When “REG.” is tapped, the registration complete screen appears.
.
OK
REGISTERED
0
Tap “OK” to complete the registration.
0
You can edit registered face information in “EDIT”.
“Editing the Registered Face Information” (A p. 102)
Recording
100
Memo :
0
Faces may not be registered correctly in the following cases:
- when the face appears either too small or too large compared to the frame
- when it is too dark or too bright
- when the face appears horizontal or slanted
- when a part of the face is hidden
- when there are multiple faces within the frame
0
To increase the accuracy of face recognition, fit only one face within the
frame and register in a bright environment.
0
Faces may not be recognized correctly depending on the shooting
conditions and environment. In this case, register the face again.
0
Faces may not be recognized correctly during recording if the face
recognition level is low. In this case, register the face again.
0
Face tracking, face sub-window, and name display may not work properly
depending on the registered faces, shooting conditions (distance, angle,
brightness, etc.), and expressions.
0
Face tracking, face sub-window, and name display may not work properly
for people with similar facial features, such as siblings, parents, children,
etc.
Setting SMILE%/NAME DISPLAY
“SMILE%/NAME DISPLAY” allows you to set the items to display when faces
are detected.
This item is only displayed when “TOUCH PRIORITY AE/AF” is set to “FACE
TRACKING”.
“Capturing Subjects Clearly (TOUCH PRIORITY AE/AF)” (A p. 93)
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Set the recording mode to either A video or B still image.
0
To switch the mode between video and still image, tap A or B on the
recording screen to display the mode switching screen.
Tap A or B to switch the mode to video or still image respectively.
(You can also use the A/B button on this unit.)
2
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
3
Tap “MENU”. (Go to step 4.)
Alternatively, tap “SMILE%/NAME DISPLAY”(9) in the shortcut menu.
(Go to step 5.)
.
MENU
4
Tap “SMILE%/NAME DISPLAY”.
.
SMILE%/NAME DISPLAY
VIDEO
Recording
101
5
Tap the desired setting.
.
ON
OFF
SMILE%/NAME DISPLAY
Setting Details
OFF Displays only the frames when faces are detected.
ON Displays the frames, names, and smile levels (%) when faces
are detected.
0
Frame: Appears around detected faces.
Name: Appears for faces that are registered.
Smile level: Appears in value (0 % - 100 %) for detected smiles.
.
JOHN
90%
90%
SMILE
70%
70%
SMILE
Memo :
0
The camera is able to detect up to 16 faces. Smile levels will be displayed
for up to 3 of the largest faces displayed on the screen.
0
Some faces may not be detected depending on the shooting environment.
0
You can register personal authentication information like face, name, and
priority level of person before recording.
0
Up to 3 registered names will be displayed according to the priority level.
“Registering Human Face Personal Authentication Information” (A p. 99)
0
“SMILE%/NAME DISPLAY” is set to “ON” when the demo mode is
activated.
“ DEMO MODE ” (A p. 194)
Editing the Registered Face Information
Editing Registered Face Information
You can change the name, priority level, and face information that are
registered.
1
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “MENU” in the shortcut menu.
.
MENU
3
Tap “FACE REGISTRATION”.
.
FACE REGISTRATION
VIDEO
0
Tap 3 or 2 to move upward or downward for more selection.
0
Tap L to exit the menu.
0
Tap J to return to the previous screen.
4
Tap “EDIT”.
.
CANCEL
EDIT
REGISTER NEW FACE
FACE REGISTRATION
5
Tap the person to edit.
.
JOHN MIKE
KEN
STOP
TOUCH PERSON TO EDIT
6
Tap the item to edit.
Recording
102
.
STOP
CHANGE ORDER OF PRIORITY
CHANGE NAME
RECORD AGAIN
0
If you select “RECORD AGAIN”, proceed to step 6 in ““Registering
Human Face Personal Authentication Information” (A p. 99) ”.
0
If you select “CHANGE NAME”, proceed to step 12 in ““Registering
Human Face Personal Authentication Information” (A p. 100) ”.
0
If you select “CHANGE ORDER OF PRIORITY”, proceed to step 13
in ““Registering Human Face Personal Authentication Information”
(A p. 100) ”.
“Registering Human Face Personal Authentication Information”
(A p. 99)
Canceling (Deleting) Registered Face Information
You can cancel (delete) the face information that is registered.
1
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “MENU” in the shortcut menu.
.
MENU
3
Tap “FACE REGISTRATION”.
.
FACE REGISTRATION
VIDEO
0
Tap 3 or 2 to move upward or downward for more selection.
0
Tap L to exit the menu.
0
Tap J to return to the previous screen.
4
Tap “CANCEL”.
.
CANCEL
EDIT
REGISTER NEW FACE
FACE REGISTRATION
5
Tap the person to cancel registration of.
.
JOHN MIKE
KEN
STOP
TOUCH PERSON TO CANCEL
0
A appears on the selected person.
0
To remove A from a person, tap on the person again.
6
Tap “SET”.
.
JOHN MIKE
KEN
STOPSET
TOUCH PERSON TO CANCEL
7
Tap “YES”.
.
NOYES
CANCEL SELECTED PERSON?
0
Tap “YES” to delete the face information of the selected person.
0
Tap “NO” to return to the previous screen.
0
Tap “OK” when the deletion complete screen appears.
Recording
103
Reducing Camera Shake
When the image stabilizer is set, camera shake during video recording can
be effectively reduced.
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
2
Press the a button to change the setting.
.
0
The setting of image stabilizer changes with every press.
Setting Details
b OFF
Deactivates image stabilizer.
a ON
Reduces camera shake under normal shooting
conditions.
r ON (AIS)
Reduces camera shake more effectively when
shooting bright scenes on the wide angle end.
Only on the wide angle end (approx. 5x).
(A video mode only)
Memo :
0
It is recommended to set the image stabilizer to “OFF” when shooting a
subject of little movement with the unit on a tripod.
0
Complete stabilization may not be possible if camera shake is excessive.
0
When “ON (AIS)” is set, the angle of view becomes narrower.
0
Image stabilization only starts when the SNAPSHOT button is pressed
halfway during still image recording.
Slow-motion (High-speed) Recording
You can record videos in slow-motion by increasing the recording speed to
emphasize the movements, and play back the slow-motion video smoothly.
This is a handy function for checking movements, such as golf swings.
Recording Speed 300 fps
Image Size 720×480
Maximum Recording Time 120 m
Maximum Playback Time 12 h
Image Size when Connected to Monitor 1920×1080
0
The playback time will be 6 times of the actual recorded time.
(Example: If the recorded time is 1 minute, the playback time will be 6
minutes.)
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Check if the recording mode is A.
0
If the mode is B still image, tap B on the recording screen to display
the mode switching screen.
Tap A to switch the mode to video. (You can also use the A/B button
on this unit.)
2
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
3
Tap “MENU” in the shortcut menu.
.
MENU
4
Tap “HIGH SPEED RECORDING”.
.
VIDEO
HIGH SPEED RECORDING
5
Tap “ON”.
Recording
104
.
OFF
ON
HIGH SPEED RECORDING
0
When “ON” is tapped, 300 frames can be recorded in 1 second.
0
To cancel high-speed recording, tap “OFF”.
6
Start recording.
.
0
Press the START/STOP button again to stop recording.
0
Settings of high-speed recording are not saved when the power is
turned off.
Memo :
0
Images may appear grainier than other videos. The image displayed on
the LCD monitor during recording also may also appear grainier.
0
Audio sound is not recorded together with the video.
0
When high-speed recording is enabled, only the optical zoom can be
used.
0
During high-speed recording, “TOUCH PRIORITY AE/AF” is set to “OFF”
. In addition, as “DIS” is set to “OFF”, it is recommended that a tripod be
used, and recording be performed in a bright location with the subject
magnified as much as possible.
“Tripod Mounting” (A p. 70)
Recording at Intervals (TIME-LAPSE
RECORDING)
Enables the changes of a scene that occur slowly over a long period to be
shown within a short time by taking frames of it at a certain interval.
This is useful for making observations such as the opening of a flower bud.
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Check if the recording mode is A.
0
If the mode is B still image, tap B on the recording screen to display
the mode switching screen.
Tap A to switch the mode to video. (You can also use the A/B button
on this unit.)
2
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
3
Tap “MENU” in the shortcut menu.
.
MENU
4
Tap “TIME-LAPSE RECORDING”.
.
TIME-LAPSE RECORDING
VIDEO
0
Tap 3 or 2 to move upward or downward for more selection.
0
Tap L to exit the menu.
0
Tap J to return to the previous screen.
5
Tap to select a recording interval (1 to 80 seconds).
.
5SEC INTERVAL
2SEC INTERVAL
1SEC INTERVAL
OFF
TIME-LAPSE RECORDING
0
The greater the number of seconds, the longer the recording interval.
0
Tap 3 or 2 to move upward or downward for more selection.
0
Tap L to exit the menu.
0
Tap J to return to the previous screen.
Recording
105
6
Start recording.
.
0
A frame is taken at intervals of the selected period.
0
When the recording interval is set to “20SEC INTERVAL” or higher,
this unit switches to the power-saving mode between recordings.
At the next point to record, the power-saving mode will be turned off
and recording will start automatically.
0
Press the START/STOP button again to stop recording.
Indications During Time-Lapse Recording
.
0:00:01 [5:56]
0:00:01 [5:56]
0:00:00:01
0:00:00:01
Display Description
A
Video Quality Displays the icon of the video quality that is set.
B
Speed Indicator Displays the recording interval that is set.
C
Recorded Time Displays the actual recorded time of the video.
Recorded time increases in units of frames.
D
Actual Elapsed
Time
Displays the actual elapsed time after
recording starts.
E
Remaining
Recording Time
Remaining time left to record with the currently
selected video quality.
Time-Lapse Setting
The greater the number of seconds, the longer the recording interval.
Setting Details
OFF Deactivates the function.
1SEC INTERVAL Takes a frame at 1-second intervals.
Recorded videos will be played back at 30 times
speed.
2SEC INTERVAL Takes a frame at 2-second intervals.
Recorded videos will be played back at 60 times
speed.
5SEC INTERVAL Takes a frame at 5-second intervals.
Recorded videos will be played back at 150 times
speed.
10SEC INTERVAL Takes a frame at 10-second intervals.
Recorded videos will be played back at 300 times
speed.
20SEC INTERVAL Takes a frame at 20-second intervals.
Recorded videos will be played back at 600 times
speed.
40SEC INTERVAL Takes a frame at 40-second intervals.
Recorded videos will be played back at 1 200 times
speed.
80SEC INTERVAL Takes a frame at 80-second intervals.
Recorded videos will be played back at 2 400 times
speed.
Caution :
0
Audio cannot be recorded during time-lapse recording.
0
Zooming, simultaneous still image recording, and image stabilizer are not
available in time-lapse recording.
0
When recording is stopped with the recorded time less than “0:00:00:17”
, the video will not be saved.
0
Seamless recording is disabled in time-lapse recording.
Memo :
0
Settings of time-lapse recording are reset when the power is turned off.
To start time-lapse recording again, it is necessary to make the selection
once more.
0
Recording stops automatically 99 hours after it is started.
0
Make use of a tripod and AC adapter for time-lapse recordings with long
intervals.
It is also recommended to fix the focus and white balance manually.
“Tripod Mounting” (A p. 70)
“Adjusting Focus Manually” (A p. 83)
“Setting White Balance” (A p. 85)
Recording
106
Recording Automatically by Sensing
Movements (AUTO REC)
This function enables the unit to record automatically by sensing the changes
in subject’s movement (brightness) within the red frame displayed on the
LCD monitor.
It can be set for both video and still image modes.
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Set the recording mode to either A video or B still image.
0
To switch the mode between video and still image, tap A or B on the
recording screen to display the mode switching screen.
Tap A or B to switch the mode to video or still image respectively.
(You can also use the A/B button on this unit.)
2
Compose the picture according to the subject.
0
Adjust the angle of view with the zoom, etc.
3
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
4
Tap “MENU” in the shortcut menu.
.
MENU
5
Tap “AUTO REC”.
.
AUTO REC
VIDEO
0
Tap 3 or 2 to move upward or downward for more selection.
0
Tap L to exit the menu.
0
Tap J to return to the previous screen.
6
Tap “ON”.
.
ON
OFF
AUTO REC
7
Recording starts automatically when the subject within the red frame
moves.
.
0:00:00[0:00]
0
A red frame appears 2 seconds after the menu display disappears.
0
For video recording, recording continues while there are still
movements of the subject (changes in brightness) within the red
frame. When there are no more movements of the subject (changes
in brightness) within the red frame, recording will stop in 5 seconds.
0
To stop video recording manually, press the START/STOP button.
However, as the “AUTO REC” setting remains at “ON” even after the
video recording is stopped, recording starts again when movements
of the subject (changes in brightness) are detected within the red
frame. To cancel “AUTO REC”, set it to “OFF”.
Caution :
0
Digital zoom, image stabilizer, and self-timer are not available after “AUTO
REC” is set.
0
“AUTO REC” cannot be used together with “TIME-LAPSE RECORDING”
. When both are set, priority is given to “TIME-LAPSE RECORDING”.
0
“IMAGE SIZE” cannot be changed after “AUTO REC” is selected.
Set it before selecting “AUTO REC”.
0
The auto power off and power-saving modes are not available after “AUTO
REC” is set.
Memo :
0
Recording stops when there are no changes for 5 seconds during video
recording.
0
Settings of “AUTO REC” are not saved when the power is turned off.
0
Recording may not start when the movements of the subject within the red
frame are too fast or the changes in brightness are too small.
0
Recording may start due to changes in brightness even if there is no
movement within the red frame.
0
While zooming, recording cannot be started.
Recording
107
Taking Group Shots (Self-timer)
The 10-second self-timer and Face Detection self-timer are convenient
functions for taking group photos.
The 2-second self-timer is useful for preventing camera shake caused by
pressing the shutter button.
Memo :
When shooting a photo using the self-timer function, use of a tripod is
recommended.
“Tripod Mounting” (A p. 70)
Using the 2-/10-second Self-timer
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Check if the recording mode is B.
0
If the mode is A video, tap A on the recording screen to display the
mode switching screen.
Tap B to switch the mode to still image. (You can also use the A/B
button on this unit.)
2
Tap “MENU”.
.
MENU
MENU
PLAY
0
The shortcut menu appears.
3
Tap “MENU” in the shortcut menu.
.
MENU
4
Tap “SELF-TIMER”.
.
SELF-TIMER
IMAGE
0
Tap 3 or 2 to move upward or downward for more selection.
0
Tap L to exit the menu.
0
Tap J to return to the previous screen.
5
Tap “2SEC” or “10SEC”.
.
FACE DETECTION
10SEC
2SEC
OFF
SELF-TIMER
6
Set the focus on the subject.
.
Press halfway
0
When focused, the focus icon lights up in green.
7
Take a still image.
.
Press fully
0
A timer appears and countdown to shooting starts.
0
To stop the self-timer, press the SNAPSHOT button again.
Recording
108
Using the Face Detection Self-timer
Pressing the SNAPSHOT button starts face detection, and shooting is
performed three seconds after another person enters the frame.
This function is useful when you want to include the photographer in the
group photo.
1
Open the LCD monitor and select the still image mode.
.
0
The still image mode icon appears.
2
Tap “MENU”.
.
MENU
MENU
PLAY
0
The shortcut menu appears.
3
Tap “MENU” in the shortcut menu.
.
MENU
4
Tap “SELF-TIMER”.
.
SELF-TIMER
IMAGE
0
Tap 3 or 2 to move upward or downward for more selection.
0
Tap L to exit the menu.
0
Tap J to return to the previous screen.
5
Tap “FACE DETECTION”.
.
FACE DETECTION
10SEC
2SEC
OFF
SELF-TIMER
6
After making sure that everyone is facing the camera, press the
SNAPSHOT button.
.
.
0
Frames appear around the faces of the subjects.
0
Pressing the SNAPSHOT button again starts the 10-second self-
timer.
7
The photographer enters the frame.
.
Photographer
0
The shutter is released 3 seconds after the photographer enters the
frame.
0
To stop the self-timer, press the SNAPSHOT button again.
Memo :
0
The “FACE DETECTION” function may fail to detect faces depending on
the shooting environment.
Recording
109
Recording Videos with Date and Time
You can record videos together with the date and time.
Set this when you want to save the file with date and time display.
(The date and time cannot be deleted after recording.)
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Check if the recording mode is A.
0
If the mode is B still image, tap B on the recording screen to display
the mode switching screen.
Tap A to switch the mode to video. (You can also use the A/B button
on this unit.)
2
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
3
Tap “MENU” in the shortcut menu.
.
MENU
4
Tap “DATE/TIME RECORDING”.
.
DATE/TIME RECORDING
VIDEO
0
Tap 3 or 2 to move upward or downward for more selection.
0
Tap L to exit the menu.
0
Tap J to return to the previous screen.
0
When the item is tapped, the precaution for date/time recording
appears.
5
Press the START/STOP button to start recording.
.
0
Press the START/STOP button again to stop recording.
0
To perform operations other than recording, tap L to cancel the
“DATE/TIME RECORDING” first.
Caution :
0
The date and time cannot be deleted after recording.
Recording
110
Checking the Remaining Recording Time
You can check the remaining recording time on the built-in memory and SD
card as well as the remaining battery power.
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Set the recording mode to either A video or B still image.
0
To switch the mode between video and still image, tap A or B on the
recording screen to display the mode switching screen.
Tap A or B to switch the mode to video or still image respectively.
2
Press the INFO button.
.
0
If in the still image mode, go directly to step 4.
3
Display the remaining recording time.
.
0h46m
0h46m
USED
FREE
MAX RECORDING TIME
0
The remaining recording time is displayed only in the video recording
mode.
0
Press the INFO button to check the remaining recording time of each
recording media.
0
To display the remaining battery power, tap l.
0
l will not be displayed when the AC adapter is connected.
0
Tap J to return to the recording mode.
0
To exit the display, tap L.
4
Display the remaining battery power.
.
MIN
MAX TIME
REMAINING BATTERY
0
For video recording, tap J to return to the remaining recording time
display. For still image recording, tap to return to the recording mode.
0
To exit the display, press the INFO button or tap L.
0
Remaining battery power will not be displayed when the AC adapter
is connected.
Memo :
0
You can change to the desired video quality by tapping on it from the
remaining recording time display.
Recording
111
Approximate Video Recording Time
Quality Built-in Memory
16 GB (GZ-EX250)
UXP 1 h 20 m
XP 1 h 50 m
SP 2 h 40 m
EP 6 h 40 m
SSW 5 h 10 m
SEW 10 h 40 m
Quality SDHC/SDXC Card
4 GB 8 GB 16 GB 32 GB 48 GB 64 GB
UXP 20 m 40 m 1 h 20 m 2 h 50 m 4 h 10 m 5 h 40 m
XP 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 6 h 8 h 10 m
SP 40 m 1 h 20 m 2 h 50 m 5 h 50 m 8 h 30 m 11 h 30 m
EP 1 h 40 m 3 h 30 m 7 h 10 m 14 h 40 m 21 h 30 m 28 h 50 m
SSW 1 h 20 m 2 h 40 m 5 h 30 m 11 h 20 m 16 h 40 m 22 h 20 m
SEW 2 h 50 m 5 h 40 m 11 h 30 m 23 h 30 m 34 h 30 m 46 h 10 m
0
The actual recording time may shorten depending on the shooting environment.
Approximate Number of Still Images (Unit: Number of Shots)
Image Size Built-in Memory SDHC Card
16 GB (GZ-EX250) 4 GB 8 GB 16 GB 32 GB
1920×1080
(16:9)
9999 3100 6500 9999 9999
1440×1080
(4:3)
9999 4200 8500 9999 9999
640×480
(4:3)
9999 9999 9999 9999 9999
0
Still images that are captured during video recording or video playback are saved at a size of 1920 x 1080.
Approximate Recording Time (Using Battery)
Battery Pack
Actual Recording Time Continuous Recording Time
BN-VG114U
(Supplied)
1 h 5 m 2 h
BN-VG121U 1 h 40 m 3 h 5 m
BN-VG138U 3 h 5 h 30 m
0
The above are values when “LIGHT” is set to “OFF” and “MONITOR BRIGHTNESS” is set to “3” (standard).
0
The actual recording time may be shorter if zooming is used or if recording is stopped repeatedly.
(It is recommended to prepare battery packs ready for three times the expected recording time.)
0
Recording time may differ depending on the shooting environment and usage.
0
When the battery life is reached, the recording time becomes shorter even if the battery pack is fully charged. (Replace the battery pack with a new one.)
Recording
112
Playing Back Videos
You can select and play back the recorded videos from an index screen
(thumbnail display).
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Check if the recording mode is A.
0
If the mode is B still image, tap B on the recording screen to display
the mode switching screen.
Tap A to switch the mode to video. (You can also use the A/B button
on this unit.)
2
Tap “<<PLAY” to select the playback mode.
.
PLAY
REC
MENU
3
Tap on the file to start playback.
.
REC
MENU
0
Tap I/J to select the media for playback and change the index
screen (thumbnail display). (GZ-EX250)
0
Tap e to pause.
0
Tap u to return to the index screen.
0
L appears on the last image played back.
Operation Buttons for Video Playback
During Index Screen Display
.
REC
MENU
Display Description
A
Video/Still Image
Mode
Switches between video and still image
modes.
B
Date Moves to the previous/next date
C
< Displays the previous index screen (thumbnail
display)
0
You can perform the same operation with the
zoom lever.
D
> Displays the next index screen (thumbnail
display)
0
You can perform the same operation with the
zoom lever.
E
Thumbnail (File) Tap on thumbnail - Starts playback
Drag to right - Scrolls to the right to show the
previous index screen (thumbnail display)
Drag to left - Scrolls to the left to show the next
index screen (thumbnail display)
F
<<REC Switches to the recording mode.
G
A
Displays the index screen (thumbnail display)
to perform deletion
H
I/J
(GZ-EX250)
Switches between the index screen of the built-
in memory and SD card
I
MENU Displays the menu screen
Playback
113
During Video Playback
.
MENU
REC
0:01:23 0:12:34
Display Description
A
Video/Still Image
Mode
Switches between video and still image
modes.
B
Timeline Bar Tap on a random position - Moves to the
tapped position
Drag playback point to the left or right - Starts
playback from the new position
C
Pointer Displays the current estimated playback
position within the scene
D
h
Returns to the beginning of the scene Returns
to the previous scene if tapped at the beginning
of a scene.
0
You can perform the same operation with the
zoom lever.
E
j
Reverse search (speed increases with each
tap)
E
l
Reverse slow-motion / Press and hold to start
reverse slow playback
F
d / e Playback/pause
G
i
Forward search (speed increases with each
tap)
G
k
Forward slow-motion / Press and hold to start
slow playback
H
g
Advances to the next scene
0
You can perform the same operation with the
zoom lever.
I
<<REC Switches to the recording mode.
J
u
Stop (returns to index screen)
K
A
Deletes the currently displayed video.
L
MENU Displays the menu screen
Memo :
0
Tap or drag on the operation area of the touch screen.
0
Operations buttons on the touch screen disappear if the unit is not
operated for about 5 seconds. Tap on the screen to display the operation
buttons again.
0
You can search for a specific file by the recording date.
“Searching for a Specific Video/Still Image by Date” (A p. 118)
0
The recording date and time can be displayed on the screen during
playback.
“ DISPLAY DATE/TIME ” (A p. 184)
Adjusting the Volume of Videos
You can use the zoom/volume lever to control the volume.
.
Turn up the volumeTurn down the
volume
Caution :
0
Make a backup of important recorded data.
It is recommended to copy your important recorded data to a DVD or other
recording media for storage.
0
This unit is a microcomputer-controlled device. Electrostatic discharge,
external noise and interference (from a TV, a radio, etc.) might prevent it
from functioning properly. In such a case, turn off the power, then remove
the AC adapter and battery pack. This unit will be reset.
0
Make a backup of important recorded data.
- It is recommended to copy your important recorded data to a DVD or
other recording media for storage.
- JVC will not be responsible for any lost data.
Checking the Recording Date and Other Information
1
Pause the playback and press the INFO button.
You can display the recording date and duration of the selected file.
.
00:10:00
:
:
:
:
10:00
OFF
XP
PROTECT
QUALITY
PB TIME
DATE/TIME
Playback
114
Checking the Content of Videos Quickly (Digest Playback)
You can play back a digest of the recorded videos (Digest Playback).
This is useful for checking the content of the videos quickly.
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Check if the recording mode is A.
0
If the mode is B still image, tap B on the recording screen to display
the mode switching screen.
Tap A to switch the mode to video. (You can also use the A/B button
on this unit.)
2
Tap “<<PLAY” to select the playback mode.
.
PLAY
REC
MENU
3
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
MENU
4
Tap “DIGEST PLAYBACK”.
.
DIGEST PLAYBACK
VIDEO
5
Tap to select a date for Digest Playback.
.
NEXT
SELECT DATE
0
After selecting a date, tap “NEXT”.
0
When “ALL” is tapped, Digest Playback will be performed for all the
dates.
0
Tap 3 or 2 to move upward or downward for more selection.
0
Tap L to exit the menu.
0
Tap J to return to the previous screen.
6
Select the Digest Playback time
.
2h21m
REC
1 min
1 min
1 min 5 min
5 min
5 min 15 min
15 min
15 min 45 min
45 min
45 min
3 min
3 min
10 min
10 min
30 min
30 min
60 min
60 min
3 min 10 min 30 min 60 min
DIGEST TIME
0
The time display of Digest Playback varies according to the recording
time.
0
When it takes time (more than 2 seconds) for “DIGEST PLAYBACK”
to start after selecting Digest Playback time, a progress status will be
displayed.
0
The Digest Playback time is only a guide.
7
Digest Playback starts.
.
MENU
REC
DIGEST
0:01:23 0:12:34
0
Tap e to pause.
0
Tap u to return to the index screen.
0
Tap “DIGEST” to return to the normal playback screen.
0
You can tap “MENU” during playback to save the Digest Playback as
a playlist.
Tap “SAVE TO PLAYLIST”, then tap “OK”.
0
Operations During Video Playback
“Operation Buttons for Video Playback” (A p. 113)
Playback
115
Playing a Video with Defective Management Information
The management information of a video may be damaged if recording is not
performed correctly, such as turning off the power in the middle of recording.
You can perform the following operations to play back the videos with
defective management information.
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Check if the recording mode is A.
0
If the mode is B still image, tap B on the recording screen to display
the mode switching screen.
Tap A to switch the mode to video. (You can also use the A/B button
on this unit.)
2
Tap “<<PLAY” to select the playback mode.
.
PLAY
REC
MENU
3
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
MENU
4
Tap “PLAYBACK OTHER FILE”.
.
PLAYBACK OTHER FILE
VIDEO
5
Tap on the file to start playback.
.
MENU
REC
“Playing Back Videos” (A p. 113)
Memo :
0
An MTS file is created in the EXTMOV folder when management
information is corrupted.
0
Depending on the condition of the damaged file, playback might fail or
may not run smoothly.
Playing Back Still Images
You can select and play back the recorded still images from an index screen
(thumbnail display).
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Check if the recording mode is B.
0
If the mode is A video, tap A on the recording screen to display the
mode switching screen.
Tap B to switch the mode to still image. (You can also use the A/B
button on this unit.)
2
Tap “<<PLAY” to select the playback mode.
.
MENU
MENU
PLAY
3
Tap on the file to start playback.
.
MENU
REC
0
Tap I/J to select the media for playback and change the index
screen (thumbnail display). (GZ-EX250)
0
Tap u to return to the index screen.
Playback
116
Operation Buttons for Still Image Playback
During Index Screen Display
.
MENU
REC
Display Description
A
Video/Still Image
Mode
Switches between video and still image
modes.
B
Date Moves to the previous/next date
C
< Displays the previous index screen (thumbnail
display)
0
You can perform the same operation with the
zoom lever.
D
> Displays the next index screen (thumbnail
display)
0
You can perform the same operation with the
zoom lever.
E
File (Still Image) Tap on thumbnail - Starts playback
Drag to right - Scrolls to the right to show the
previous index screen (thumbnail display)
Drag to left - Scrolls to the left to show the next
index screen (thumbnail display)
F
<<REC Switches to the recording mode.
G
A
Displays the index screen (thumbnail display)
to perform deletion
H
I/J
(GZ-EX250)
Switches between the index screen of the built-
in memory and SD card
I
MENU Displays the menu screen
J
Recording Date Recording date (only displayed on the first file
of each date)
During Still Image Playback
.
REC
MENU
Display Description
A
Video/Still Image
Mode
Switches between video and still image
modes.
B
T
Continuous playback of still images that are
recorded continuously within 2 seconds or with
the continuous shooting mode.
C
R
Rotates to the left (rotates by -90° with each
tap)
D
S
Rotates to the right (rotates by 90° with each
tap)
E
h
Returns to the previous still image
0
You can perform the same operation with the
zoom lever.
F
d / e Starts/pauses slideshow
“Slideshow Playback” (A p. 118)
G
g
Advances to the next still image
0
You can perform the same operation with the
zoom lever.
H
<<REC Switches to the recording mode.
I
u
Returns to index screen
J
A
Deletes the currently displayed still image.
K
MENU Displays the menu screen
Memo :
0
Tap or drag on the operation area of the touch screen.
0
Operations buttons on the touch screen disappear if the unit is not
operated for about 5 seconds. Tap on the screen to display the operation
buttons again.
0
You can rotate a still image 90° to the right or left during playback.
Rotation applies to the on-screen display only.
0
You can search for a specific file by the recording date.
This is useful when searching from a large number of files.
“Searching for a Specific Video/Still Image by Date” (A p. 118)
Caution :
0
This unit is a microcomputer-controlled device. Electrostatic discharge,
external noise and interference (from a TV, a radio, etc.) might prevent it
from functioning properly. In such a case, turn off the power, then remove
the AC adapter and battery pack. This unit will be reset.
Playback
117
Slideshow Playback
Still images can be played back in a slideshow.
Tap I during still image playback to start the slideshow.
.
REC
MENU
“Operation Buttons for Still Image Playback” (A p. 117)
Memo :
0
Effects can be added to the transitions in slideshow playback.
“ SLIDE SHOW EFFECTS ” (A p. 187)
Searching for a Specific Video/Still Image by
Date
When there is a large number of recorded videos and still images, it is difficult
to look for the desired file from the index screen.
Use the search function to find the file you want.
You can search and play videos or still images according to recording dates.
1
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
MENU
0
Tap I/J to select the media for playback. (GZ-EX250)
0
Searching can be performed in both the video and still image modes.
*The image shows the video mode.
2
Tap “SEARCH DATE”.
.
SEARCH DATE
VIDEO
3
Tap a recording date, then tap “NEXT”.
.
OCT.10.2012
OCT.10.2012
OCT.10.2012
OCT.10.2012
NEXT
SEARCH DATE
0
Tap again to cancel the selected date.
4
Tap on the file to start playback.
.
MENU
REC
SEARCH DATE
0
You can select videos in the video mode and still images in the still
image mode.
0
Only the files recorded on the selected date are displayed.
0
Tap L to stop searching and return to the index screen (thumbnail
display).
Deleting Files of a Selected Date
Tap A on the index screen (thumbnail display) to delete unwanted files.
“Deleting Unwanted Files” (A p. 122)
Playback
118
Connecting to and Viewing on TV
You can connect this unit to a TV for playback. The image quality on TV
varies with the type of TV and the connecting cable. Select the connector
that best suits your TV.
0
Refer also to the instruction manual of the TV in use.
“Connecting via the HDMI Mini Connector” (A p. 119)
“Connecting via the AV Connector” (A p. 120)
0
To display the date and time on TV, set both “DISPLAY DATE/TIME” and
“DISPLAY ON TV” to “ON”.
“ DISPLAY DATE/TIME ” (A p. 184)
“ DISPLAY ON TV ” (A p. 195)
Unnatural Displays on TV
Trouble Action
Images do not
appear on the TV
properly.
0
Disconnect the cable and connect again.
0
Turn off and on this unit again.
0
Images may not appear properly when the
remaining battery power is low. Use an AC
adapter.
Images are
projected vertically
on the TV.
0
Set “VIDEO OUTPUT” in the “COMMON” menu
to “4:3”.
“ VIDEO OUTPUT ” (A p. 196)
Images are
projected
horizontally on the
TV.
0
Adjust the TV's screen accordingly.
The color of images
looks strange.
0
Adjust the TV's screen accordingly.
HDMI-CEC
functions do not
work properly, and
the TV does not
work in conjunction
with this unit.
0
TVs may operate differently depending on the
specifications, even if they are HDMI-CEC
compliant. Therefore, the HDMI-CEC functions
of this unit cannot be guaranteed to operate in
combination with all the TVs. In such cases, set
“HDMI CONTROL” to “OFF”.
“ HDMI CONTROL ” (A p. 197)
The language on
the display
changed.
0
It may occur when you connect this unit to a TV
with different language setting using an HDMI
mini cable.
Caution :
0
Do not remove the recording medium or perform any other operation (such
as turning off the power) while accessing files. Also, be sure to use the
provided AC adapter, as the data on the recording medium may be
corrupted if the battery becomes exhausted during operation. If the data
on the recording medium becomes corrupted, format the recording
medium to use the medium again.
Connecting via the HDMI Mini Connector
If you are using an HDTV, you can play back in HD quality by connecting to
the HDMI mini connector.
0
Use a High Speed HDMI mini cable as the HDMI mini cable when not using
the provided one.
0
Refer also to the instruction manual of the TV in use.
1
Connect to a TV.
.
TV
HDMI Connector Input
To HDMI Mini Connector
0
Turn off the camcorder by pressing the M button for about 2 seconds.
2
Connect the AC adapter to this unit.
.
AC Adapter
To AC Outlet
(110 V to 240 V)
3
Press the external input button on the TV to switch to the input from this
unit via the connected connector.
.
External Input
External Input
4
Play back a file.
.
REC
MENU
“Playing Back Videos” (A p. 113)
“Playing Back Still Images” (A p. 116)
Memo :
0
Change the settings in “HDMI OUTPUT” according to the connection.
“ HDMI OUTPUT ” (A p. 196)
0
When connected to the TV via the HDMI mini cable, images and sounds
may not be output properly depending on the TV connected.
In such cases, perform the following operations.
1) Disconnect the HDMI mini cable and connect it again.
2) Turn off and on this unit again.
0
For questions about the TV or method of connection, contact your TV's
manufacturer.
Playback
119
Operating in Conjunction with TV via HDMI
Connecting this unit to an HDMI-CEC enabled TV using the HDMI mini cable
allows linked operations with the TV to be performed.
0
HDMI-CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) is an industry standard that
enables interoperability between HDMI-CEC compliant devices that are
connected via HDMI cables.
Memo :
0
Not all HDMI control devices comply with the HDMI-CEC standard. The
HDMI control function of this unit will not work when connected to these
devices.
0
This unit is not guaranteed to operate with all HDMI-CEC enabled devices.
0
Depending on the specifications of each HDMI-CEC enabled device,
some functions may not work with this unit. (For details, refer to the
instruction manual of your TV.)
0
Unintended operations may occur with some connected devices. In these
cases, set “HDMI CONTROL” to “OFF”.
“ HDMI CONTROL ” (A p. 197)
Preparations
0
Connect an HDMI mini cable between this unit and the TV.
“Connecting via the HDMI Mini Connector” (A p. 119)
0
Turn on the TV and set the HDMI-CEC related setting to “ON”. (For details,
refer to the instruction manual of the TV.)
0
Turn on this unit and set “HDMI CONTROL” in the “COMMON” menu to
“ON”.
“ HDMI CONTROL ” (A p. 197)
Operation Method 1
1
Turn on this unit.
2
Select the playback mode.
3
Connect the HDMI mini cable.
0
TV turns on automatically and switches to HDMI input mode when
this unit is turned on.
Operation Method 2
1
Turn off the TV.
0
This unit turns off automatically.
Memo :
0
Depending on the TV connected, the display language of this unit will
automatically switch to the language that is selected for the TV when this
unit is turned on.
(This is applicable only if this unit supports the language selected for the
TV.) To use this unit with a language that differs from the display language
of the TV, set “HDMI CONTROL” to “OFF”.
0
The display language of the TV will not switch automatically, even if the
display language of this unit is changed.
0
These functions may not work correctly when devices such as amplifier
and selector are connected. Set “HDMI CONTROL” to “OFF”.
0
If HDMI-CEC does not work properly, turn off and on this unit again.
Connecting via the AV Connector
By connecting the supplied AV cable to the AV connector, videos can be
played back on a TV.
0
Refer also to the instruction manual of the TV in use.
1
Connect to a TV.
.
Red
White
Ye l l o w
Audio Input (R)
Audio Input (L)
Video Input
Video Input
TV
AV Cable
(Provided)
To AV Connector
0
Turn off the camcorder by pressing the M button for about 2 seconds.
2
Connect the AC adapter to this unit.
.
AC Adapter
To AC Outlet
(110 V to 240 V)
3
Press the external input button on the TV to switch to the input from this
unit via the connected connector.
.
External Input
External Input
4
Play back a file.
.
REC
MENU
“Playing Back Videos” (A p. 113)
“Playing Back Still Images” (A p. 116)
Memo :
0
For questions about the TV or method of connection, contact your TV's
manufacturer.
Playback
120
Playing Back Playlists
Plays back the playlists that you have created.
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Check if the recording mode is A.
0
If the mode is B still image, tap B on the recording screen to display
the mode switching screen.
Tap A to switch the mode to video. (You can also use the A/B button
on this unit.)
2
Tap “<<PLAY” to select the playback mode.
.
PLAY
REC
MENU
3
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
MENU
4
Tap “PLAYBACK PLAYLIST”.
.
PLAYBACK PLAYLIST
VIDEO
5
Tap to select a playlist.
.
02 OCT.10.2012 01:00PM
CHECK
PLAYBACK PLAYLIST
0
Playback of the playlist starts.
“Playing Back Videos” (A p. 113)
0
Tap 3 or 2 to move upward or downward for more selection.
0
Tap u to return to the index screen.
0
Tap “CHECK” and select a playlist to check its content. After
checking, tap J.
0
Playlists with a O (Digest Playback) icon are the playlists created
during Digest Playback.
Creating Playlists
“Creating Playlists from the Recorded Videos” (A p. 129)
Playing Back a DVD or Blu-ray Disc Created
on this Unit
DVDs or Blu-ray discs created using the backup function on this unit can be
played back on TV using an optional DVD writer (DVDs only) with playback
function (CU-VD50) or a normal DVD or Blu-ray disc player. DVDs can also
be played back on this unit by connecting the optional DVD writer with
playback function.
“Playing Back with a DVD Writer” (A p. 140)
“Playing Back with an External Blu-ray Drive” (A p. 148)
0
For details on how to play back on a normal DVD or Blu-ray disc player,
refer to the instruction manual of the player.
Playback Device DVD
(AVCHD format)
Blu-ray Disc
DVD writer connected to
this unit
P
-
BD writer (external Blu-ray
drive) connected to this unit
P P
DVD player/
DVD recorder
P* -
Blu-ray player/
Blu-ray recorder
P*
P
DVD writer with playback
function (CU-VD50)
P
-
*Only for AVCHD compatible devices
Caution :
0
DVDs that are created in AVCHD format cannot be played back on DVD
players with standard quality. You may not be able to remove the disc from
the player.
Digest Playback on a Blu-ray or DVD Player
You can play back a few seconds from each scene of the recorded videos
in the created disc.
1
Load the created disc on a player.
2
Select “DIGEST PLAYBACK” on the TV.
0
The digest is played back continuously.
.
DIGEST PLAYBACK
(The screen does not appear on this unit.)
Memo :
0
To normal playback/To index menu
1) Press the top menu button on the remote control of the player during
digest playback.
2) Select the desired item.
0
“DIGEST PLAYBACK” menu is not available when the disc is created
using the provided Everio MediaBrowser 4 software.
0
Digest Playback is not available when playing back by connecting this unit
to a DVD writer or external Blu-ray drive.
Playback
121
Deleting Unwanted Files
Delete unwanted videos and still images when the space in the recording
media is running out.
Doing so frees up more space in the recording media.
“Deleting the Currently Displayed File” (A p. 122)
“Deleting Selected Files” (A p. 122)
Memo :
0
Deleted files cannot be restored.
0
When files in a playlist are deleted, the playlist changes.
0
Files that are protected cannot be deleted.
Release protection before deleting the file.
“Protecting Files” (A p. 123)
0
Be sure to back up important files on a computer.
“Backing Up All Files” (A p. 159)
Deleting the Currently Displayed File
Deletes the currently displayed file.
Caution :
0
Deleted files cannot be restored.
1
Tap A.
.
MENU
REC
0:01:23 0:12:34
0
While the video mode is shown in the image, the same operations
apply for the still image mode.
2
Tap “YES”.
.
NOYES
SCENE ARE ALTERED OR DELETED
PLAYLISTS THAT INCLUDE THIS
(REMAINING SCENES: 0030)
DELETE?
0
Tap h / g to select the previous or next file.
0
When no file remains, the screen returns to the index screen.
Deleting Selected Files
Deletes the selected files.
Caution :
0
Deleted files cannot be restored.
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Tap A or B to select the video or still image mode.
0
Tap B or A on the recording screen to display the mode switching
screen.
Tap A to switch to the video mode A.
Tap
B
to switch to the still image mode
B
.
(You can also use the
A
/
B
button on this unit.)
2
Tap “<<PLAY” to select the playback mode.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
While the video mode is shown in the image, the same operations
apply for the still image mode.
3
Tap A.
.
REC
MENU
4
Tap on the files to delete.
.
STOPSETREL ALLSEL ALL
DELETE
0
P appears on the selected files.
To remove P from a file, tap on the file again.
0
Tap “SEL ALL” to select all files.
0
Tap “REL ALL” to release all selections.
Editing
122
0
<Grouped Files>
.
REL ALLSEL ALL
DELETE
5
Tap “SET”.
.
SETREL ALLSEL ALL
DELETE
STOP
6
Tap “EXECUTE” to confirm the deletion.
.
RETURN
STOPEXECUTE
SCENE ARE ALTERED OR DELETED
PLAYLISTS THAT INCLUDE THIS
REMAINING SCENES:0030
DELETE?
0
After deleting is complete, tap “OK”.
0
To cancel the deletion, tap “QUIT”.
Protecting Files
Prevent important videos/still images from being deleted accidently by
protecting them.
“Protecting/Releasing Protection of the Currently Displayed File”
(A p. 123)
“Protecting/Releasing Protection of Selected Files” (A p. 124)
Caution :
0
When the recording media is formatted, even the protected files will be
deleted.
Protecting/Releasing Protection of the Currently Displayed
File
Protects or releases protection of the currently displayed file.
1
Tap “MENU”.
.
MENU
REC
0:01:23 0:12:34
2
Tap “PROTECT/CANCEL”.
.
PROTECT/CANCEL
VIDEO
3
Tap “YES”.
.
NOYES
PROTECT?
0
Tap h / g to select the previous or next file.
0
After setting, tap “OK”.
Editing
123
Protecting/Releasing Protection of Selected Files
Protects or releases protection of the selected files.
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Tap A or B to select the video or still image mode.
0
Tap B or A on the recording screen to display the mode switching
screen.
Tap A to switch to the video mode A.
Tap
B
to switch to the still image mode
B
.
(You can also use the
A
/
B
button on this unit.)
2
Tap “<<PLAY” to select the playback mode.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
3
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
MENU
4
Tap “PROTECT/CANCEL”.
.
PROTECT/CANCEL
VIDEO
5
Tap on the files to protect or release protection of.
.
SET
REL ALLSEL ALL
PROTECT/CANCEL
0
P appears on the selected files.
To remove P from a file, tap on the file again.
0
I and P are displayed on the files that are already protected.
To release protection of a file, tap on the file such that P is removed.
0
Tap “SEL ALL” to select all files.
0
Tap “REL ALL” to release all selections.
0
<Grouped Files>
.
REL ALLSEL ALL
PROTECT/CANCEL
6
Tap “SET” to complete the setting.
.
SETREL ALLSEL ALL
PROTECT/CANCEL
0
Protect marks
I
appear on the selected files.
Protect marks I disappear from the deselected files.
Editing
124
Capturing a Still Image in the Video During
Playback
You can capture still images of the scenes you like in the recorded videos.
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Check if the recording mode is A.
0
If the mode is B still image, tap B on the recording screen to display
the mode switching screen.
Tap A to switch the mode to video. (You can also use the A/B button
on this unit.)
2
Tap “<<PLAY” to select the playback mode.
.
PLAY
REC
MENU
3
Tap on the desired video.
.
REC
MENU
4
Tap pause e at the desired scene during playback.
.
MENU
REC
0:01:23 0:12:34
0
After pausing the video, you can fine-tune the point to capture by
tapping forward slow-motion k and reverse slow-motion l.
5
Press the SNAPSHOT button.
.
Memo :
0
Still images are captured with a size of 1920×1080.
0
Captured still images are stored in the media where the video is being
played back from.
Combining Videos Recorded by Seamless
Recording (GZ-EX250)
Videos that are recorded on two separate media and with “SEAMLESS
RECORDING” in the video recording menu enabled can be combined into
a single video.
“SEAMLESS RECORDING (GZ-EX250)” (A p. 175)
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Check if the recording mode is A.
0
If the mode is B still image, tap B on the recording screen to display
the mode switching screen.
Tap A to switch the mode to video. (You can also use the A/B button
on this unit.)
2
Tap “<<PLAY” to select the playback mode.
.
PLAY
REC
MENU
3
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
MENU
4
Tap “SEAMLESS REC CTRL”.
.
SEAMLESS REC CTRL
VIDEO
5
Tap “COMBINE SCENES”.
.
COMBINE SCENES
SEAMLESS REC CTRL
0
This unit starts a search to detect seamless videos.
Combining cannot be performed if no seamless videos are found.
6
Tap “YES”.
Editing
125
.
NOYES
COMBINE WITH THIS SCENE?
THE ABOVE SCENE IS FOUND
7
Tap the media to store to.
.
SD CARDBUILT-IN MEMORY
THE COMBINED SCENES
SELECT THE MEDIA TO STORE
8
Tap “YES”.
.
NOYES
START COMBINING THE SCENES?
0
Combining of the videos starts.
0
After videos are combined, tap “OK”.
Memo :
0
Seamless videos cannot be combined if there is not enough free space in
the built-in memory or SD card. Check the amount of remaining free space
before combining.
How to Enable Seamless Video Recording Again
To start seamless recording again after the previous session is complete, it
is necessary to combine seamless videos, or delete the combination
information of the seamless videos.
To delete the combination information of seamless videos, select “DEL
COMBINED SCENES” in step 5.
Capturing a Required Part in the Video
(TRIMMING)
Select the required part of a video and save it as a new video file.
0
The original video remains in its existing location.
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Check if the recording mode is A.
0
If the mode is B still image, tap B on the recording screen to display
the mode switching screen.
Tap A to switch the mode to video. (You can also use the A/B button
on this unit.)
2
Tap “<<PLAY” to select the playback mode.
.
PLAY
REC
MENU
3
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
MENU
4
Tap “TRIMMING”.
.
TRIMMING
VIDEO
5
Tap the video to edit.
.
STOP
TRIMMING
6
Tap e to pause playback at the desired start point, then tap “A”.
Editing
126
.
0:01:23 0:12:34
STOP
TRIMMING
0
When “A” is tapped, the start point is set.
0
After setting the start point, tap d to continue playback.
7
Tap e to pause playback at the desired end point, then tap “B”.
.
0:01:23
A 0:00:23
0:12:34
STOP
TRIMMING
0
When “B” is tapped, the end point is set.
0
To reset the start or end point, tap “A” or “B” at the desired scene
(position).
8
Tap “SET”.
.
0:01:23
A 0:00:23 B 0:12:34
0:12:34
STOP
SET
TRIMMING
0
When “SET” is tapped, the trimming area is confirmed.
9
Tap “YES”.
.
NOYES
SPECIFIC AREA?
DO YOU WANT TO CAPTURE A
0
After copying, tap “OK”.
0
When copying finishes, the copied file is added to the index screen.
Memo :
0
The division point may deviate slightly from the selected scene.
Capturing Videos for Uploading to YouTube
Capture and copy a part of a recorded video (maximum 15 minutes) for
uploading to YouTube, and save it as a YouTube video.
When capturing videos for YouTube, the duration cannot be longer than 15
minutes.
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Check if the recording mode is A.
0
If the mode is B still image, tap B on the recording screen to display
the mode switching screen.
Tap A to switch the mode to video. (You can also use the A/B button
on this unit.)
2
Tap “<<PLAY” to select the playback mode.
.
PLAY
REC
MENU
3
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
MENU
4
Tap “UPLOAD SETTINGS”.
.
VIDEO
UPLOAD SETTINGS
5
Tap the video to edit.
.
2011
QUIT
UPLOAD SETTINGS
6
Tap “TRIM”.
0
When trimming is not necessary, tap “DO NOT TRIM”.
Editing
127
.
TRIMDO NOT TRIM
THE VIDEO?
DO YOU WANT TO TRIM
0
If the selected video is more than 15 minutes, trimming is necessary.
7
Tap e to pause playback at the desired start point, then tap “A”.
.
0:01:23 0:12:34
STOP
TRIMMING
8
Tap e to pause playback at the desired end point, then tap “B”.
.
0:01:23
A 0:00:23
0:12:34
STOP
TRIMMING
0
To reset the start or end point, tap “A” or “B” at the desired scene
(position).
0
When capturing videos for YouTube, the duration cannot be longer
than 15 minutes.
9
Tap “SET”.
.
0:01:23
A 0:00:23 B 0:12:34
0:12:34
STOP
SET
TRIMMING
10
Tap “YES”.
.
NOYES
SHARING SITES)
(TO UPLOAD TO VIDEO
SELECTED RANGE?
DO YOU WANT TO CAPTURE
0
After copying, tap “OK”.
0
When copying finishes, the copied file is added to the index screen.
0
To exit upload settings, tap “STOP” on the upload settings screen.
Memo :
0
The division point may deviate slightly from the selected scene.
Uploading Videos to YouTube
You can upload your videos to YouTube using the provided software Everio
MediaBrowser 4. Install the software on your PC and connect this unit to the
PC.
0
For details on how to use the software, refer to the help file.
“Copying to Windows PC” (A p. 157)
Trouble with Uploading Videos
0
Check if you have created an account with YouTube. (You need a
YouTube account to upload files to YouTube.)
0
Refer to “Q&A”, “Latest Information”, “Download Information”, etc. in “Click
for Latest Product Info” in the help file of the provided software Everio
MediaBrowser 4.
Editing
128
Creating Playlists from the Recorded Videos
A list created by selecting your favorite videos from the recorded ones is
called a playlist.
By creating a playlist, you can play back only your favorite videos in the order
you like.
The original video file remains even when it is registered to a playlist.
0
To create a new playlist
“Creating Playlists with Selected Files” (A p. 129)
“Creating Playlists by Date” (A p. 130)
0
To edit or delete a created playlist
“Editing Playlists” (A p. 131)
“Deleting Playlists” (A p. 132)
Memo :
0
When a video file is deleted or moved, the same file will be removed from
the playlist.
Creating Playlists with Selected Files
Create a playlist by arranging the files one by one.
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Check if the recording mode is A.
0
If the mode is B still image, tap B on the recording screen to display
the mode switching screen.
Tap A to switch the mode to video. (You can also use the A/B button
on this unit.)
2
Tap “<<PLAY” to select the playback mode.
.
PLAY
REC
MENU
3
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
MENU
4
Tap “EDIT PLAYLIST”.
.
EDIT PLAYLIST
VIDEO
5
Tap “NEW LIST”.
.
DELETE
EDIT
NEW LIST
EDIT PLAYLIST
6
Tap “CREATE FROM SCENE”.
.
CREATE BY DATE
CREATE FROM SCENE
EDIT PLAYLIST
7
Tap on the video to add to playlist.
.
1920
1920
1920 1920
1920
1920 1920
1920
1920
TOTAL
0/999
FROM SCENE
QUIT
00h00m
0
d appears on the selected video.
Tap J to deselect.
0
Tap on the selected video again to check the video. After checking, tap
J.
0
Tap 0/1 or move the zoom lever to display the previous/next video.
0
X indicates the size of the video.
8
Tap “ADD”, and insert the video image.
.
ADD
0/999
1920
1920
1920 1920
1920
1920 1920
1920
1920
QUIT
TOTAL
00h00m
0
Repeat steps 7-8 and arrange the videos in the playlist.
0
To change the position of a video in the playlist (lower row), select the
insertion point with E/F after step 7 and tap “ADD”.
0
d appears when the inserted video is selected.
Tap J to deselect.
0
Tap on the selected video again to check the video. After checking, tap
J.
0
To delete of a video in the playlist (lower row), tap the video, then tap
“CANCEL”.
0
X indicates the size of the video.
9
After arranging, tap “SAVE”.
.
SAVE
TOTAL
0/999
DVD(DL)1
DVD 01
FROM SCENE
1920
1920
1920
1920
1920
1920
1920
1920
1920 1920
1920
1920
00h00m
10
Tap “YES”.
Editing
129
.
SAVE EDITED CONTENTS?
QUIT PLAYLIST.
NOYES
Memo :
0
Tap L on each screen to exit the menu.
Creating Playlists by Date
Create a playlist by arranging multiple files according to recording date.
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Check if the recording mode is A.
0
If the mode is B still image, tap B on the recording screen to display
the mode switching screen.
Tap A to switch the mode to video. (You can also use the A/B button
on this unit.)
2
Tap “<<PLAY” to select the playback mode.
.
PLAY
REC
MENU
3
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
MENU
4
Tap “EDIT PLAYLIST”.
.
EDIT PLAYLIST
VIDEO
5
Tap “NEW LIST”.
.
DELETE
EDIT
NEW LIST
EDIT PLAYLIST
6
Tap “CREATE BY DATE”.
.
CREATE BY DATE
CREATE FROM SCENE
EDIT PLAYLIST
7
Tap on the video of the date to add to playlist.
Editing
130
.
FROM DATE
0/999
462
4
QUIT
TOTAL
00h00m
0
d appears on the selected video.
Tap J to deselect.
0
Tap on the selected video again to check all the videos of the same
date. After checking, tap J.
0
Tap 0/1 or move the zoom lever to display the previous/next video.
0
The number on the video indicates the number of videos recorded on
the same day.
8
Tap “ADD”, and insert the video image.
.
ADD
0/999
462
4
QUIT
TOTAL
00h00m
0
Repeat steps 7-8 and arrange the videos in the playlist.
0
To change the position of a video in the playlist (lower row), select the
insertion point with E/F after step 7 and tap “ADD”.
0
d appears when the inserted video is selected.
Tap J to deselect.
0
Tap on the selected video again to check all the videos of the same
date. After checking, tap J.
0
To delete of a video in the playlist (lower row), tap the video, then tap
“CANCEL”.
9
After arranging, tap “SAVE”.
.
FROM DATE
SAVE
TOTAL
0/999
4
44
4
62
DVD(DL)1
DVD 01
00h00m
10
Tap “YES”.
.
SAVE EDITED CONTENTS?
QUIT PLAYLIST.
NOYES
Memo :
0
Tap L on each screen to exit the menu.
Editing Playlists
You can change the content of a created playlist.
However, the playlists created from Digest Playback cannot be changed.
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Check if the recording mode is A.
0
If the mode is B still image, tap B on the recording screen to display
the mode switching screen.
Tap A to switch the mode to video. (You can also use the A/B button
on this unit.)
2
Tap “<<PLAY” to select the playback mode.
.
PLAY
REC
MENU
3
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
MENU
4
Tap “EDIT PLAYLIST”.
.
EDIT PLAYLIST
VIDEO
5
Tap “EDIT”.
.
DELETE
EDIT
NEW LIST
EDIT PLAYLIST
6
Tap on the playlist to edit, and tap “NEXT”.
.
02 OCT.10.2012 05:05PM
02 OCT.10.2012 05:05PM
EDIT PLAYLIST
NEXT
Editing
131
7
Tap on the video (upper row) to arrange in the playlist.
.
1920
1920
1920
1920
1920
1920
1920
1920
1920 1920
1920
1920
TOTAL
0/999
SAVE
DVD(DL)1
DVD 01
EDIT
00h00m
0
d appears on the selected video.
Tap J to deselect.
0
Tap on the selected video again to check the video. After checking, tap
J
.
0
Tap
0
/
1
or move the zoom lever to display the previous/next video.
0
X
indicates the size of the video.
8
Tap “ADD”, and insert the video image.
.
1920
1920
1920 1920
1920
1920 1920
1920
1920
1920
1920
1920
0/999
SAVE
TOTAL
DVD(DL)1
DVD 01
ADD
00h00m
0
Repeat steps 7-8 and arrange the videos in the playlist.
0
To change the position of a video in the playlist (lower row), select the
insertion point with E/F after step 7 and tap “ADD”.
0
d appears when the inserted video is selected.
Tap J to deselect.
0
Tap on the selected video again to check the video. After checking, tap
J.
0
To delete of a video in the playlist (lower row), tap the video, then tap
“CANCEL”.
0
X indicates the size of the video.
9
After arranging, tap “SAVE”.
.
1920
1920
1920 1920
1920
1920 1920
1920
1920
1920
1920
1920
SAVE
TOTAL
0/999
DVD(DL)1
DVD 01
EDIT
00h00m
10
Tap “YES”.
.
SAVE EDITED CONTENTS?
QUIT PLAYLIST.
NOYES
Memo :
0
Tap L on each screen to exit the menu.
Deleting Playlists
Delete the playlists that you have created.
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Check if the recording mode is A.
0
If the mode is B still image, tap B on the recording screen to display
the mode switching screen.
Tap A to switch the mode to video. (You can also use the A/B button
on this unit.)
2
Tap “<<PLAY” to select the playback mode.
.
PLAY
REC
MENU
3
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
MENU
4
Tap “EDIT PLAYLIST”.
.
EDIT PLAYLIST
VIDEO
5
Tap “DELETE”.
.
DELETE
EDIT
NEW LIST
EDIT PLAYLIST
6
Tap on the playlist to delete, and tap “NEXT”.
.
02 OCT.10.2012 05:05PM
02 OCT.10.2012 05:05PM
NEXT
DELETE
DELETE ALL
0
All created playlists will be deleted when “DELETE ALL” is selected.
7
Tap “YES” to confirm the deletion.
Editing
132
.
NOYES
DELETE PLAYLIST?
0
After deleting, tap “OK”.
0
After deleting is complete, the screen returns to the delete playlist
selection screen.
Memo :
0
Tap L on each screen to exit the menu.
Creating Discs with a DVD Writer
You can copy the recorded files to discs or play back the created discs using
an optional DVD writer.
Compatible DVD Writers
Product Name Description
DVD Writer
0
CU-VD3
0
Enables the images recorded on this unit to be
copied to a DVD without using a PC.
DVD Writer
0
CU-VD50
0
Creates DVDs and functions as an external DVD
drive when connected to a PC. In addition,
created DVDs can be played back by connecting
the CU-VD50 to a TV.
Creating Discs with a DVD Writer
o
Preparing a DVD Writer
“Preparing a DVD Writer (CU-VD3)” (A p. 134)
“Preparing a DVD Writer (CU-VD50)” (A p. 134)
o
Copying to Discs
“Copying All Files” (A p. 135)
“Copying Files by Date” (A p. 136)
“Copying Selected Playlists” (A p. 138)
“Copying Selected Files” (A p. 139)
o
Other Operations
“Playing Back with a DVD Writer” (A p. 140)
Memo :
0
Discs created on this unit are saved in the AVCHD format.
Play back on an AVCHD compatible device (such as Blu-ray recorder). In
addition, discs in DVD-Video format cannot be created.
0
Images recorded in UXP mode cannot be copied to a DVD writer.
0
When there are many files to back up, it may take time for the backup to
be completed. Wait for a while as the access lamp appears blinking, which
indicates normal operation.
0
Date and time information as saved as subtitles in the created discs.
Copying
133
Preparing a DVD Writer (CU-VD3)
1
Remove the AC adapter and battery pack from this unit.
2
Open the LCD monitor.
.
3
Connect the USB cable and the AC adapter.
0
Turn off the camcorder by pressing the M button for about 2 seconds.
.
AC Adapter
To AC Outlet
(110 V to 240 V)
DVD Writer
To DC Connector
To USB
Connector
A Connect the USB cable of the DVD writer to this unit.
B Connect the AC adapter of the DVD writer.
0
Turn on the DVD writer.
C Connect the AC adapter to this unit.
0
This unit powers on automatically when the AC adapter is connected.
0
This unit turns on and the “BACK-UP” menu appears.
0
While the USB cable is connected, the “BACK-UP” menu is
displayed.
0
Refer also to the instruction manual of the DVD writer.
4
Insert a new disc.
.
A Press the eject button to open the disc tray.
B Pull out the tray completely and load a new disc properly.
C Push the disc tray in until it clicks into place.
Caution :
0
Be sure to turn off the power when connecting the devices.
Otherwise, electric shocks or malfunctions may occur.
Preparing a DVD Writer (CU-VD50)
1
Remove the AC adapter and battery pack from this unit.
2
Open the LCD monitor.
.
3
Connect the USB cable and the AC adapter.
0
Turn off the camcorder by pressing the M button for about 2 seconds.
.
AC Adapter
To AC Outlet
(110 V to 240 V)
DVD Writer
To DC Connector
To USB
Connector
A Connect the USB cable provided with the DVD writer.
B Connect the AC adapter of the DVD writer.
0
Turn on the DVD writer.
C Connect the AC adapter to this unit.
0
This unit powers on automatically when the AC adapter is connected.
0
This unit turns on and the “BACK-UP” menu appears.
0
While the USB cable is connected, the “BACK-UP” menu is
displayed.
0
Refer also to the instruction manual of the DVD writer.
4
Insert a new disc.
.

A Press the eject button.
B Pull out the disc tray.
C Pull out the tray completely and load a new disc properly.
D Push the disc tray in until it clicks into place.
Caution :
0
Be sure to turn off the power when connecting the devices.
Otherwise, electric shocks or malfunctions may occur.
Memo :
0
All buttons on the DVD writer CU-VD50, other than the power and eject
buttons, will not work when connected to this unit.
Copying
134
Creating a Disc
1
Prepare a DVD writer.
0
Insert a new disc into the DVD writer.
“Preparing a DVD Writer (CU-VD3)” (A p. 134)
“Preparing a DVD Writer (CU-VD50)” (A p. 134)
2
Copy files to the disc with the following methods.
“Copying All Files” (A p. 135)
“Copying Files by Date” (A p. 136)
“Copying Selected Playlists” (A p. 138)
“Copying Selected Files” (A p. 139)
Copying All Files
All videos or still images recorded on this unit will be copied.
You can also select and copy only the videos or still images that have never
been copied.
1
Select video or still image mode.
2
Tap “CREATE FROM ALL” (video) or “SAVE ALL” (still image).
.
PLAYBACK
SELECT AND CREATE
CREATE FROM ALL
VIDEO BACKUP
0
While the video mode is shown in the image, the same operations
apply for the still image mode.
0
Tap
A
to switch between the video and still image modes.
3
Tap on the media to copy. (GZ-EX250)
.
SD CARDBUILT-IN MEMORY
SELECT THE MEDIA TO BACK UP
CREATE FROM ALL
4
Tap the desired method.
.
UNSAVED SCENES
ALL SCENES
CREATE FROM ALL
0
While the video mode is shown in the image, the same operations
apply for the still image mode.
0
“ALL SCENES” (video)/“ALL IMAGES” (still image):
All videos or still images in this unit are copied.
0
“UNSAVED SCENES” (video)/“UNSAVED IMAGES” (still
image):
Videos or still images that have never been copied are automatically
selected and copied.
5
Tap “EXECUTE”.
.
RETURNEXECUTE
PREPARE AN EMPTY DISC
DVD:2 / DVD(DL):1
REQUIRED DISC SPACE
ALL SCENES
0
The number of discs required to copy the files is displayed.
Prepare the discs accordingly.
Copying
135
6
Tap “AUTO” or “BY DATE”. (A mode only)
.
BY DATE
AUTO
SELECT THE SORT METHOD
ON THE TOP MENU
CREATE HEADLINES
ALL SCENES
0
When “AUTO” is selected, videos with similar recording dates are
displayed in groups.
0
When “BY DATE” is selected, videos are displayed according to
recording dates.
7
Tap “EXECUTE”.
.
STOPEXECUTE
DVD(DL)1
DVD 02
REMAINING
ALL SCENES
0
When “INSERT THE NEXT DISC TO CREATE OR PRESS STOP TO
EXIT” appears, change the disc.
8
Tap “OK” when “COMPLETED” is displayed.
.
OK
COMPLETED
ALL SCENES
9
Press and hold the M button for 2 seconds or more to turn off this unit
and disconnect the USB cable.
Caution :
0
Do not turn off the power or remove the USB cable until copying is
complete.
0
Files that are not on the index screen during playback cannot be copied.
Special files cannot be copied either.
0
All DVDs will be finalized automatically.
Files cannot be added to the DVD-R/DVD-RW later.
Memo :
0
To check the created disc, refer to ““Playing Back with a DVD Writer”
(A p. 140) ”.
“Playing Back with a DVD Writer” (A p. 140)
Copying Files by Date
Videos or still images are sorted and copied according to the date on which
they were recorded.
1
Select video or still image mode.
2
Tap “SELECT AND CREATE” (video) or “SELECT AND SAVE” (still
image).
.
PLAYBACK
SELECT AND CREATE
CREATE FROM ALL
VIDEO BACKUP
0
While the video mode is shown in the image, the same operations
apply for the still image mode.
0
Tap A to switch between the video and still image modes.
3
Tap on the media to copy. (GZ-EX250)
.
SD CARDBUILT-IN MEMORY
SELECT THE MEDIA TO BACK UP
SELECT AND CREATE
4
Tap “CREATE BY DATE” (video) or “SAVE BY DATE” (still image).
.
SELECT FROM SCENES
CREATE BY PLAYLIST
CREATE BY DATE
SELECT AND CREATE
0
While the video mode is shown in the image, the same operations
apply for the still image mode.
5
Tap to select a recording date.
.
OCT.10.2012
OCT.10.2012
QUIT
CREATE BY DATE
0
You cannot select more than one recording date for copying.
To copy files from multiple recording dates, it is recommended to copy
by creating a playlist.
“Creating Playlists from the Recorded Videos” (A p. 129)
“Copying Selected Playlists” (A p. 138)
6
Tap “EXECUTE”.
.
RETURNEXECUTE
CHECK
PREPARE AN EMPTY DISC
REQUIRED DISC SPACE
CREATE BY DATE
DVD:2 / DVD(DL):1
0
The number of discs required to copy the files is displayed.
Prepare the discs accordingly.
Copying
136
0
Tap “CHECK” to check the content.
7
Tap “AUTO” or “BY DATE”. (A mode only)
.
BY DATE
AUTO
SELECT THE SORT METHOD
ON THE TOP MENU
CREATE HEADLINES
CREATE BY DATE
0
When “AUTO” is selected, videos with similar recording dates are
displayed in groups.
0
When “BY DATE” is selected, videos are displayed according to
recording dates.
8
Tap “EXECUTE”.
.
STOPEXECUTE
DVD(DL)1
DVD 02
REMAINING
CREATE BY DATE
0
When “INSERT THE NEXT DISC TO CREATE OR PRESS STOP TO
EXIT” appears, change the disc.
9
Tap “OK” when “COMPLETED” is displayed.
.
OK
COMPLETED
CREATE BY DATE
10
Press and hold the M button for 2 seconds or more to turn off this unit
and disconnect the USB cable.
Caution :
0
Do not turn off the power or remove the USB cable until copying is
complete.
0
Files that are not on the index screen during playback cannot be copied.
Special files cannot be copied either.
0
All DVDs will be finalized automatically.
Files cannot be added to the DVD-R/DVD-RW later.
Memo :
0
To check the created disc, refer to ““Playing Back with a DVD Writer”
(A p. 140) ”.
“Playing Back with a DVD Writer” (A p. 140)
Copying
137
Copying Selected Playlists
Arrange and copy the created playlists in the order you like.
1
Select video mode.
2
Tap “SELECT AND CREATE”.
.
PLAYBACK
SELECT AND CREATE
CREATE FROM ALL
VIDEO BACKUP
3
Tap on the media to copy. (GZ-EX250)
.
SD CARDBUILT-IN MEMORY
SELECT THE MEDIA TO BACK UP
SELECT AND CREATE
4
Tap “CREATE BY PLAYLIST”.
.
SELECT FROM SCENES
CREATE BY PLAYLIST
CREATE BY DATE
SELECT AND CREATE
5
Tap on the playlist to copy to disc.
.
1920
1920
1920 1920
1920
1920 1920
1920
1920
TOTAL
0/999
CREATE BY PLAYLIST
QUIT
00h00m
0
d appears on the selected playlist (upper).
Tap J to deselect.
0
Tap on the selected playlist again to check the content of the playlist.
After checking, tap J.
0
Tap 0/1 or move the zoom lever to display the previous/next playlist.
6
Tap “ADD” to insert a playlist.
.
ADD
0/999
1920
1920
1920 1920
1920
1920 1920
1920
1920
QUIT
TOTAL
00h00m
0
Repeat steps 5-6 and arrange the playlists.
0
To change the position of a playlist (lower), select the insertion point
with E/F after step 5 and tap “ADD”.
0
d appears when the inserted playlist is selected.
Tap J to deselect.
0
Tap on the selected playlist again to check the content of the playlist.
After checking, tap J.
0
To delete of a video in the playlist (lower row), tap the video, then tap
“CANCEL”.
7
After arranging, tap “SAVE”.
.
TOTAL
0/999
DVD(DL)1
DVD 01
CREATE BY PLAYLIST
1920
1920
1920
1920
1920
1920
1920
1920
1920 1920
1920
1920
SAVE
00h00m
8
Tap “EXECUTE”.
.
RETURNEXECUTE
CHECK
PREPARE AN EMPTY DISC
REQUIRED DISC SPACE
CREATE BY PLAYLIST
DVD:2 / DVD(DL):1
0
The number of discs required to copy the files is displayed.
Prepare the discs accordingly.
0
Tap “CHECK” to check the content. After checking, tap J.
9
Tap “OK”.
.
OK
CREATE BY PLAYLIST
THE PLAYLIST OR THE DATE
WILL DISPLAY EITHER
THE DISC TOP MENU HEADLINE
10
Tap “EXECUTE”.
.
STOPEXECUTE
DVD 02
DVD(DL)1
REMAINING
CREATE BY PLAYLIST
0
When “INSERT THE NEXT DISC TO CREATE OR PRESS STOP TO
EXIT” appears, change the disc.
11
Tap “OK” when “COMPLETED” is displayed.
.
OK
COMPLETED
CREATE BY PLAYLIST
12
Press and hold the M button for 2 seconds or more to turn off this unit
and disconnect the USB cable.
Caution :
0
Do not turn off the power or remove the USB cable until copying is
complete.
0
Files that are not on the index screen during playback cannot be copied.
Special files cannot be copied either.
0
All DVDs will be finalized automatically.
Files cannot be added to the DVD-R/DVD-RW later.
Memo :
0
A list of playlists is displayed on the top menu of the created DVD.
Copying
138
0
To check the created disc, refer to ““Playing Back with a DVD Writer”
(A p. 140) ”.
“Playing Back with a DVD Writer” (A p. 140)
0
To create a playlist
“Creating Playlists from the Recorded Videos” (A p. 129)
Copying Selected Files
Select and copy the desired videos or still images individually.
1
Select video or still image mode.
2
Tap “SELECT AND CREATE” (video) or “SELECT AND SAVE” (still
image).
.
PLAYBACK
SELECT AND CREATE
CREATE FROM ALL
VIDEO BACKUP
0
While the video mode is shown in the image, the same operations
apply for the still image mode.
0
Tap A to switch between the video and still image modes.
3
Tap on the media to copy. (GZ-EX250)
.
SD CARDBUILT-IN MEMORY
SELECT THE MEDIA TO BACK UP
SELECT AND CREATE
4
Tap “SELECT FROM SCENES” (video) or “SELECT FROM IMAGES”
(still image).
.
SELECT FROM SCENES
CREATE BY PLAYLIST
CREATE BY DATE
SELECT AND CREATE
0
While the video mode is shown in the image, the same operations
apply for the still image mode.
5
Tap on the videos or still images to copy.
.
QUITCHECK
SELECT FROM SCENES
0
A check mark appears on the selected file.
To remove the check mark, tap on the file again.
0
Tap “CHECK” to check the file.
After checking, tap J.
0
While the video mode is shown in the image, the same operations
apply for the still image mode.
6
After selecting all the files, tap “SAVE”.
.
SAVEQUITCHECK
SELECT FROM SCENES
Copying
139
0
While the video mode is shown in the image, the same operations
apply for the still image mode.
7
Tap “EXECUTE”.
.
RETURNEXECUTE
PREPARE AN EMPTY DISC
DVD:2 / DVD(DL):1
REQUIRED DISC SPACE
SELECT FROM SCENES
0
The number of discs required to copy the files is displayed.
Prepare the discs accordingly.
8
Tap “AUTO” or “BY DATE”. (A mode only)
.
BY DATE
AUTO
SELECT THE SORT METHOD
ON THE TOP MENU
CREATE HEADLINES
SELECT FROM SCENES
0
When “AUTO” is selected, videos with similar recording dates are
displayed in groups.
0
When “BY DATE” is selected, videos are displayed according to
recording dates.
9
Tap “EXECUTE”.
.
STOPEXECUTE
DVD(DL)1
DVD 02
REMAINING
SELECT FROM SCENES
0
When “INSERT THE NEXT DISC TO CREATE OR PRESS STOP TO
EXIT” appears, change the disc.
10
Tap “OK” when “COMPLETED” is displayed.
.
OK
COMPLETED
SELECT FROM SCENES
11
Press and hold the M button for 2 seconds or more to turn off this unit
and disconnect the USB cable.
Caution :
0
Do not turn off the power or remove the USB cable until copying is
complete.
0
Files that are not on the index screen during playback cannot be copied.
Special files cannot be copied either.
0
All DVDs will be finalized automatically.
Files cannot be added to the DVD-R/DVD-RW later.
Memo :
0
To check the created disc, refer to ““Playing Back with a DVD Writer”
(A p. 140) ”.
“Playing Back with a DVD Writer” (A p. 140)
Playing Back with a DVD Writer
You can play back the DVDs created on this unit.
1
Prepare a DVD writer.
0
Insert the DVD to play back into the DVD writer.
“Preparing a DVD Writer (CU-VD3)” (A p. 134)
“Preparing a DVD Writer (CU-VD50)” (A p. 134)
2
Tap “PLAYBACK” in the BACK-UP menu.
.
PLAYBACK
SELECT AND CREATE
CREATE FROM ALL
VIDEO BACKUP
0
An index screen (thumbnail display) of the videos in the disc appears.
3
Tap on the file to start playback.
.
0
Tap “J” to return to the “BACK-UP” menu.
0
For details on video playback, refer to ““Operation Buttons for Video
Playback” (A p. 113) ”.
“Operation Buttons for Video Playback” (A p. 113)
0
To exit, stop playback and turn off the camcorder by pressing the M
button for about 2 seconds. Then, disconnect the USB cable.
Copying
140
Creating Discs with an External Blu-ray Drive
You can copy the recorded files to discs or play back the created discs using
an optional BD writer (external Blu-ray drive).
Compatible BD Writers (External Blu-ray Drives)
You can use BE08LU20 from LG. (as of November, 2011)
Creating Discs with a BD Writer (External Blu-ray Drive)
o
Preparing a BD Writer (External Blu-ray Drive)
“Preparing an External Blu-ray Drive” (A p. 141)
o
Copying to Discs
“Copying All Files” (A p. 142)
“Copying Files by Date” (A p. 144)
“Copying Selected Playlists” (A p. 145)
“Copying Selected Files” (A p. 147)
Select and copy the desired videos or still images individually.
o
Other Operations
“Playing Back with an External Blu-ray Drive” (A p. 148)
Memo :
0
The recordable time on the disc varies according to the way of recording.
0
When there are many files to back up, it may take time for the backup to
be completed. Wait for a while as the access lamp appears blinking, which
indicates normal operation.
0
Date and time information as saved as subtitles in the created discs.
Preparing an External Blu-ray Drive
Memo :
To use the USB cable provided with the BD writer (external Blu-ray drive),
purchase the following USB conversion cable.
0
Part number*: QAM0852-001 Mini-A (Male) – A (Female)
*Consult your nearest service center.
1
Remove the AC adapter and battery pack from this unit.
2
Open the LCD monitor.
.
3
Connect the USB cable and the AC adapter.
0
Turn off the camcorder by pressing the M button for about 2 seconds.
.
AC Adapter To
AC Outlet (110 V
to 240 V)
To DC Connector
To USB
Connector
External Blu-ray
Drive
A Connect the USB cable of the BD writer (external Blu-ray drive) to this
unit.
0
The USB cable provided with this unit cannot be used.
B Connect the AC adapter of the BD writer (external Blu-ray drive).
C Turn on the BD writer (external Blu-ray drive).
D Connect the AC adapter to this unit.
0
This unit powers on automatically when the AC adapter is connected.
0
This unit turns on and the “BACK-UP” menu appears.
0
While the USB cable is connected, the “BACK-UP” menu is
displayed.
0
Refer also to the instruction manual of the BD writer (external Blu-ray
drive).
Copying
141
4
Insert a new disc.
.
A Press the eject button to open the disc tray.
B Load a new disc properly.
C Press the eject button to close the disc tray.
Caution :
0
Be sure to turn off the power when connecting the devices.
Otherwise, electric shocks or malfunctions may occur.
0
Do not connect the AC adapter provided with this unit to the BD writer.
0
Do not connect the AC adapter provided with the BD writer to this unit.
Creating a Disc
Creating a Disc
1
Preparing a BD Writer (External Blu-ray Drive)
0
Insert a new disc into the BD writer (external Blu-ray drive).
“Preparing an External Blu-ray Drive” (A p. 141)
2
Copy files to the disc with the following methods.
“Copying All Files” (A p. 142)
“Copying Files by Date” (A p. 144)
“Copying Selected Playlists” (A p. 145)
“Copying Selected Files” (A p. 147)
Copying All Files
All videos or still images recorded on this unit will be copied.
You can also select and copy only the videos or still images that have never
been copied.
1
Select video or still image mode.
2
Tap “CREATE FROM ALL” (video) or “SAVE ALL” (still image).
.
PLAYBACK
SELECT AND CREATE
CREATE FROM ALL
VIDEO BACKUP
0
While the video mode is shown in the image, the same operations
apply for the still image mode.
0
Tap
A
to switch between the video and still image modes.
3
Tap “Blu-ray DISC” or “DVD(AVCHD)”.
.
DVD(AVCHD)Blu-ray DISC
CHANGE REC. MEDIA
CREATE FROM ALL
0
The media changes to the tapped item. Select the appropriate setting
according to the disc.
0
Selecting “Blu-ray DISC” enables you to save videos in a Blu-ray disc
in the high definition quality.
0
Selecting “DVD(AVCHD)” enables you to save videos in a DVD in the
high definition quality.
4
Tap on the media to copy. (GZ-EX250)
.
SD CARDBUILT-IN MEMORY
SELECT THE MEDIA TO BACK UP
CREATE FROM ALL
5
Tap the desired method.
.
UNSAVED SCENES
ALL SCENES
CREATE FROM ALL
Copying
142
0
“ALL SCENES” (video)/“ALL IMAGES” (still image):
All videos or still images in this unit are copied.
0
“UNSAVED SCENES” (video)/“UNSAVED IMAGES” (still
image):
Videos or still images that have never been copied are automatically
selected and copied.
6
Tap “EXECUTE”.
.
RETURNEXECUTE
PREPARE AN EMPTY DISC
DVD:2 / DVD(DL):1
REQUIRED DISC SPACE
ALL SCENES
0
The number of discs required to copy the files is displayed.
Prepare the discs accordingly.
7
Tap “AUTO” or “BY DATE”. (A mode only)
.
BY DATE
AUTO
SELECT THE SORT METHOD
ON THE TOP MENU
CREATE HEADLINES
ALL SCENES
0
When “AUTO” is selected, videos with similar recording dates are
displayed in groups.
0
When “BY DATE” is selected, videos are displayed according to
recording dates.
8
Tap “EXECUTE”.
.
STOPEXECUTE
DVD(DL)1
DVD 02
REMAINING
ALL SCENES
0
When “INSERT THE NEXT DISC TO CREATE OR PRESS STOP TO
EXIT” appears, change the disc.
9
Tap “OK” when “COMPLETED” is displayed.
.
OK
COMPLETED
ALL SCENES
10
Press and hold the M button for 2 seconds or more to turn off this unit
and disconnect the USB cable.
Caution :
0
Do not turn off the power or remove the USB cable until copying is
complete.
0
Files that are not on the index screen during playback cannot be copied.
Special files cannot be copied either.
0
All DVDs will be finalized automatically.
While files cannot be added to the DVD-R/DVD-RW later, files can still be
added to the BD-R/BD-RE.
0
DVDs that are created in “DVD(AVCHD)” format are playable only on
AVCHD compatible devices.
Memo :
0
To check the created disc, refer to ““Playing Back with an External Blu-ray
Drive” (A p. 148) ”.
“Playing Back with an External Blu-ray Drive” (A p. 148)
Copying
143
Copying Files by Date
Videos or still images are sorted and copied according to the date on which
they were recorded.
1
Select video or still image mode.
2
Tap “SELECT AND CREATE” (video) or “SELECT AND SAVE” (still
image).
.
PLAYBACK
SELECT AND CREATE
CREATE FROM ALL
VIDEO BACKUP
0
While the video mode is shown in the image, the same operations
apply for the still image mode.
0
Tap A to switch between the video and still image modes.
3
Tap “Blu-ray DISC” or “DVD(AVCHD)”.
.
DVD(AVCHD)Blu-ray DISC
CHANGE REC. MEDIA
SELECT AND CREATE
0
The media changes to the tapped item. Select the appropriate setting
according to the disc.
0
Selecting “Blu-ray DISC” enables you to save videos in a Blu-ray disc
in the high definition quality.
0
Selecting “DVD(AVCHD)” enables you to save videos in a DVD in the
high definition quality.
4
Tap on the media to copy. (GZ-EX250)
.
SD CARDBUILT-IN MEMORY
SELECT THE MEDIA TO BACK UP
SELECT AND CREATE
5
Tap “CREATE BY DATE” (video) or “SAVE BY DATE” (still image).
.
SELECT FROM SCENES
CREATE BY PLAYLIST
CREATE BY DATE
SELECT AND CREATE
0
While the video mode is shown in the image, the same operations
apply for the still image mode.
6
Tap to select a recording date.
.
OCT.10.2012
OCT.10.2012
QUIT
CREATE BY DATE
Memo :
0
You cannot select more than one recording date for copying.
To copy files from multiple recording dates, it is recommended to copy by
creating a playlist.
“Creating Playlists from the Recorded Videos” (A p. 129)
“Copying Selected Playlists” (A p. 145)
7
Tap “EXECUTE”.
.
RETURNEXECUTE
CHECK
PREPARE AN EMPTY DISC
REQUIRED DISC SPACE
CREATE BY DATE
DVD:2 / DVD(DL):1
0
The number of discs required to copy the files is displayed.
Prepare the discs accordingly.
8
Tap “AUTO” or “BY DATE”. (A mode only)
.
BY DATE
AUTO
SELECT THE SORT METHOD
ON THE TOP MENU
CREATE HEADLINES
CREATE BY DATE
0
When “AUTO” is selected, videos with similar recording dates are
displayed in groups.
0
When “BY DATE” is selected, videos are displayed according to
recording dates.
9
Tap “EXECUTE”.
.
STOPEXECUTE
DVD(DL)1
DVD 02
REMAINING
CREATE BY DATE
0
When “INSERT THE NEXT DISC TO CREATE OR PRESS STOP TO
EXIT” appears, change the disc.
10
Tap “OK” when “COMPLETED” is displayed.
.
OK
COMPLETED
CREATE BY DATE
11
Press and hold the M button for 2 seconds or more to turn off this unit
and disconnect the USB cable.
Caution :
0
Do not turn off the power or remove the USB cable until copying is
complete.
0
Files that are not on the index screen during playback cannot be copied.
Special files cannot be copied either.
0
All DVDs will be finalized automatically.
While files cannot be added to the DVD-R/DVD-RW later, files can still be
added to the BD-R/BD-RE.
0
DVDs that are created in “DVD(AVCHD)” format are playable only on
AVCHD compatible devices.
Memo :
Copying
144
0
To check the created disc, refer to ““Playing Back with an External Blu-ray
Drive” (A p. 148) ”.
“Playing Back with an External Blu-ray Drive” (A p. 148)
Copying Selected Playlists
Arrange and copy the created playlists in the order you like.
1
Select video mode.
2
Tap “SELECT AND CREATE”.
.
PLAYBACK
SELECT AND CREATE
CREATE FROM ALL
VIDEO BACKUP
3
Tap “Blu-ray DISC” or “DVD(AVCHD)”.
.
DVD(AVCHD)Blu-ray DISC
CHANGE REC. MEDIA
SELECT AND CREATE
0
The media changes to the tapped item. Select the appropriate setting
according to the disc.
0
Selecting “Blu-ray DISC” enables you to save videos in a Blu-ray disc
in the high definition quality.
0
Selecting “DVD(AVCHD)” enables you to save videos in a DVD in the
high definition quality.
4
Tap on the media to copy. (GZ-EX250)
.
SD CARDBUILT-IN MEMORY
SELECT THE MEDIA TO BACK UP
SELECT AND CREATE
5
Tap “CREATE BY PLAYLIST”.
.
SELECT FROM SCENES
CREATE BY PLAYLIST
CREATE BY DATE
SELECT AND CREATE
6
Tap on the playlist to copy to disc.
.
1920
1920
1920 1920
1920
1920 1920
1920
1920
TOTAL
0/999
CREATE BY PLAYLIST
QUIT
00h00m
0
d appears on the selected playlist (upper).
Tap J to deselect.
0
Tap on the selected playlist again to check the content of the playlist.
After checking, tap J.
0
Tap 0/1 or move the zoom lever to display the previous/next playlist.
7
Tap “ADD” to insert a playlist.
Copying
145
.
ADD
0/999
1920
1920
1920 1920
1920
1920 1920
1920
1920
QUIT
TOTAL
00h00m
0
Repeat steps 6-7 and arrange the playlists.
0
To change the position of a playlist (lower), select the insertion point
with E/F after step 6 and tap “ADD”.
0
d appears when the inserted playlist is selected.
Tap J to deselect.
0
Tap on the selected playlist again to check the content of the playlist.
After checking, tap J.
0
To delete of a video in the playlist (lower row), tap the video, then tap
“CANCEL”.
8
After arranging, tap “SAVE”.
.
TOTAL
0/999
DVD(DL)1
DVD 01
CREATE BY PLAYLIST
1920
1920
1920
1920
1920
1920
1920
1920
1920 1920
1920
1920
SAVE
00h00m
9
Tap “EXECUTE”.
.
RETURNEXECUTE
CHECK
PREPARE AN EMPTY DISC
REQUIRED DISC SPACE
CREATE BY PLAYLIST
DVD:2 / DVD(DL):1
0
The number of discs required to copy the files is displayed.
Prepare the discs accordingly.
0
Tap “CHECK” to check the content.
10
Tap “OK”.
.
OK
CREATE BY PLAYLIST
THE PLAYLIST OR THE DATE
WILL DISPLAY EITHER
THE DISC TOP MENU HEADLINE
11
Tap “EXECUTE”.
.
STOPEXECUTE
DVD 02
DVD(DL)1
REMAINING
CREATE BY PLAYLIST
0
When “INSERT THE NEXT DISC TO CREATE OR PRESS STOP TO
EXIT” appears, change the disc.
12
Tap “OK” when “COMPLETED” is displayed.
.
OK
COMPLETED
CREATE BY PLAYLIST
13
Press and hold the M button for 2 seconds or more to turn off this unit
and disconnect the USB cable.
Caution :
0
Do not turn off the power or remove the USB cable until copying is
complete.
0
Files that are not on the index screen during playback cannot be copied.
Special files cannot be copied either.
0
All DVDs will be finalized automatically.
While files cannot be added to the DVD-R/DVD-RW later, files can still be
added to the BD-R/BD-RE.
0
DVDs that are created in “DVD(AVCHD)” format are playable only on
AVCHD compatible devices.
Memo :
0
A list of playlists is displayed on the top menu of the created DVD.
0
To check the created disc, refer to ““Playing Back with an External Blu-ray
Drive” (A p. 148) ”.
“Playing Back with an External Blu-ray Drive” (A p. 148)
0
To create a playlist
“Creating Playlists from the Recorded Videos” (A p. 129)
Copying
146
Copying Selected Files
Select and copy the desired videos or still images individually.
1
Select video or still image mode.
2
Tap “SELECT AND CREATE” (video) or “SELECT AND SAVE” (still
image).
.
PLAYBACK
SELECT AND CREATE
CREATE FROM ALL
VIDEO BACKUP
0
While the video mode is shown in the image, the same operations
apply for the still image mode.
0
Tap A to switch between the video and still image modes.
3
Tap “Blu-ray DISC” or “DVD(AVCHD)”.
.
DVD(AVCHD)Blu-ray DISC
CHANGE REC. MEDIA
SELECT AND CREATE
0
The media changes to the tapped item. Select the appropriate setting
according to the disc.
0
Selecting “Blu-ray DISC” enables you to save videos in a Blu-ray disc
in the high definition quality.
0
Selecting “DVD(AVCHD)” enables you to save videos in a DVD in the
high definition quality.
4
Tap on the media to copy. (GZ-EX250)
.
SD CARDBUILT-IN MEMORY
SELECT THE MEDIA TO BACK UP
SELECT AND CREATE
5
Tap “SELECT FROM SCENES” (video) or “SELECT FROM IMAGES”
(still image).
.
SELECT FROM SCENES
CREATE BY PLAYLIST
CREATE BY DATE
SELECT AND CREATE
0
While the video mode is shown in the image, the same operations
apply for the still image mode.
0
Tap A to switch between the video and still image modes.
6
Tap on the videos or still images to copy.
.
QUITCHECK
SELECT FROM SCENES
0
A check mark appears on the selected file.
To remove the check mark, tap on the file again.
0
Tap “CHECK” to check the file.
After checking, tap J.
7
After selecting all the files, tap “SAVE”.
.
SAVEQUITCHECK
SELECT FROM SCENES
8
Tap “EXECUTE”.
.
RETURNEXECUTE
PREPARE AN EMPTY DISC
DVD:2 / DVD(DL):1
REQUIRED DISC SPACE
SELECT FROM SCENES
0
The number of discs required to copy the files is displayed.
Prepare the discs accordingly.
9
Tap “AUTO” or “BY DATE”. (A mode only)
.
BY DATE
AUTO
SELECT THE SORT METHOD
ON THE TOP MENU
CREATE HEADLINES
SELECT FROM SCENES
0
When “AUTO” is selected, videos with similar recording dates are
displayed in groups.
0
When “BY DATE” is selected, videos are displayed according to
recording dates.
10
Tap “EXECUTE”.
.
STOPEXECUTE
DVD(DL)1
DVD 02
REMAINING
SELECT FROM SCENES
0
When “INSERT THE NEXT DISC TO CREATE OR PRESS STOP TO
EXIT” appears, change the disc.
11
Tap “OK” when “COMPLETED” is displayed.
.
OK
COMPLETED
SELECT FROM SCENES
12
Press and hold the M button for 2 seconds or more to turn off this unit
and disconnect the USB cable.
Caution :
0
Do not turn off the power or remove the USB cable until copying is
complete.
Copying
147
0
Files that are not on the index screen during playback cannot be copied.
Special files cannot be copied either.
0
All DVDs will be finalized automatically.
While files cannot be added to the DVD-R/DVD-RW later, files can still be
added to the BD-R/BD-RE.
0
DVDs that are created in “DVD(AVCHD)” format are playable only on
AVCHD compatible devices.
Memo :
0
To check the created disc, refer to ““Playing Back with an External Blu-ray
Drive” (A p. 148) ”.
“Playing Back with an External Blu-ray Drive” (A p. 148)
Playing Back with an External Blu-ray Drive
You can play back the Blu-ray discs created on this unit.
1
Preparing a BD Writer (External Blu-ray Drive)
0
Insert the Blu-ray disc to play back into the BD writer (external Blu-
ray drive).
“Preparing an External Blu-ray Drive” (A p. 141)
2
Tap “PLAYBACK” in the BACK-UP menu.
.
PLAYBACK
SELECT AND CREATE
CREATE FROM ALL
VIDEO BACKUP
0
An index screen (thumbnail display) of the videos in the disc appears.
3
Tap on the file to start playback.
.
2012
PLAYBACK
0
For details on video playback, refer to ““Operation Buttons for Video
Playback” (A p. 113) ”.
“Operation Buttons for Video Playback” (A p. 113)
0
To exit, stop playback and turn off the camcorder by pressing the M
button for about 2 seconds. Then, disconnect the USB cable.
Copying
148
Creating a Disc Using a Connected Blu-ray
Recorder
You can create discs using a Blu-ray recorder by connecting it to this unit
using a USB cable.
1
Remove the AC adapter and battery pack from this unit.
2
Open the LCD monitor.
.
3
Connect to a Blu-ray recorder.
.
To DC Connector
To USB
Connector
To USB
Connector
Blu-ray Recorder
AC Adapter To AC Outlet
(110 V to 240 V)
USB Cable
(Provided)
A Connect using the provided USB cable.
B Connect the AC adapter to this unit.
0
This unit powers on automatically when the AC adapter is connected.
0
Be sure to use the supplied AC adapter.
0
This unit turns on and the “SELECT DEVICE” screen appears.
4
Tap “CONNECT TO OTHER”.
.
CONNECT TO OTHER
TYPE TO CONNECT
SELECT DEVICE
SELECT DEVICE
5
Tap on the media to configure. (GZ-EX250)
.
SD CARDBUILT-IN MEMORY
SELECT MEDIA TO OPEN
CONNECT TO OTHER
0
Operations are to be performed on the Blu-ray recorder after the
screen switches.
6
Perform dubbing on the Blu-ray recorder.
0
Refer also to the instruction manual of the Blu-ray recorder.
0
After dubbing is complete, disconnect the USB cable. Operations
cannot be performed on this unit until the USB cable is disconnected.
Dubbing Files to a Disc by Connecting to a
DVD Recorder
You can dub videos in standard quality by connecting to a DVD recorder.
0
Refer also to the instruction manuals of the TV and DVD recorder.
1
Remove the AC adapter and battery pack from this unit.
2
Open the LCD monitor.
.
3
Connect to a DVD recorder.
.
Red
White
Ye l l o w
To DC Connector
VCR/DVD Recorder
Audio Input (R)
Audio Input (L)
Video Input
Video Input
Record
AC Adapter To AC
Outlet (110 V to 240 V)
AV Cable (Provided)
To AV Connector
A Connect using the provided AV cable.
B Connect the AC adapter to this unit.
0
This unit powers on automatically when the AC adapter is connected.
0
Be sure to use the supplied AC adapter.
0
Check if the recording mode is A.
0
If the mode is B still image, tap B on the recording screen to display
the mode switching screen.
Tap A to switch the mode to video.
4
Tap “<<PLAY” to select the playback mode.
.
PLAY
REC
MENU
5
Prepare the TV/DVD recorder for recording.
0
Switch to a compatible external input.
0
Insert a disc (DVD-R, etc.) into the DVD recorder.
6
Prepare this unit for playback.
0
Set “VIDEO OUTPUT” in the “COMMON” menu to the aspect ratio
(“4:3” or “16:9”) of the connecting TV.
“ VIDEO OUTPUT ” (A p. 196)
7
Start recording.
0
Start playback on this unit and press the record button on the
recorder.
“Playing Back Videos” (A p. 113)
0
After playback is complete, stop the recording.
Memo :
0
When there are many videos to dub, you can create a playlist in advance
and play it back so that all your favorite videos can be dubbed at once.
“Creating Playlists with Selected Files” (A p. 129)
“Playing Back Playlists” (A p. 121)
0
To include the recording date and time during dubbing, set “DISPLAY
DATE/TIME” in the video playback menu to “ON”. Set “DISPLAY ON TV”
in the common menu to “ON”.
Copying
149
Dubbing Files to a VHS Tape by Connecting
to a VCR
You can dub videos in standard quality by connecting to a VCR.
0
Refer also to the instruction manuals of the TV and VCR.
1
Remove the AC adapter and battery pack from this unit.
2
Open the LCD monitor.
.
3
Connect to a VCR/DVD recorder.
.
Red
White
Ye l l o w
To DC Connector
VCR/DVD Recorder
Audio Input (R)
Audio Input (L)
Video Input
Video Input
Record
AC Adapter To AC
Outlet (110 V to 240 V)
AV Cable (Provided)
To AV Connector
A Connect using the provided AV cable.
B Connect the AC adapter to this unit.
0
This unit powers on automatically when the AC adapter is connected.
0
Be sure to use the supplied AC adapter.
4
Tap “<<PLAY” to select the playback mode.
.
PLAY
REC
MENU
5
Prepare the TV/VCR for recording.
0
Switch to a compatible external input.
0
Insert a video tape.
6
Prepare this unit for playback.
0
Set “VIDEO OUTPUT” in the “COMMON” menu to the aspect ratio
(“4:3” or “16:9”) of the connecting TV.
“ VIDEO OUTPUT ” (A p. 196)
7
Start recording.
0
Start playback on this unit and press the record button on the
recorder.
“Playing Back Videos” (A p. 113)
0
After playback is complete, stop the recording.
Memo :
0
When there are many videos to dub, you can create a playlist in advance
and play it back so that all your favorite videos can be dubbed at once.
“Creating Playlists with Selected Files” (A p. 129)
“Playing Back Playlists” (A p. 121)
0
To include the recording date and time during dubbing, set “DISPLAY
DATE/TIME” in the video playback menu to “ON”. Set “DISPLAY ON TV”
in the common menu to “ON”.
Copying Files with a USB External Hard Disk
Drive
You can copy video and still image files to a USB external hard disk drive
from this unit. You can also play the files in the USB external hard disk drive
on this unit.
0
Refer also to the instruction manual of the external hard disk drive.
Compatible External Hard Disk Drives
Memo :
0
USB external hard disk drives up to 2 TB can be used.
Copying and Playback with a USB External Hard Disk Drive
“Preparing a USB External Hard Disk Drive” (A p. 151)
“Copying All Files” (A p. 151)
“Playing Back Files in the USB External Hard Disk Drive” (A p. 152)
“Deleting Folders in the USB External Hard Disk Drive” (A p. 153)
Importing Files from the USB External Hard Disk Drive
“Importing Files from the USB External Hard Disk Drive” (A p. 154)
Memo :
0
Format the USB external hard disk drive when connecting it to this unit for
the first time. (All data will be deleted.)
“Formatting the USB External Hard Disk Drive” (A p. 153)
0
Refer to the help file of the provided Everio MediaBrowser 4 software when
you use the PC to operate the data in the USB external hard disk drive
directly copied from this unit.
0
USB external hard disk drives with the capacity over 2 TB cannot be used.
0
Copying may take time. (For example, saving 1 hour video in XP mode
takes about 20 minutes.)
0
When there are many files to back up, it may take time for the backup to
be completed. Wait for a while as the access lamp appears blinking, which
indicates normal operation.
0
Sound or video may be interrupted during playback.
Caution :
0
Do not connect a USB hub between this unit and the USB external hard
disk drive.
0
Disconnect the USB external hard disk drive when using other USB
devices such as DVD writer, external Blu-ray drive, or another USB
external hard disk drive.
0
Avoid the following operations during copying and playing back.
- Turning off the unit or the USB external hard disk drive.
- Disconnecting the USB cable.
0
Do not format the USB external hard disk drive using the PC. If you did,
format again using this unit. (All the data in the USB external hard disk
drive will be erased.)
0
Avoid the following operations using the PC.
- Deleting files or folders in the USB external hard disk drive.
- Moving files or folders in the USB external hard disk drive.
- Changing the name of files or folders in the USB external hard disk drive.
These operations make the data impossible to be played back on this unit.
0
When you use the PC to edit the data in the USB external hard disk drive,
copy the data to the PC before editing. Editing the data in the USB external
hard disk drive directly from the PC makes the data impossible to be
played back on this unit.
Copying
150
Preparing a USB External Hard Disk Drive
Memo :
0
When connecting to the external hard disk drive, use a USB cable with
Mini-A (Male) – B (Male) connectors.
The USB cable provided with this unit cannot be used.
0
To use the USB cable provided with the USB external hard disk drive,
purchase the following USB conversion cable.
Part number*: QAM0852-001 Mini-A (Male) – A (Female)
*Consult your nearest service center.
1
Remove the AC adapter and battery pack from this unit.
2
Open the LCD monitor.
.
3
Connect the USB cable and the AC adapter.
0
Turn off the camcorder by pressing the M button for about 2 seconds.
.
AC Adapter To AC
Outlet (110 V to
240 V)
To USB Connector
USB Cable Provided
with External Hard
Disk Drive
USB Cable Mini-A
(Male) – B (Male)
(Part number: QAM0852-001)*
USB Extension Cable
Mini-A (Male) – A (Female)
To DC Connector
To USB Connector
*Consult your nearest service center.
A Connect the USB cable with the USB external hard disk drive.
B Connect the AC adapter of the USB external hard disk drive.
0
Turn on the external hard disk drive.
C Connect the AC adapter to this unit.
0
This unit powers on automatically when the AC adapter is connected.
0
This unit turns on and the “BACK-UP” menu appears.
0
While the USB cable is connected, the “BACK-UP” menu is
displayed.
0
Refer also to the instruction manual of the external hard disk drive.
Caution :
0
Be sure to turn off the power when connecting the devices.
Otherwise, electric shocks or malfunctions may occur.
0
Do not connect a USB hub between this unit and the USB external hard
disk drive.
Copying All Files
All videos or still images recorded on this unit will be copied.
You can also select and copy only the videos or still images that have never
been copied.
1
Select video or still image mode.
2
Tap “BACK UP”.
.
BACK UP
VIDEO BACKUP
3
Tap on the media to copy. (GZ-EX250)
.
SD CARDBUILT-IN MEMORY
CREATE FROM ALL
SELECT THE MEDIA TO BACK UP
4
Tap the desired method.
.
UNSAVED SCENES
ALL SCENES
BACK UP
0
“ALL SCENES” (video)/“ALL IMAGES” (still image):
All videos or still images in this unit are copied.
0
“UNSAVED SCENES” (video)/“UNSAVED IMAGES” (still
image):
Videos or still images that have never been copied are automatically
selected and copied.
5
Check that there is sufficient remaining space on the hard disk drive and
tap “YES”.
.
NOYES
START TO BACKUP?
FREE SPACE : 0,007,768MB
REQ SPACE : 147MB
15 SCENES
ALL SCENES
0
Backup starts when “YES” is tapped.
Copying
151
6
Tap “OK” when “COMPLETED” is displayed.
.
OK
SAVED
ALL SCENES
7
Press and hold the M button for 2 seconds or more to turn off this unit
and disconnect the USB cable.
Caution :
0
Do not turn off the power or remove the USB cable until copying is
complete.
0
Files that are not on the index screen during playback cannot be copied.
Special files cannot be copied either.
0
Copying may take time. (For example, saving 1 hour video in XP mode
takes about 20 minutes.)
Playing Back Files in the USB External Hard Disk Drive
Videos or still images saved in an external hard disk drive can be played
back on this unit.
1
Select video or still image mode.
2
Tap “PLAYBACK”.
.
PLAYBACK
VIDEO BACKUP
3
Tap on the folder to play back.
.
PLAYBACK
0
Tap “J” to return to the “BACK-UP” menu.
4
Tap on the file to play back.
.
PLAYBACK
0
Tap “J” to return to the folder index screen.
0
For details on video playback, refer to ““Operation Buttons for Video
Playback” (A p. 113) ”.
“Operation Buttons for Video Playback” (A p. 113)
0
To exit, stop playback and turn off the camcorder by pressing the M
button for about 2 seconds. Then, disconnect the USB cable.
Memo :
0
Sound or video may be interrupted during playback.
Copying
152
Deleting Folders in the USB External Hard Disk Drive
Files that are copied to the external hard disk drive can be deleted.
Caution :
0
Deleted files cannot be restored.
0
Be sure to back up important files on a PC.
“Backing Up All Files” (A p. 159)
1
Select video or still image mode.
2
Tap “DELETE”.
.
DELETE
VIDEO BACKUP
3
Tap on the folder to delete.
.
DELETE FOLDER CONTENTS
DELETE
4
Tap “YES”.
.
NOYES
DELETE?
FREE SPACE : 0,007,768MB
DELETE VOLUME : 144MB
2012.10.10 15 SCENES
ALL SCENES
0
After deleting, tap “OK”.
Formatting the USB External Hard Disk Drive
All files on the external hard disk drive can be deleted.
Caution :
0
All data on the external hard disk drive will be deleted when it is formatted.
Copy all files on the external hard disk drive to a computer before
formatting.
1
Select video or still image mode.
2
Tap “FORMAT”.
.
VIDEO BACKUP
FORMAT
3
Tap “YES”.
.
NOYES
ERASED.
IF YES, ALL DATA WILL BE
DO YOU WANT TO FORMAT?
FORMAT
0
After formatting, tap “OK”.
Copying
153
Importing Files from the USB External Hard Disk Drive
You can copy video files from a USB external hard disk drive to the built-in
memory of this unit or an SD card.
1
Select video mode.
2
Tap “IMPORT FROM DEVICE” in “BACK-UP”.
.
IMPORT FROM DEVICE
VIDEO BACKUP
3
Tap “USB HDD
F
BUILT-IN MEM” or “USB HDD
F
SD”. (GZ-EX250)
.
USB HDD→BUILT-IN MEM
SELECT COPY DIRECTION
IMPORT FROM DEVICE
USB HDD→SD
0
Files will be imported to the selected media.
4
Tap on the folder to import.
.
SELECT FOLDER
USB HDD→SD
5
Tap on the files to import.
.
REL ALLSEL ALL
USB HDD→SD
0
P appears on the selected files.
To remove P from a file, tap on the file again.
0
Tap “SEL ALL” to select all files.
0
Tap “REL ALL” to release all selections.
6
Tap “SET”.
.
SETREL ALLSEL ALL
USB HDD→SD
0
“SET” is deactivated when no file is selected.
7
Tap “YES”.
.
NOYES
START COPY?
COPY QUANTITY:30
COPY ALL
0
Importing starts when “YES” is tapped.
0
To cancel importing of files, tap “STOP”, then tap “YES”.
8
After importing, tap “OK”.
.
OK
COPYING COMPLETED
COPY ALL
9
Press and hold the
M
button for 2 seconds or more to turn off this unit
and disconnect the USB cable.
Memo :
0
Files that are saved to the USB external hard disk drive from other devices
cannot be copied to this unit.
Copying
154
Copying Files to an SD Card (GZ-EX250)
You can copy videos and still images from the built-in memory to SD card.
Copying still images to cards makes it convenient to bring them to the shop
for printing (developing).
Caution :
0
Make sure that there is enough space left in the destination medium.
0
Videos in the SD card cannot be copied to the built-in memory.
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
2
Tap A or B to select the video or still image mode.
3
Tap “<<PLAY” to select the playback mode.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The mode changes between recording and playback with every tap.
4
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
MENU
5
Tap “COPY”.
.
COPY
VIDEO
6
Tap on the files to copy.
.
STOPSETREL ALLSEL ALL
QUANTITY:0030
0
P appears on the selected files.
To remove P from a file, tap on the file again.
0
Tap “SEL ALL” to select all files.
0
Tap “REL ALL” to release all selections.
7
Tap “SET”.
.
STOPSETREL ALLSEL ALL
QUANTITY:0030
0
“SET” is deactivated when no file is selected.
8
Tap “YES”.
.
NOYES
START COPY?
COPY QUANTITY:30
COPY VIDEO
0
Copying starts.
0
After copying, tap “OK”.
Copying
155
Moving Files to an SD Card (GZ-EX250)
You can move videos and still images from the built-in memory to SD card.
Files that are moved will be deleted from the built-in memory.
Moving still images to SD cards makes it convenient to bring them to the
shop for printing (developing).
Caution :
0
Make sure that there is enough space left in the destination medium.
0
Videos in the SD card cannot be moved to the built-in memory.
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
2
Tap A or B to select the video or still image mode.
3
Tap “<<PLAY” to select the playback mode.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The mode changes between recording and playback with every tap.
4
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
MENU
5
Tap “MOVE”.
.
MOVE
VIDEO
6
Tap on the files to move.
.
STOPSETREL ALLSEL ALL
QUANTITY:0030
0
P appears on the selected files.
To remove P from a file, tap on the file again.
0
Tap “SEL ALL” to select all files.
0
Tap “REL ALL” to release all selections.
7
Tap “SET”.
.
STOPSETREL ALLSEL ALL
QUANTITY:0030
0
“SET” is deactivated when no file is selected.
8
Tap “YES”.
.
NOYES
START MOVING?
MOVE QUANTITY:30
MOVE VIDEO
0
Moving of files starts.
0
After moving, tap “OK”.
Copying
156
Copying to Windows PC
You can copy files to a computer using the provided software.
Discs can also be created using the computer’s DVD or Blu-ray drive.
If the provided software is not installed, this unit will be recognized as an external storage when connected.
Memo :
0
To record to discs, a recordable DVD or Blu-ray drive is required for the computer in use.
0
Still images cannot be recorded to discs using the provided software.
0
To create DVD-Video discs, it is necessary to install the additional software.
For details, refer to the Pixela homepage.
http://www.pixela.co.jp/oem/jvc/mediabrowser/e/
0
Backing up of files using other softwares is not supported.
Trouble with Using the Provided Software Everio MediaBrowser 4
Consult the customer service center below.
0
Pixela User Support Center
Telephone USA and Canada (English): +1-800-458-4029 (toll-free)
Europe (UK, Germany, France, and Spain)
(English/German/French/Spanish): +800-1532-4865 (toll-free)
Other Countries in Europe
(English/German/French/Spanish): +44-1489-564-764
Asia (Philippines) (English): +63-2-438-0090
China (Chinese): 10800-163-0014 (toll-free)
Homepage http://www.pixela.co.jp/oem/jvc/mediabrowser/e/
0
For details on how to use the software, refer to “MediaBrowser Help” in the “Help” menu of Everio MediaBrowser 4.
.
Verifying System Requirements (Guideline)
Right-click on “Computer” (or “My Computer”) in the “Start” menu and select “Properties” to check the following items.
Windows Vista/Windows 7
0
Refer to the operating instructions found in the animation on the Detailed User Guide.
Windows XP
0
Refer to the operating instructions found in the animation on the Detailed User Guide.
Windows Vista/Windows 7 Windows XP
OS Windows Vista 32/64-bit
Home Basic or Home Premium
(Pre-installed versions only) Service Pack 2
Windows 7 32/64-bit
Home Premium
(Pre-installed versions only) Service Pack 1
Windows XP
Home Edition or Professional
(Pre-installed versions only) Service Pack 3
CPU Intel Core Duo, CPU 1.66 GHz or higher
(Intel Core 2 Duo, CPU 2.13 GHz or higher recommended)
Intel Core Duo, CPU 1.66 GHz or higher
(Intel Core 2 Duo, CPU 2.13 GHz or higher recommended)
RAM At least 2 GB At least 1 GB
Video editing Intel Core i7, CPU 2.53 GHz or higher recommended Intel Core i7, CPU 2.53 GHz or higher recommended
o
Other requirements
Display: 1024×768 pixels or above (1280×1024 pixels or above recommended)
Graphic: Intel G965 or higher recommended
Memo :
0
If your PC does not meet the above system requirements, operations of the provided software cannot be guaranteed.
0
For more information, contact your PC's manufacturer.
Copying
157
Installing the Provided Software
You can display the recorded images in calendar format and perform simple editing using the provided software.
Windows Vista/Windows 7
0
Refer to the operating instructions found in the animation on the Detailed User Guide.
Windows XP
0
Refer to the operating instructions found in the animation on the Detailed User Guide.
Copying
158
Backing Up All Files
Before making backup, make sure that enough free space is left in the
computer's hard disk (HDD).
Backup will not start if there is not enough free space.
1
Remove the AC adapter and battery pack from this unit.
2
Open the LCD monitor.
.
3
Connect the USB cable and the AC adapter.
.
AC Adapter
To AC Outlet
(110 V to 240 V)
To DC Connector
To USB
Connector
To USB
Connector
USB Cable
(Provided)
Computer
A Connect using the provided USB cable.
B Connect the AC adapter to this unit.
0
This unit powers on automatically when the AC adapter is connected.
0
Be sure to use the supplied AC adapter.
C The “SELECT DEVICE” menu appears.
4
Tap “CONNECT TO PC”.
.
CONNECT TO PC
TYPE TO CONNECT
SELECT DEVICE
SELECT DEVICE
5
Tap “BACK UP”.
.
BACK UP
CONNECT TO PC
0
Tap L to exit the menu.
0
Tap J to return to the previous screen.
0
The provided software Everio MediaBrowser 4 starts up on the
computer.
The subsequent operations are to be performed on the computer.
6
Select the source of the image file.
.
1
2
Click
Click
Click “Next”
Click “All volume in camcorder”
7
Start backup.
.
Click
Saving Destination (PC)
0
Backup starts.
8
After backup is complete, click “OK”.
.
Click
Memo :
0
Before making backup, load the SD card in which the videos and still
images are stored on this unit.
0
If you encounter any problems with the provided software Everio
MediaBrowser 4, please consult the “Pixela User Support Center”.
Telephone USA and Canada (English): +1-800-458-4029 (toll-free)
Europe (UK, Germany, France, and Spain)
(English/German/French/Spanish): +800-1532-4865 (toll-
free)
Other Countries in Europe
(English/German/French/Spanish): +44-1489-564-764
Asia (Philippines) (English): +63-2-438-0090
China (Chinese): 10800-163-0014 (toll-free)
Homepage http://www.pixela.co.jp/oem/jvc/mediabrowser/e/
0
Delete unwanted videos before making backup.
It takes time to back up many videos.
“Deleting Unwanted Files” (A p. 122)
Copying
159
Disconnecting this Unit from Computer
1
Click “Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media”.
.
Click
2
Click “Safely Remove USB Mass Storage Device”.
3
(For Windows Vista) Click “OK”.
4
Disconnect the USB cable and close the LCD monitor.
Organizing Files
After backing up your files, organize them by adding labels such as “Family
Trip” or “Athletic Meet”.
This is useful not only for creating discs, but for viewing the files too.
1
Double-click on the Everio MediaBrowser 4 icon.
0
The provided software starts up.
.
2
Display the month of the files to organize.
.
Click
Recording Month
3
Create a user list.
.
Recording Date
Click
.
2
1
Click
Input the name of the new
user list
0
A new user list is added to the user list library.
Copying
160
4
Click on the recording day.
0
The thumbnails of the files recorded on the day are displayed.
.
Recording Date
5
Register files to the created user list.
.
Drop
Drag
Thumbnails
User List
Identifying Video or Still Image
0
You can select files using the “SELECT” menu on the top right of the
screen.
0
Check the video/still image icon on the top right corner of the thumbnail.
.
Still Image
Video
Memo :
0
If you encounter any problems with the provided software Everio
MediaBrowser 4, please consult the “Pixela User Support Center”.
Telephone USA and Canada (English): +1-800-458-4029 (toll-free)
Europe (UK, Germany, France, and Spain)
(English/German/French/Spanish): +800-1532-4865 (toll-
free)
Other Countries in Europe
(English/German/French/Spanish): +44-1489-564-764
Asia (Philippines) (English): +63-2-438-0090
China (Chinese): 10800-163-0014 (toll-free)
Homepage http://www.pixela.co.jp/oem/jvc/mediabrowser/e/
Recording Videos to Discs
Copy the files that are arranged using the user list to discs.
1
Insert a new disc into the PC’s recordable DVD drive.
2
Select the desired user list.
.
Click
3
Select the disc type.
.
Click
4
Select the files to copy to disc in order.
.
Drop
Drag
Click
0
Click “Settings” to select the disc type.
0
Click “Select all” to select all the displayed files.
0
After selecting, click “Next”.
5
Set the title of the top menu of the disc.
.
Click
0
Click “Settings” to select the menu background.
0
After setting, click “Start”.
6
After copying is complete, click “OK”.
Copying
161
.
Click
Memo :
0
The following types of discs can be used on the provided software Everio
MediaBrowser 4.
DVD-R
DVD-R DL
DVD-RW
DVD+R
DVD+R DL
DVD+RW
0
The following formats are supported by the provided software Everio
MediaBrowser 4.
AVCHD
DVD-Video*
*To create DVD-Video discs, it is necessary to install the additional software.
For details, refer to the Pixela homepage.
http://www.pixela.co.jp/oem/jvc/mediabrowser/e/
0
Use Everio MediaBrowser 4 Player to play back an AVCHD disc. Refer to
the help file of the provided Everio MediaBrowser 4 software to operate.
0
When copying videos recorded in UXP recording mode to create an
AVCHD disc, the videos need to be converted to XP recording mode
before copying. Therefore, it may take a longer time than copying videos
recorded in other modes.
0
To view the help file of Everio MediaBrowser 4, select “Help” from the
Everio MediaBrowser 4’s menu bar or press F1 on the keyboard.
0
If you encounter any problems with the provided software Everio
MediaBrowser 4, please consult the “Pixela User Support Center”.
Telephone USA and Canada (English): +1-800-458-4029 (toll-free)
Europe (UK, Germany, France, and Spain)
(English/German/French/Spanish): +800-1532-4865 (toll-
free)
Other Countries in Europe
(English/German/French/Spanish): +44-1489-564-764
Asia (Philippines) (English): +63-2-438-0090
China (Chinese): 10800-163-0014 (toll-free)
Homepage http://www.pixela.co.jp/oem/jvc/mediabrowser/e/
Copying
162
Backing Up Files Without Using Provided Software
Copy the files to a computer using the following method.
1
Remove the AC adapter and battery pack from this unit.
2
Open the LCD monitor.
.
3
Connect the USB cable and the AC adapter.
.
AC Adapter
To AC Outlet
(110 V to 240 V)
To DC Connector
To USB
Connector
To USB
Connector
USB Cable
(Provided)
Computer
A Connect using the provided USB cable.
B Connect the AC adapter to this unit.
0
This unit powers on automatically when the AC adapter is connected.
0
Be sure to use the supplied AC adapter.
C The “SELECT DEVICE” menu appears.
4
Tap “CONNECT TO PC”.
.
CONNECT TO PC
TYPE TO CONNECT
SELECT DEVICE
SELECT DEVICE
5
Tap “PLAYBACK ON PC”.
.
PLAYBACK ON PC
CONNECT TO PC
0
Tap L to exit the menu.
0
Tap J to return to the previous screen.
0
Close the Everio MediaBrowser 4 program, if it starts.
0
Operations are to be performed on the computer after the screen
switches.
6
Select “Computer” (Windows Vista) / “My Computer” (Windows XP) /
“Computer” (Windows 7) from the “Start” menu, then click on the
“JVCCAM_MEM” or “JVCCAM_SD” icon.
0
Open the folder with the desired files.
“List of Files and Folders” (A p. 164)
7
Copy the files to any folder in the computer (desktop, etc).
Caution :
0
When the folders or files are deleted/moved/renamed in the computer,
they cannot be played back on this unit anymore.
Memo :
0
To edit/view the files, use a software that supports AVCHD (video)/JPEG
(still image) files.
0
The above operations on computer may vary with the system used.
Disconnecting this Unit from Computer
1
Click “Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media”.
.
Click
2
Click “Safely Remove USB Mass Storage Device”.
3
(For Windows Vista) Click “OK”.
4
Disconnect the USB cable and close the LCD monitor.
Copying
163
List of Files and Folders
Folders and files are created in the built-in memory and SD card as shown below.
They are created only when necessary.
.
[JVCCAM_MEM]
[JVCCAM_SD]
[ DCIM ] [ 100JVCSO ]
[ 101JVCSO ]
[ 102JVCSO ]
[ AVCHD ]
[ AVCHD ]
[ BDMV ]
[ STREAM ]
[ BACKUP ]
[ CLIPINF ]
[ PLAYLIST ]
[ INDEX.BDM ]
[ MOVIEOBJ.BDM ]
[ EXTMOV ]
[ PRIVATE ]
DEM_0000.MTS
MOV_0001.MTS
MOV_0002.MTS
MOV_0003.MTS
[ XXXXX.MTS ]
[ JVC ]
PIC_0001.JPG
PIC_0002.JPG
PIC_0003.JPG
(Video files with defective management information)
*There may be no demo video file.
(Demo Video File)
(Video File)
Still Image File
(Management Information)
Still Image Folder
(SD Card)
(SD Card)
(Built-In Memory)
(Built-In Memory)
Caution :
0
When the folders or files are deleted/moved/renamed in the computer, they cannot be played back on this unit anymore.
Copying
164
Copying to Mac Computer
Copy the files to a Mac computer using the following method.
1
Remove the AC adapter and battery pack from this unit.
2
Open the LCD monitor.
.
3
Connect the USB cable and the AC adapter.
.
AC Adapter
To AC Outlet
(110 V to 240 V)
To DC Connector
To USB
Connector
To USB
Connector
USB Cable
(Provided)
Computer
A Connect using the provided USB cable.
B Connect the AC adapter to this unit.
0
This unit powers on automatically when the AC adapter is connected.
0
Be sure to use the supplied AC adapter.
C The “SELECT DEVICE” menu appears.
4
Tap “CONNECT TO PC”.
.
CONNECT TO PC
TYPE TO CONNECT
SELECT DEVICE
SELECT DEVICE
5
Tap “PLAYBACK ON PC”.
.
PLAYBACK ON PC
CONNECT TO PC
0
Tap L to exit the menu.
0
Tap J to return to the previous screen.
0
The “JVCCAM_MEM” or “JVCCAM_SD” icon appears on the
desktop.
6
Start iMovie.
0
The subsequent operations are to be performed on the Mac
computer.
Caution :
0
When the folders or files are deleted/moved/renamed in the computer,
they cannot be played back on this unit anymore.
0
MTS files that are copied to a Mac computer cannot be imported to iMovie.
To use MTS files with iMovie, import the files using iMovie.
Memo :
0
To edit/view the files, use a software that supports AVCHD (video)/JPEG
(still image) files.
0
When removing this unit from the computer, drag and drop the
“JVCCAM_MEM” or “JVCCAM_SD” icon on the desktop to the trash bin.
iMovie and iPhoto
You can import files from this unit to a computer using Apple’s
iMovie ’08, ’09, ’11 (video) or iPhoto (still image).
To verify the system requirements, select “About This Mac” from the Apple
menu. You can determine the operating system version, processor and
amount of memory.
0
For the latest information on iMovie or iPhoto, refer to the Apple website.
0
For details on how to use iMovie or iPhoto, refer to the help file of the
respective softwares.
0
There is no guarantee that the operations will work with all computer
environments.
Copying
165
Operating the Menu
There are three types of menus in this unit.
0
Shortcut menu - Menu that contains the recommended functions from the
video/still image main menu.
0
Main menu - Menu that contains all the items specific to the video
recording, still image recording, video playback, and still image playback
modes respectively.
0
Q (“COMMON”) menu in the main menu - Menu that contains all common
items in the video recording, still image recording, video playback, and still
image playback modes.
Operating the Shortcut Menu
You can configure various settings of the recommended functions in the
video/still image recording mode using the shortcut menu.
1
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap the desired menu and setting.
<Shortcut Menu During Video Recording Mode>
.
MENU
“Wi-Fi Capabilities” (A p. 12)
“Image Monitoring via Direct Connection (DIRECT MONITORING)”
(A p. 14)
“Record and Send Videos via E-mail (VIDEO MAIL ATTN.)” (A p. 25)
0
SMILE: Allows settings of “SMILE SHOT” and “SMILE%/NAME
DISPLAY”.
0
EFFECT RECORDING: Allows settings of “ANIMATION EFFECT”,
“DECORATE FACE EFFECT”, “HANDWRITING EFFECT” and
“STAMP”.
0
MENU: Allows settings of other menus.
<Shortcut Menu During Still Image Recording Mode>
.
MENU
0
SMILE: Allows settings of “SMILE SHOT” and “SMILE%/NAME
DISPLAY”.
0
MENU: Allows settings of other menus.
Memo :
0
To exit the screen
Tap “L” (quit).
0
To display the help file
Tap “K” (help) and tap the item.
Menu Settings
166
Operating the Main Menu
You can configure various settings using the menu.
1
Tap “MENU”.
0
The menu differs according to the mode in use.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
When entering from the recording mode, tap “MENU” again as the
shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap the desired menu.
.
SCENE SELECT
VIDEO
3
Tap the desired setting.
.
SPOTLIGHT
NIGHTALIVE
OFF
SCENE SELECT
Memo :
0
To display the previous/next menu
Tap “3” or “2”.
0
To exit the screen
Tap “L” (quit).
0
To return to the previous screen
Tap “J” (return).
0
To display the help file
Tap “K” (help) and tap the item.
Help file may not be available for some items.
Operating the Common Menu
You can configure common setting items regardless of the mode using the
common menu.
1
Tap “MENU”.
0
The menu differs according to the mode in use.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
When entering from the recording mode, tap “MENU” again as the
shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “
Q
”.
.
3
Tap the desired setting.
.
CLOCK ADJUST
COMMON
Memo :
0
To display the previous/next menu
Tap “3” or “2”.
0
To exit the screen
Tap “L” (quit).
0
To return to the previous screen
Tap “J” (return).
0
To display the help file
Tap “K” (help) and tap the item.
Menu Settings
167
Recording Menu (Video)
You can adjust various settings, such as brightness and white balance, to suit the subject or purpose. You can also change settings such as picture quality
and gain.
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Check if the recording mode is A.
2
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
3
Tap “MENU” in the shortcut menu.
.
MENU
Setting Details
SCENE SELECT Settings to suit the shooting condition can be selected.
“Shooting According to Scene (Subject)” (A p. 81)
*Displayed only in the manual recording mode.
FOCUS Focus can be adjusted manually.
“Adjusting Focus Manually” (A p. 83)
*Displayed only in the manual recording mode.
BRIGHTNESS ADJUST Adjusts the overall brightness of the screen.
“Adjusting Brightness” (A p. 84)
*Displayed only in the manual recording mode.
WHITE BALANCE Adjusts the color according to the light source.
“Setting White Balance” (A p. 85)
*Displayed only in the manual recording mode.
BACKLIGHT COMP. Corrects the image when the subject appears dark due to backlight.
“Setting Backlight Compensation” (A p. 86)
*Displayed only in the manual recording mode.
Menu Settings
168
Setting Details
TELE MACRO Enables close-up shots when using the telephoto (T) end of the zoom.
“Taking Close-up Shots” (A p. 87)
*Displayed only in the manual recording mode.
TOUCH PRIORITY AE/AF Automatically adjusts focus and brightness based on the subjects’ faces or selected area.
“Capturing Subjects Clearly (TOUCH PRIORITY AE/AF)” (A p. 93)
LIGHT
(GZ-EX215)
Turns on/off the light.
“LIGHT (GZ-EX215)” (A p. 171)
GAIN UP Makes the subject appear bright automatically when recording in dark places.
“ GAIN UP ” (A p. 172)
WIND CUT Reduces the noise caused by wind.
“ WIND CUT ” (A p. 172)
ANIMATION EFFECT Records videos with animation effects.
“Recording with Animation Effects” (A p. 88)
DECORATE FACE EFFECT Detects faces and enables decorations such as sunglasses to be added.
“Recording with Face Decorations” (A p. 90)
STAMP Records videos with various decorative stamps.
“Recording with Decorative Stamps” (A p. 90)
HANDWRITING EFFECT Records videos with your personal handwriting or drawing.
“Recording with Personal Handwriting” (A p. 91)
HIGH SPEED RECORDING You can record videos in slow-motion by increasing the recording speed to emphasize the movements, and
play back the slow-motion video smoothly.
“Slow-motion (High-speed) Recording” (A p. 104)
TIME-LAPSE RECORDING Enables the changes of a scene that occur slowly over a long period to be shown within a short time by taking
frames of it at a certain interval.
“Recording at Intervals (TIME-LAPSE RECORDING)” (A p. 105)
AUTO REC This function enables the unit to record automatically by sensing the changes in subject’s movement
(brightness) within the red frame displayed on the LCD monitor.
“Recording Automatically by Sensing Movements (AUTO REC)” (A p. 107)
Wi-Fi Sets or uses the Wi-Fi function.
“Wi-Fi Capabilities” (A p. 12)
DATE/TIME RECORDING You can record videos together with the date and time.
Set this when you want to save the file with date and time display.
(The date and time cannot be deleted after recording.)
“Recording Videos with Date and Time” (A p. 110)
FACE SUB-WINDOW Magnifies and displays a registered face in a sub-window.
“Recording while Displaying a Magnified View of a Selected Face (FACE SUB-WINDOW)” (A p. 97)
SMILE SHOT Automatically captures a still image upon detection of a smile.
“Capturing Smiles Automatically (SMILE SHOT)” (A p. 94)
SMILE%/NAME DISPLAY Sets the items to display when faces are detected.
“Setting SMILE%/NAME DISPLAY” (A p. 101)
FACE REGISTRATION Registers the faces of people who are often shot with this unit.
“Registering Human Face Personal Authentication Information” (A p. 99)
PET SHOT Automatically captures a still image upon detection of the face of a pet, such as dogs or cats.
“Capturing Pets Automatically (PET SHOT)” (A p. 96)
VIDEO QUALITY Sets the video quality.
“ VIDEO QUALITY ” (A p. 174)
ZOOM Sets the maximum zoom ratio.
“ ZOOM ” (A p. 174)
Menu Settings
169
Setting Details
SEAMLESS RECORDING
(GZ-EX250)
Continues recording on the SD card without stopping when the remaining space on the built-in memory runs
out.
“SEAMLESS RECORDING (GZ-EX250)” (A p. 175)
ZOOM MIC Sets the zoom microphone.
“ ZOOM MIC ” (A p. 175)
Menu Settings
170
SCENE SELECT
Settings to suit the shooting condition can be selected.
Operating Details
“Shooting According to Scene (Subject)” (A p. 81)
FOCUS
Focus can be adjusted manually.
Operating Details
“Adjusting Focus Manually” (A p. 83)
BRIGHTNESS ADJUST
Adjusts the overall brightness of the screen.
Operating Details
“Adjusting Brightness” (A p. 84)
WHITE BALANCE
Adjusts the color according to the light source.
Operating Details
“Setting White Balance” (A p. 85)
BACKLIGHT COMP.
Corrects the image when the subject appears dark due to backlight.
Operating Details
“Setting Backlight Compensation” (A p. 86)
TELE MACRO
Enables close-up shots when using the telephoto (T) end of the zoom.
Operating Details
“Taking Close-up Shots” (A p. 87)
TOUCH PRIORITY AE/AF
Automatically adjusts focus and brightness based on the subjects’ faces or
selected area.
Operating Details
“Capturing Subjects Clearly (TOUCH PRIORITY AE/AF)” (A p. 93)
LIGHT (GZ-EX215)
Turns on/off the light.
Setting Details
OFF Does not light up.
AUTO Lights up automatically when the surrounding is
dark.
ON Lights up at all times.
Displaying the Item
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Check if the recording mode is A.
2
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
3
Tap “MENU” in the shortcut menu.
.
MENU
4
Tap “LIGHT”.
.
LIGHT
VIDEO
Menu Settings
171
GAIN UP
Makes the subject appear bright automatically when recording in dark
places.
Setting Details
OFF Deactivates the function.
ON Electrically brightens the scene when it is dark.
AUTO SLOW-
SHUTTER
Slows down the shutter speed to brighten the
scene when it is dark.
Memo :
0
Although “AUTO SLOW-SHUTTER” brightens the scene more than “ON”
, movements of the subject may become unnatural.
Displaying the Item
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Check if the recording mode is A.
2
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
3
Tap “MENU” in the shortcut menu.
.
MENU
4
Tap “GAIN UP”.
.
VIDEO
GAIN UP
WIND CUT
Reduces the noise caused by wind.
Setting Details
OFF Deactivates the function.
ON Activates the function.
Displaying the Item
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Check if the recording mode is A.
2
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
3
Tap “MENU” in the shortcut menu.
.
MENU
4
Tap “WIND CUT”.
.
WIND CUT
VIDEO
Menu Settings
172
ANIMATION EFFECT
Records videos with animation effects.
Operating Details
“Recording with Animation Effects” (A p. 88)
DECORATE FACE EFFECT
Detects faces and enables decorations such as sunglasses to be added.
Operating Details
“Recording with Face Decorations” (A p. 90)
STAMP
Records videos with various decorative stamps.
Operating Details
“Recording with Decorative Stamps” (A p. 90)
HANDWRITING EFFECT
Records videos with your personal handwriting or drawing.
If the writings and drawings appear to be misaligned, correct the touch
position.
Operating Details
“Recording with Personal Handwriting” (A p. 91)
HIGH SPEED RECORDING
You can record videos in slow-motion by increasing the recording speed to
emphasize the movements, and play back the slow-motion video smoothly.
This is a handy function for checking movements, such as golf swings.
Operating Details
“Slow-motion (High-speed) Recording” (A p. 104)
TIME-LAPSE RECORDING
Enables the changes of a scene that occur slowly over a long period to be
shown within a short time by taking frames of it at a certain interval.
This is useful for making observations such as the opening of a flower bud.
Operating Details
“Recording at Intervals (TIME-LAPSE RECORDING)” (A p. 105)
AUTO REC
Starts recording automatically by sensing the changes in subject’s
movement (brightness) within the red frame displayed on the LCD monitor.
Operating Details
“Recording Automatically by Sensing Movements (AUTO REC)”
(A p. 107)
Wi-Fi
Sets or uses the Wi-Fi function.
Operating Details
“Wi-Fi Capabilities” (A p. 12)
DATE/TIME RECORDING
You can record videos together with the date and time.
Set this when you want to save the file with date and time display.
(The date and time cannot be deleted after recording.)
Operating Details
“Recording Videos with Date and Time” (A p. 110)
FACE SUB-WINDOW
Magnifies and displays a registered face in a sub-window.
Operating Details
“Recording while Displaying a Magnified View of a Selected Face (FACE
SUB-WINDOW)” (A p. 97)
SMILE SHOT
Automatically captures a still image upon detection of a smile.
Operating Details
“Capturing Smiles Automatically (SMILE SHOT)” (A p. 94)
SMILE%/NAME DISPLAY
Sets the items to display when faces are detected.
Operating Details
“Setting SMILE%/NAME DISPLAY” (A p. 101)
FACE REGISTRATION
Registers the faces of people who are often shot with this unit.
Operating Details
“Registering Human Face Personal Authentication Information” (A p. 99)
PET SHOT
Automatically captures a still image upon detection of the face of a pet, such
as dogs or cats.
Operating Details
“Capturing Pets Automatically (PET SHOT)” (A p. 96)
Menu Settings
173
VIDEO QUALITY
Sets the video quality.
Setting Details
UXP Enables recording in the best picture quality.
0
Applies to Blu-ray discs only. Videos taken in
high-definition quality cannot be saved to DVDs.
XP Enables recording in high picture quality.
SP Enables recording in standard quality.
EP Enables long recordings.
SSW Enables recording in the best picture quality.
SEW Enables recording in the best picture quality.
Memo :
0
Set to “UXP” or “XP” mode when recording fast-moving scenes or scenes
with extreme changes of brightness to avoid noise.
0
Use an BD writer (external Blu-ray drive) to save videos recorded in “UXP”
mode.
0
You can change to the desired “VIDEO QUALITY” by tapping on it from
the remaining recording time display.
Displaying the Item
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Check if the recording mode is A.
2
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
3
Tap “MENU” in the shortcut menu.
.
MENU
4
Tap “VIDEO QUALITY”.
.
VIDEO QUALITY
VIDEO
ZOOM
Sets the maximum zoom ratio.
Setting Details
40x Enables recording with 1 - 40x optical zoom. Set
this when digital zoom is not desired.
80x/DIGITAL Enables recording with 1 - 40x optical zoom and 41
- 80x digital zoom.
200x/DIGITAL Enables recording with 1 - 40x optical zoom and 41
- 200x digital zoom.
Memo :
0
When digital zoom is used, the image becomes grainy as it is digitally
enlarged.
0
The angle of view changes when the image stabilizer is turned on or off.
Displaying the Item
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Check if the recording mode is A.
2
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
3
Tap “MENU” in the shortcut menu.
.
MENU
4
Tap “ZOOM”.
.
ZOOM
VIDEO
Menu Settings
174
SEAMLESS RECORDING (GZ-EX250)
Continues recording on the SD card without stopping when the remaining
space on the built-in memory runs out.
Setting Details
OFF Does not switch recording media automatically.
ON Switches recording media automatically.
Memo :
0
Seamless recording cannot be performed if there is not enough free space
in the SD card.
0
q appears if seamless recording cannot be performed.
0
To start seamless recording again after the previous session is complete,
it is necessary to combine seamless videos, or delete the combination
information of the seamless videos.
“Combining Videos Recorded by Seamless Recording (GZ-EX250)”
(A p. 125)
Displaying the Item
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Check if the recording mode is A.
2
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
3
Tap “MENU” in the shortcut menu.
.
MENU
4
Tap “SEAMLESS RECORDING”.
.
SEAMLESS RECORDING
VIDEO
ZOOM MIC
Sets the zoom microphone.
Setting Details
OFF Deactivates the zoom microphone.
ON Records audio sounds in the same direction as the
zoom operation.
Displaying the Item
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Check if the recording mode is A.
2
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
The shortcut menu appears.
3
Tap “MENU” in the shortcut menu.
.
MENU
4
Tap “ZOOM MIC”.
.
ZOOM MIC
VIDEO
Menu Settings
175
Recording Menu (Still Image)
You can adjust various settings, such as brightness and white balance, to suit the subject or purpose. You can also change settings such as picture quality
and gain.
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Check if the recording mode is B.
2
Tap “MENU”.
.
MENU
MENU
PLAY
0
The shortcut menu appears.
3
Tap “MENU” in the shortcut menu.
.
MENU
Setting Details
SCENE SELECT Settings to suit the shooting condition can be selected.
“Shooting According to Scene (Subject)” (A p. 81)
*Displayed only in the manual recording mode.
FOCUS Focus can be adjusted manually.
“Adjusting Focus Manually” (A p. 83)
*Displayed only in the manual recording mode.
BRIGHTNESS ADJUST Adjusts the overall brightness of the screen.
“Adjusting Brightness” (A p. 84)
*Displayed only in the manual recording mode.
WHITE BALANCE Adjusts the color according to the light source.
“Setting White Balance” (A p. 85)
*Displayed only in the manual recording mode.
BACKLIGHT COMP. Corrects the image when the subject appears dark due to backlight.
“Setting Backlight Compensation” (A p. 86)
*Displayed only in the manual recording mode.
Menu Settings
176
Setting Details
TELE MACRO Enables close-up shots when using the telephoto (T) end of the zoom.
“Taking Close-up Shots” (A p. 87)
*Displayed only in the manual recording mode.
TOUCH PRIORITY AE/AF Automatically adjusts focus and brightness based on the subjects’ faces or selected area.
“Capturing Subjects Clearly (TOUCH PRIORITY AE/AF)” (A p. 93)
LIGHT
(GZ-EX215)
Turns on/off the light.
“LIGHT (GZ-EX215)” (A p. 178)
SELF-TIMER Use this when taking a group photo.
“Taking Group Shots (Self-timer)” (A p. 108)
GAIN UP Makes the subject appear bright automatically when recording in dark places.
“ GAIN UP ” (A p. 179)
AUTO REC Enables the unit to record still images automatically by sensing the changes in brightness within the red
frame displayed on the LCD monitor.
“Recording Automatically by Sensing Movements (AUTO REC)” (A p. 107)
SHUTTER MODE Continuous shooting settings can be adjusted.
“ SHUTTER MODE ” (A p. 180)
SMILE SHOT Automatically captures a still image upon detection of a smile.
“Capturing Smiles Automatically (SMILE SHOT)” (A p. 94)
SMILE%/NAME DISPLAY Sets the items to display when faces are detected.
“Setting SMILE%/NAME DISPLAY” (A p. 101)
FACE REGISTRATION Registers the faces of people who are often shot with this unit.
“Registering Human Face Personal Authentication Information” (A p. 99)
PET SHOT Automatically captures a still image upon detection of the face of a pet, such as dogs or cats.
“Capturing Pets Automatically (PET SHOT)” (A p. 96)
IMAGE SIZE Sets the image size (number of pixels) for still images.
“ IMAGE SIZE ” (A p. 181)
Menu Settings
177
SCENE SELECT
Settings to suit the shooting condition can be selected.
Operating Details
“Shooting According to Scene (Subject)” (A p. 81)
FOCUS
Focus can be adjusted manually.
Operating Details
“Adjusting Focus Manually” (A p. 83)
BRIGHTNESS ADJUST
Adjusts the overall brightness of the screen.
Operating Details
“Adjusting Brightness” (A p. 84)
WHITE BALANCE
Adjusts the color according to the light source.
Operating Details
“Setting White Balance” (A p. 85)
BACKLIGHT COMP.
Corrects the image when the subject appears dark due to backlight.
Operating Details
“Setting Backlight Compensation” (A p. 86)
TELE MACRO
Enables close-up shots when using the telephoto (T) end of the zoom.
Operating Details
“Taking Close-up Shots” (A p. 87)
TOUCH PRIORITY AE/AF
Automatically adjusts focus and brightness based on the subjects’ faces or
selected area.
Operating Details
“Capturing Subjects Clearly (TOUCH PRIORITY AE/AF)” (A p. 93)
LIGHT (GZ-EX215)
Turns on/off the light.
Setting Details
OFF Does not light up.
AUTO Lights up automatically when the surrounding is dark.
ON Lights up at all times.
Displaying the Item
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Check if the recording mode is B.
2
Tap “MENU”.
.
MENU
MENU
PLAY
0
The shortcut menu appears.
3
Tap “MENU” in the shortcut menu.
.
MENU
4
Tap “LIGHT”.
.
LIGHT
IMAGE
Menu Settings
178
SELF-TIMER
Use this when taking a group photo.
Operating Details
“Taking Group Shots (Self-timer)” (A p. 108)
GAIN UP
Makes the subject appear bright automatically when recording in dark
places.
Setting Details
OFF Deactivates the function.
ON Electrically brightens the scene when it is dark.
Memo :
0
Setting can be adjusted separately for videos.
“GAIN UP (Video)” (A p. 172)
Displaying the Item
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Check if the recording mode is B.
2
Tap “MENU”.
.
MENU
MENU
PLAY
0
The shortcut menu appears.
3
Tap “MENU” in the shortcut menu.
.
MENU
4
Tap “GAIN UP”.
.
GAIN UP
IMAGE
AUTO REC
Starts recording automatically by sensing the changes in subject’s
movement (brightness) within the red frame displayed on the LCD monitor.
Operating Details
“Recording Automatically by Sensing Movements (AUTO REC)”
(A p. 107)
Menu Settings
179
SHUTTER MODE
Continuous shooting settings can be adjusted.
Setting Details
RECORD ONE
SHOT
Records one still image.
CONTINUOUS
SHOOTING
Records still images continuously while the
SNAPSHOT button is pressed.
Memo :
0
The continuous shooting speed can be changed.
0
Some SD cards may not support continuous shooting.
0
The continuous shooting speed will drop if this function is used repeatedly.
Displaying the Item
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Check if the recording mode is B.
2
Tap “MENU”.
.
MENU
MENU
PLAY
0
The shortcut menu appears.
3
Tap “MENU” in the shortcut menu.
.
MENU
4
Tap “SHUTTER MODE”.
.
SHUTTER MODE
IMAGE
SMILE SHOT
Automatically captures a still image upon detection of a smile.
Operating Details
“Capturing Smiles Automatically (SMILE SHOT)” (A p. 94)
SMILE%/NAME DISPLAY
Sets the items to display when faces are detected.
Operating Details
“Setting SMILE%/NAME DISPLAY” (A p. 101)
FACE REGISTRATION
Registers the faces of people who are often shot with this unit.
Operating Details
“Registering Human Face Personal Authentication Information” (A p. 99)
PET SHOT
Automatically captures a still image upon detection of the face of a pet, such
as dogs or cats.
Operating Details
“Capturing Pets Automatically (PET SHOT)” (A p. 96)
Menu Settings
180
IMAGE SIZE
Sets the image size (number of pixels) for still images.
Setting Details
1920X1080(2M) Takes still images with aspect ratio 16:9.
0
The sides of still images recorded in 16:9 aspect
ratio may be cut off when printed.
1440X1080(1.5M)
640X480(0.3M)
Takes still images with aspect ratio 4:3.
Displaying the Item
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Check if the recording mode is B.
2
Tap “MENU”.
.
MENU
MENU
PLAY
0
The shortcut menu appears.
3
Tap “MENU” in the shortcut menu.
.
MENU
4
Tap “IMAGE SIZE”.
.
IMAGE SIZE
IMAGE
Menu Settings
181
Playback Menu (Video)
You can delete or look for specific videos.
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Check if the recording mode is A.
2
Tap “<<PLAY” to select the playback mode.
.
PLAY
REC
MENU
0
The mode changes between recording and playback with every tap.
3
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
MENU
Setting Details
SEARCH DATE You can search and play videos or still images according to recording dates.
“Searching for a Specific Video/Still Image by Date” (A p. 118)
DISPLAY DATE/TIME Displays the recording date and time during video playback.
“ DISPLAY DATE/TIME ” (A p. 184)
DIGEST PLAYBACK Plays back a digest of the recorded videos.
“Checking the Content of Videos Quickly (Digest Playback)” (A p. 115)
PLAYBACK PLAYLIST Plays back the playlists that you have created.
“Playing Back Playlists” (A p. 121)
EDIT PLAYLIST Creates or edits a playlist.
“Creating Playlists with Selected Files” (A p. 129)
“Creating Playlists by Date” (A p. 130)
“Editing Playlists” (A p. 131)
PROTECT/CANCEL Protects files from being deleted accidently.
“Protecting/Releasing Protection of the Currently Displayed File” (A p. 123)
“Protecting/Releasing Protection of Selected Files” (A p. 124)
COPY
(GZ-EX250)
Copies files from the built-in memory to the SD card.
“Copying Files to an SD Card (GZ-EX250)” (A p. 155)
MOVE
(GZ-EX250)
Moves files from the built-in memory to the SD card.
“Moving Files to an SD Card (GZ-EX250)” (A p. 156)
TRIMMING Select the required part of a video and save it as a new video file.
“Capturing a Required Part in the Video (TRIMMING)” (A p. 126)
UPLOAD SETTINGS Capture and copy a part of a recorded video (maximum 15 minutes) for uploading to YouTube.
“ UPLOAD SETTINGS ” (A p. 184)
PLAYBACK OTHER FILE Plays videos with defective management information.
“Playing a Video with Defective Management Information” (A p. 116)
Menu Settings
182
SEAMLESS REC CTRL
(GZ-EX250)
Videos that are recorded on two separate media and with “SEAMLESS RECORDING” in the video recording
menu enabled can be combined into a single video.
“Combining Videos Recorded by Seamless Recording (GZ-EX250)” (A p. 125)
K2 TECHNOLOGY Reproduces small or high-pitched sounds that cannot be recorded during recording, and plays back with a
sound quality close to the original.
“ K2 TECHNOLOGY ” (A p. 185)
SEARCH DATE
Narrows down the video index screen according to recording dates.
Operating Details
“Searching for a Specific Video/Still Image by Date” (A p. 118)
Menu Settings
183
DISPLAY DATE/TIME
Sets whether to display the recording date and time during video playback.
Setting Details
OFF Does not display the date and time during
playback.
ON Displays the date and time during playback.
Displaying the Item
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Check if the recording mode is A.
2
Tap “<<PLAY” to select the playback mode.
.
PLAY
REC
MENU
3
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
MENU
4
Tap “DISPLAY DATE/TIME”.
.
DISPLAY DATE/TIME
VIDEO
DIGEST PLAYBACK
Plays back a digest of the recorded videos.
Operating Details
“Checking the Content of Videos Quickly (Digest Playback)” (A p. 115)
PLAYBACK PLAYLIST
Plays back the playlists that you have created.
Operating Details
“Playing Back Playlists” (A p. 121)
EDIT PLAYLIST
A list in which your favorite videos are arranged is called a playlist.
By creating a playlist, you can play back only your favorite videos in the order
you like.
The original video file remains even when it is registered to a playlist.
Operating Details
“Creating Playlists with Selected Files” (A p. 129)
“Creating Playlists by Date” (A p. 130)
“Editing Playlists” (A p. 131)
PROTECT/CANCEL
Protects files from being deleted accidently.
Operating Details
“Protecting/Releasing Protection of the Currently Displayed File”
(A p. 123)
“Protecting/Releasing Protection of Selected Files” (A p. 124)
COPY (GZ-EX250)
Copies files from the built-in memory to the SD card.
Operating Details
“Copying Files to an SD Card (GZ-EX250)” (A p. 155)
MOVE (GZ-EX250)
Moves files from the built-in memory to the SD card.
Operating Details
“Moving Files to an SD Card (GZ-EX250)” (A p. 156)
TRIMMING
Select the required part of a video and save it as a new video file.
Operating Details
“Capturing a Required Part in the Video (TRIMMING)” (A p. 126)
UPLOAD SETTINGS
Capture and copy a part of a recorded video (maximum 15 minutes) for
uploading to YouTube.
Operating Details
“Capturing Videos for Uploading to YouTube” (A p. 127)
PLAYBACK OTHER FILE
Plays videos with defective management information.
Operating Details
“Playing a Video with Defective Management Information” (A p. 116)
SEAMLESS REC CTRL (GZ-EX250)
Videos that are recorded on two separate media and with “SEAMLESS
RECORDING” in the video recording menu enabled can be combined into
a single video.
Operating Details
“Combining Videos Recorded by Seamless Recording (GZ-EX250)”
(A p. 125)
Menu Settings
184
K2 TECHNOLOGY
Reproduces small or high-pitched sounds that cannot be recorded during
recording, and plays back with a sound quality close to the original.
Setting Details
OFF Deactivates K2 TECHNOLOGY.
ON Activates K2 TECHNOLOGY.
Displaying the Item
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Check if the recording mode is A.
2
Tap “<<PLAY” to select the playback mode.
.
PLAY
REC
MENU
3
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
MENU
4
Tap “K2 TECHNOLOGY”.
.
K2 TECHNOLOGY
VIDEO
Menu Settings
185
Playback Menu (Still Image)
You can delete or look for specific still images.
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Check if the recording mode is B.
2
Tap “<<PLAY” to select the playback mode.
.
MENU
MENU
PLAY
0
The mode changes between recording and playback with every tap.
3
Tap “MENU”.
.
MENU
REC
Setting Details
SEARCH DATE You can search and play videos or still images according to recording dates.
“Searching for a Specific Video/Still Image by Date” (A p. 118)
SLIDE SHOW EFFECTS Sets the transition effects in slideshow playback.
“ SLIDE SHOW EFFECTS ” (A p. 187)
PROTECT/CANCEL Protects files from being deleted accidently.
“Protecting/Releasing Protection of the Currently Displayed File” (A p. 123)
“Protecting/Releasing Protection of Selected Files” (A p. 124)
COPY
(GZ-EX250)
Copies files from the built-in memory to the SD card.
“Copying Files to an SD Card (GZ-EX250)” (A p. 155)
MOVE
(GZ-EX250)
Moves files from the built-in memory to the SD card.
“Moving Files to an SD Card (GZ-EX250)” (A p. 156)
SEARCH DATE
Narrows down the still image index screen according to recording dates.
Operating Details
“Searching for a Specific Video/Still Image by Date” (A p. 118)
Menu Settings
186
SLIDE SHOW EFFECTS
Sets the transition effects in slideshow playback.
Setting Details
SLIDE Switches the screen by sliding in from right to left.
BLINDS Switches the screen by dividing into vertical strips.
CHECKERBOARD Switches the screen by changing through a
checkered pattern.
RANDOM Switches the screen with a random effect from
SLIDE, “BLINDS”, and “CHECKERBOARD”.
Memo :
0
Slideshow effects are not available when playing back still images in
external devices (such as USB external hard disk drives).
Displaying the Item
1
Open the LCD monitor.
.
0
Check if the recording mode is B.
2
Tap “<<PLAY” to select the playback mode.
.
MENU
MENU
PLAY
3
Tap “MENU”.
.
MENU
REC
4
Tap “SLIDE SHOW EFFECTS”.
.
SLIDE SHOW EFFECTS
IMAGE
PROTECT/CANCEL
Protects files from being deleted accidently.
Operating Details
“Protecting/Releasing Protection of the Currently Displayed File”
(A p. 123)
“Protecting/Releasing Protection of Selected Files” (A p. 124)
COPY (GZ-EX250)
Copies files from the built-in memory to the SD card.
Operating Details
“Copying Files to an SD Card (GZ-EX250)” (A p. 155)
MOVE (GZ-EX250)
Moves files from the built-in memory to the SD card.
Operating Details
“Moving Files to an SD Card (GZ-EX250)” (A p. 156)
Menu Settings
187
Common Menu
1
Tap “MENU”.
.
PLAY
REC
MENU
0
When entering from the recording mode, tap “MENU” again as the shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “
Q
”.
.
Setting Details
CLOCK ADJUST Resets the current time or sets to the local time when using this unit overseas.
“Clock Setting” (A p. 68)
“Setting the Clock to Local Time when Traveling” (A p. 72)
“Setting Daylight Saving Time” (A p. 72)
DATE DISPLAY STYLE Sets the order of year, month, day and the time display format (24H/12H).
“ DATE DISPLAY STYLE ” (A p. 190)
LANGUAGE The language on the display can be changed.
“Changing the Display Language” (A p. 70)
MONITOR BRIGHTNESS Sets the brightness of the LCD monitor.
“ MONITOR BRIGHTNESS ” (A p. 190)
REC MEDIA FOR VIDEO
(GZ-EX250)
Sets the recording/playback media of videos.
“REC MEDIA FOR VIDEO (GZ-EX250)” (A p. 191)
REC MEDIA FOR IMAGE
(GZ-EX250)
Sets the recording/playback media of still images.
“REC MEDIA FOR IMAGE (GZ-EX250)” (A p. 191)
OPERATION SOUND Turns on or off the operation sound.
“ OPERATION SOUND ” (A p. 192)
SILENT MODE Sets to the Silent mode in which operation sounds are turned off and the brightness of the screen is reduced.
“ SILENT MODE ” (A p. 192)
AUTO POWER OFF Prevents the situation of forgetting to turn off the power when this is set.
“ AUTO POWER OFF ” (A p. 193)
QUICK RESTART Reduces the power consumption within 5 minutes after the LCD monitor is closed to 1/3 of that used during
recording.
“ QUICK RESTART ” (A p. 193)
DEMO MODE Introduces the special features of this unit in digest form.
“ DEMO MODE ” (A p. 194)
Menu Settings
188
Setting Details
TOUCH SCREEN ADJUST Adjusts the response position of the buttons on the touch screen.
“ TOUCH SCREEN ADJUST ” (A p. 194)
DISPLAY ON TV Displays icons and date/time on a TV screen.
“ DISPLAY ON TV ” (A p. 195)
VIDEO OUTPUT Sets the aspect ratio (16:9 or 4:3) according to the connecting TV.
“ VIDEO OUTPUT ” (A p. 196)
HDMI OUTPUT Sets the definition of the video output from the HDMI mini connector.
“ HDMI OUTPUT ” (A p. 196)
HDMI CONTROL Sets the linked operations ON/OFF when the TV and this unit are connected using the HDMI mini connector.
“ HDMI CONTROL ” (A p. 197)
FACTORY PRESET Returns all the settings to their default values.
“ FACTORY PRESET ” (A p. 197)
UPDATE Updates the functions of this unit to the latest version.
“ UPDATE ” (A p. 197)
FORMAT BUILT-IN MEM.
(GZ-EX250)
Deletes all files on the built-in memory.
“FORMAT BUILT-IN MEM. (GZ-EX250)” (A p. 198)
FORMAT SD CARD Deletes all files on the SD card.
“ FORMAT SD CARD ” (A p. 198)
ERASE ALL DATA
(GZ-EX250)
Execute this process when disposing of this unit or passing it to another person.
“ERASE ALL DATA (GZ-EX250)” (A p. 199)
OPEN SOURCE LICENSES Displays the open source software licenses that are used in this unit. (recording mode only)
“ OPEN SOURCE LICENSES ” (A p. 199)
MOBILE USER GUIDE Displays the QR code to access the Mobile User Guide.
“ MOBILE USER GUIDE ” (A p. 199)
Menu Settings
189
CLOCK ADJUST
Resets the current time or sets to the local time when using this unit overseas.
Operating Details
“Clock Setting” (A p. 68)
“Setting the Clock to Local Time when Traveling” (A p. 72)
“Setting Daylight Saving Time” (A p. 72)
DATE DISPLAY STYLE
Sets the order of year, month, day and the time display format (24H/12H).
1
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
When entering from the recording mode, tap “MENU” again as the
shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Q”.
.
3
Tap “DATE DISPLAY STYLE”.
.
DATE DISPLAY STYLE
COMMON
4
Tap to set the style of date and time display.
.
SET
12h
TIME
year.month.day
DATE DISPLAY STYLE
0
For date display, set to any format from “month.day.year”,
“year.month.day”, and “day.month.year”.
0
For time display, set to any format from “12h” and “24h”.
0
Tap 3 or 2 to change the display style.
0
After setting, tap “SET”.
LANGUAGE
The language on the display can be changed.
Operating Details
“Changing the Display Language” (A p. 70)
MONITOR BRIGHTNESS
Sets the brightness of the LCD monitor.
Setting Details
AUTO Sets the brightness automatically to “4” when using
outdoors and to “3” when using indoors.
4 Brightens the backlight of the monitor regardless
of the surrounding conditions.
3 Sets to the standard brightness.
2 Darkens the backlight of the monitor regardless of
the surrounding conditions.
1 Sets to dim brightness.
Helps to save battery life when selected.
Adjusting Monitor Brightness
1
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
When entering from the recording mode, tap “MENU” again as the
shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Q”.
.
3
Tap “MONITOR BRIGHTNESS”.
.
MONITOR BRIGHTNESS
COMMON
4
Tap the desired monitor brightness.
.
4
3
2
AUTO
MONITOR BRIGHTNESS
0
Tap 3 or 2 to move upward or downward for more selection.
Menu Settings
190
REC MEDIA FOR VIDEO (GZ-EX250)
Sets the recording/playback media of videos.
Setting Details
BUILT-IN
MEMORY
Records videos to this unit's built-in memory.
SD CARD Records videos to the SD card.
Displaying the Item
1
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
When entering from the recording mode, tap “MENU” again as the
shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Q”.
.
3
Tap “REC MEDIA FOR VIDEO”.
.
REC MEDIA FOR VIDEO
COMMON
REC MEDIA FOR IMAGE (GZ-EX250)
Sets the recording/playback media of still images.
Setting Details
BUILT-IN
MEMORY
Records still images to this unit’s built-in memory.
SD CARD Records still images to the SD card.
Displaying the Item
1
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
When entering from the recording mode, tap “MENU” again as the
shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Q”.
.
3
Tap “REC MEDIA FOR IMAGE”.
.
REC MEDIA FOR IMAGE
COMMON
Menu Settings
191
OPERATION SOUND
Turns on or off the operation sound.
Setting Details
OFF Turns off the operation sound.
ON Turns on the operation sound.
Displaying the Item
1
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
When entering from the recording mode, tap “MENU” again as the
shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Q”.
.
3
Tap “OPERATION SOUND”.
.
OPERATION SOUND
COMMON
SILENT MODE
When the Silent mode is used, the LCD monitor darkens and operation
sounds will not be output. Use this mode to record quietly in dark places such
as during a performance.
Setting Details
OFF Turns off the Silent mode.
ON Turns on the Silent mode.
Displaying the Item
1
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
When entering from the recording mode, tap “MENU” again as the
shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Q”.
.
3
Tap “SILENT MODE”.
.
SILENT MODE
COMMON
Memo :
0
T appears when “SILENT MODE” is set to “ON”.
0
You can also turn on the Silent mode using the SILENT button on this unit.
“Taking Videos in Auto Mode” (A p. 76)
0
It may be difficult to see the screen in Silent mode as the LCD monitor
darkens. Set “SILENT MODE” to “OFF” for normal recordings.
0
Brightness of the screen remains the same as usual in the playback mode.
However, operation and playback sounds will not be output.
0
When connected to external devices such as a computer or BD writer via
USB, “SILENT MODE” will be turned off temporarily.
Menu Settings
192
AUTO POWER OFF
Prevents the situation of forgetting to turn off the power when this is set.
Setting Details
OFF Power is not turned off even if this unit is not
operated for 5 minutes.
ON Turns off the power automatically if this unit is not
operated for 5 minutes.
Memo :
0
When using battery, power is turned off automatically if this unit is not
operated for 5 minutes.
0
When using the AC adapter, this unit goes into standby mode.
Displaying the Item
1
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
When entering from the recording mode, tap “MENU” again as the
shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Q”.
.
3
Tap “AUTO POWER OFF”.
.
AUTO POWER OFF
COMMON
QUICK RESTART
Enables the power to turn on quickly when the LCD monitor is opened again
within 5 minutes.
Setting Details
OFF Deactivates the function.
ON Enables the power to turn on quickly when the LCD
monitor is opened again within 5 minutes.
Memo :
0
The power consumption within 5 minutes after the LCD monitor is closed
is reduced.
Displaying the Item
1
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
When entering from the recording mode, tap “MENU” again as the
shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Q”.
.
3
Tap “QUICK RESTART”.
.
QUICK RESTART
COMMON
0
The power consumption within 5 minutes after the LCD monitor is
closed is reduced.
Menu Settings
193
DEMO MODE
Plays a demonstration of the special features of this unit.
Setting Details
OFF Deactivates the function.
ON Plays a demonstration of the special features of
this unit.
Displaying Demo Mode
A Remove the battery pack and SD card.
B Connect the AC adapter.
C Open the LCD monitor and turn on the power.
0
Demonstration starts playing after 3 minutes.
0
To stop playback, tap on the screen.
Memo :
0
This mode is not available in the playback mode.
0
“SMILE%/NAME DISPLAY” is set to “ON” when the demo mode is
activated.
“Setting SMILE%/NAME DISPLAY” (A p. 101)
Displaying the Item
1
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
When entering from the recording mode, tap “MENU” again as the
shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Q”.
.
3
Tap “DEMO MODE”.
.
DEMO MODE
COMMON
TOUCH SCREEN ADJUST
Adjusts the response position of the buttons on the touch screen.
1
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
When entering from the recording mode, tap “MENU” again as the
shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Q”.
.
3
Tap “TOUCH SCREEN ADJUST”.
.
TOUCH SCREEN ADJUST
COMMON
0
The touch screen adjustment screen appears.
4
Tap “+”. (3 times in total)
.
1/3
PRESS THE + MARK
0
Keep tapping “+” as its position changes with every tap.
5
Tap “+” again to confirm the adjusted positions. (3 times in total)
.
1/3
PRESS + MARK AGAIN
CONFIRM THE ADJUSTMENT
0
Keep tapping “+” as its position changes with every tap.
0
If areas on the adjustment screen other than the “+” mark are tapped,
errors will occur. In this case, try again from step 4.
6
Tap “OK”.
Menu Settings
194
.
OK
COMPLETED
0
Setting ends and returns to the menu screen.
Caution :
0
Do not tap areas other than the “+” mark during touch screen adjustment
(steps 4 - 5). Doing so may cause the touch screen to malfunction.
Memo :
0
Adjust by lightly tapping with the stylus pen.
0
Do not press with an object with a sharp tip or do not press hard.
DISPLAY ON TV
Displays icons and date/time on a TV screen.
Setting Details
OFF Does not display icons and date/time on TV.
ON Displays icons and date/time on TV.
Displaying the Item
1
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
When entering from the recording mode, tap “MENU” again as the
shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Q”.
.
3
Tap “DISPLAY ON TV”.
.
DISPLAY ON TV
COMMON
Menu Settings
195
VIDEO OUTPUT
Sets the aspect ratio (16:9 or 4:3) according to the connecting TV.
Setting Details
4:3 Select this when connecting to a conventional TV
(4:3).
16:9 Select this when connecting to a widescreen TV
(16:9).
Displaying the Item
1
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
When entering from the recording mode, tap “MENU” again as the
shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Q”.
.
3
Tap “VIDEO OUTPUT”.
.
VIDEO OUTPUT
COMMON
HDMI OUTPUT
Sets the output from the HDMI connector of this unit when it is connected to
a TV.
Setting Details
AUTO It is recommended to select “AUTO” usually.
480p Select this when the video is not output in “AUTO”
correctly.
Displaying the Item
1
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
When entering from the recording mode, tap “MENU” again as the
shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Q”.
.
3
Tap “HDMI OUTPUT”.
.
HDMI OUTPUT
COMMON
Menu Settings
196
HDMI CONTROL
Sets whether to link operations with an HDMI-CEC compliant TV.
Setting Details
OFF Turns off linked operations.
ON Turns on linked operations.
Displaying the Item
1
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
When entering from the recording mode, tap “MENU” again as the
shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Q”.
.
3
Tap “HDMI CONTROL”.
.
HDMI CONTROL
COMMON
FACTORY PRESET
Returns all the settings to their default values.
1
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
When entering from the recording mode, tap “MENU” again as the
shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Q”.
.
3
Tap “FACTORY PRESET”.
.
FACTORY PRESET
COMMON
4
Tap “YES”.
.
NOYES
RESET TO THE FACTORY PRESET?
DO YOU WANT THE SETTINGS
0
All settings return to their default values.
UPDATE
Updates the functions of this unit to the latest version.
For details, refer to the JVC homepage.
(When no program to update the software of this unit is available, nothing
will be provided on the homepage.)
http://www3.jvckenwood.com/english/support/index.html
Menu Settings
197
FORMAT BUILT-IN MEM. (GZ-EX250)
Deletes all files on the built-in memory.
Setting Details
FILE Deletes all files on the built-in memory.
FILE +
MANAGEMENT
NO
Deletes all files on the built-in memory and resets
the folder and file numbers to "1".
Caution :
0
All data on the built-in memory will be deleted when it is formatted.
Copy all files on the built-in memory to a computer before formatting.
0
Make sure that the battery pack is fully charged or connect the AC adapter
as the formatting process may take some time.
Displaying the Item
1
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
When entering from the recording mode, tap “MENU” again as the
shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Q”.
.
3
Tap “FORMAT BUILT-IN MEM.”.
.
FORMAT BUILT-IN MEM.
COMMON
FORMAT SD CARD
Deletes all files on the SD card.
Setting Details
FILE Deletes all files on the SD card.
FILE +
MANAGEMENT
NO
Deletes all files on the SD card and resets the folder
and file numbers to "1".
Caution :
0
Not available for selection when no SD card is inserted.
0
All data on the SD card will be deleted when it is formatted.
Copy all files on the SD card to a computer before formatting.
0
Make sure that the battery pack is fully charged or connect the AC adapter
as the formatting process may take some time.
Displaying the Item
1
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
When entering from the recording mode, tap “MENU” again as the
shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Q”.
.
3
Tap “FORMAT SD CARD”.
.
FORMAT SD CARD
COMMON
Menu Settings
198
ERASE ALL DATA (GZ-EX250)
Execute this process when disposing of this unit or passing it to another
person.
1
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
When entering from the recording mode, tap “MENU” again as the
shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Q”.
.
3
Tap “ERASE ALL DATA”.
.
ERASE ALL DATA
COMMON
4
Tap “YES”.
.
NOYES
ALL DATA WILL BE ERASED.
MEMORY?
DELETE DATA ON THE BUILT-IN
0
After deleting is complete, tap “OK”.
Caution :
0
Connect the AC adapter when erasing all data on the built-in memory.
Erasing cannot be performed if the AC adapter is not connected.
Memo :
0
Repeat the process to make data restoration even more difficult.
OPEN SOURCE LICENSES
Displays the open source software licenses that are used in this unit.
MOBILE USER GUIDE
Displays the QR code to access the Mobile User Guide.
1
Tap “MENU”.
.
REC
PLAY
MENU
0
When entering from the recording mode, tap “MENU” again as the
shortcut menu appears.
2
Tap “Q”.
.
3
Tap “MOBILE USER GUIDE”.
.
MOBILE USER GUIDE
COMMON
4
Read the QR code (bar code) with a smartphone.
.
URL:
MOBILE USER GUIDE
0
The portal site appears when the QR code has been read correctly.
Select the model name of your camera to display its Mobile User
Guide.
Memo :
0
To read the QR code, a relevant application is required. Enter the URL in
the internet browser manually if the QR code cannot be read.
0
The Mobile User Guide is supported by Android devices and iPhone. You
can view it on standard browsers such as Google Chrome (Android) and
Mobile Safari (iPhone).
0
QR Code is a registered trademark of Denso Wave Incorporated.
Menu Settings
199
Front
.
3
1
2
4
5
1
SNAPSHOT (Still Image Recording) Button
0
Takes a still image.
2
Zoom/Volume Lever
0
During shooting: Adjusts the shooting range.
0
During playback (index screen): Moves to the next or previous page.
0
During video playback: Adjusts the volume.
3
Lens Cover
0
Do not touch the lens and lens cover.
0
Do not cover the lens with your fingers during recording.
4
Light (GZ-EX215)
0
Turn on the light when shooting in dark places.
“LIGHT (GZ-EX215)” (A p. 171)
5
Stereo Microphone
0
Do not cover the microphone with your fingers during video recording.
Rear
.
3
1
2
4
5
7
6
1
DC Connector
0
Connects to an AC adapter to charge the battery.
2
ACCESS (Access) Lamp
0
Lights up/blinks during recording or playback.
Do not remove the battery pack, AC adapter, or SD card.
3
POWER/CHARGE (Power/Charge) Lamp
0
Lights up: Power "ON"
0
Blinks: Charging in progress
0
Goes out: Charging finished
4
START/STOP (Video Recording) Button
0
Starts/stops video recording.
5
Strap Lock
6
Grip Belt
0
Pass your hand through the grip belt to hold this unit firmly.
“Grip Adjustment” (A p. 64)
7
Lens Cover Switch
0
Opens and closes the lens cover.
Names of Parts
200
Bottom
.
1
Tripod Mounting Hole
“Tripod Mounting” (A p. 70)
2
SD Card Slot
0
Insert an optional SD card.
“Inserting an SD Card” (A p. 64)
3
Battery Release Lever
“Charging the Battery Pack” (A p. 63)
4
Battery Mount
Interior
.
1
Speaker
0
Outputs audio sound during video playback.
2
A / B (Video/Still Image) Button
0
Switches between video and still image modes.
3
SILENT Button
0
Press and hold the SILENT button to turn on the Silent mode. To turn
it off, press and hold the button again.
“Using the Silent Mode” (A p. 76)
4
a Button
0
The setting of image stabilizer changes with every press during video
recording.
“Reducing Camera Shake” (A p. 104)
5
INFO (Information) Button
0
Recording: Displays the remaining time (for video only) and battery
power.
0
Playback: Displays file information such as recording date.
6
AV Connector
0
Connects to the AV connector of a TV, etc.
7
M (Power) Button
0
Press and hold to turn the power on/off while the LCD monitor is
opened.
8
HDMI Mini Connector
0
Connects to TV using an HDMI mini cable.
9
USB Connector
0
Connects to computer using a USB cable.
Names of Parts
201
LCD Monitor
.
1
LCD Monitor
0
Turns the power on/off by opening and closing.
0
Enables self-portraits to be taken by rotating the monitor.
.
“Using the Touch Screen” (A p. 66)
“Names of Buttons and Functions on the LCD Monitor” (A p. 67)
Caution :
0
Do not press against the surface with force or subject it to strong impact.
Doing so may damage or break the screen.
Names of Parts
202
Common Recording Indications
.
10X
10X
10:45
2576 90a8
e
d
43
1
f
g
b
c
1
TOUCH PRIORITY AE/AF
“Capturing Subjects Clearly (TOUCH PRIORITY AE/AF)” (A p. 93)
2
Backlight Compensation
“Setting Backlight Compensation” (A p. 86)
3
Auto REC
“Recording Automatically by Sensing Movements (AUTO REC)”
(A p. 107)
4
Tele Macro
“Taking Close-up Shots” (A p. 87)
5
Scene Select
“Shooting According to Scene (Subject)” (A p. 81)
6
White Balance
“Setting White Balance” (A p. 85)
7
Time
“Clock Setting” (A p. 68)
8
Smile Shot
“Capturing Smiles Automatically (SMILE SHOT)” (A p. 94)
9
Media (GZ-EX250)
“REC MEDIA FOR VIDEO (GZ-EX250)” (A p. 191)
“REC MEDIA FOR IMAGE (GZ-EX250)” (A p. 191)
10
Battery Indicator
“Checking the Remaining Recording Time” (A p. 111)
11
Continuous Shooting
“SHUTTER MODE (Still Image)” (A p. 180)
12
Recording Mode
“Taking Videos in Auto Mode” (A p. 74)
“Manual Recording” (A p. 80)
13
Light (GZ-EX215)
“LIGHT (GZ-EX215)” (A p. 171)
14
SILENT MODE
“ SILENT MODE ” (A p. 192)
15
Zoom
“ ZOOM ” (A p. 174)
16
Focus
“Adjusting Focus Manually” (A p. 83)
17
Brightness
“Adjusting Brightness” (A p. 84)
Video Recording
.
0:00:12:34
0:12:34[010:00]
1 23 45
6
8
9
7
1
Video Mode
A / B (Video/Still Image) Button” (A p. 201)
2
Video Quality
“ VIDEO QUALITY ” (A p. 174)
3
TIME-LAPSE RECORDING(1SEC)
“Recording at Intervals (TIME-LAPSE RECORDING)” (A p. 105)
4
Image Stabilizer
“Reducing Camera Shake” (A p. 104)
5
Seamless Recording (GZ-EX250)
“SEAMLESS RECORDING (GZ-EX250)” (A p. 175)
6
Wind Cut
“ WIND CUT ” (A p. 172)
7
Time-Lapse Recording Counter
“Recording at Intervals (TIME-LAPSE RECORDING)” (A p. 105)
8
Remaining Recording Time
“Checking the Remaining Recording Time” (A p. 111)
9
Scene Counter
Indications on the LCD monitor
203
Still Image Recording
.
[9999]
1 2
3
4
5
6
1
Still Image Mode
A / B (Video/Still Image) Button” (A p. 201)
2
Image Size
“ IMAGE SIZE ” (A p. 181)
3
Self-Timer
“Taking Group Shots (Self-timer)” (A p. 108)
4
Remaining Number of Shots
“Checking the Remaining Recording Time” (A p. 112)
5
Focus
6
Recording in Progress
Video Playback
.
REC
00:01:23
1SEC
00:12:34
10:00
a
2134
0
5
7
b
6
8
9
1
Video Mode
A / B (Video/Still Image) Button” (A p. 201)
2
Video Quality
“ VIDEO QUALITY ” (A p. 174)
3
Operation Indicator
“Operation Buttons for Video Playback” (A p. 113)
4
Date/Time
0
Displays the recording date and time.
5
Media
“REC MEDIA FOR VIDEO (GZ-EX250)” (A p. 191)
6
Battery Indicator
“Checking the Remaining Recording Time” (A p. 111)
7
Playback Time
“Playing Back Videos” (A p. 113)
8
Time-Lapse Playback
“Time-Lapse Setting” (A p. 106)
9
External Storage Playback
“Playing Back with a DVD Writer” (A p. 140)
“Playing Back with an External Blu-ray Drive” (A p. 148)
“Playing Back Files in the USB External Hard Disk Drive” (A p. 152)
10
1080p Output
“ HDMI OUTPUT ” (A p. 196)
11
SILENT MODE
“Using the Silent Mode” (A p. 76)
12
Scene Counter
Indications on the LCD monitor
204
Still Image Playback
.
REC
10:00
100-0001
123 4 56
8
7
9
1
Still Image Mode
A / B (Video/Still Image) Button” (A p. 201)
2
Folder Number
3
File Number
4
Date/Time
0
Displays the recording date and time.
5
Media
“REC MEDIA FOR IMAGE (GZ-EX250)” (A p. 191)
6
Battery Indicator
“Checking the Remaining Recording Time” (A p. 111)
7
SILENT MODE
“Using the Silent Mode” (A p. 76)
8
External Storage Playback
“Playing Back with a DVD Writer” (A p. 140)
“Playing Back with an External Blu-ray Drive” (A p. 148)
“Playing Back Files in the USB External Hard Disk Drive” (A p. 152)
9
1080p Output
“ HDMI OUTPUT ” (A p. 196)
When the unit is not working properly
Turning Off the Power
1
Close the LCD monitor.
.
2
Remove the AC adapter and battery pack from this unit, reattach them,
open the LCD monitor and this unit powers on automatically. (Reset
complete)
Indications on the LCD monitor
205
Battery Pack
Unable to turn on the power when using the battery pack.
Recharge the battery pack.
“Charging the Battery Pack” (A p. 63)
Check whether the terminals are dirty.
If the terminal of this unit or the battery pack is dirty, wipe it with a cotton swab
or something similar.
If you use any other battery packs besides JVC battery packs, safety and
performance cannot be guaranteed. Be sure to use JVC battery packs.
Short usage time even after charging.
Battery deterioration occurs when a battery pack is charged repeatedly.
Replace the battery pack with a new one.
“Optional Accessories” (A p. 73)
Unable to charge the battery pack.
When the battery pack is fully charged, the lamp does not flash.
Check whether the terminals are dirty.
If the terminal of this unit or the battery pack is dirty, wipe it with a cotton swab
or something similar.
Using a non-original AC adapter may result in damage to this unit. Be sure
to use an original AC adapter.
The remaining battery display is not correct.
Remaining battery power is not displayed when the AC adapter is
connected.
If this unit is used for long periods of time in high or low temperatures, or if
the battery pack is repeatedly charged, the amount of remaining battery may
not be displayed correctly.
Recording
Recording cannot be performed.
Check the A / B button.
A / B (Video/Still Image) Button” (A p. 201)
When there are multiple light sources and depending on the shooting
conditions, exposure and focus may not be adjusted correctly in the
Intelligent Auto mode. In this case, adjust the settings manually.
“Adjusting Focus Manually” (A p. 83)
Recording stops automatically.
Recording stops automatically as it cannot be performed for 12 or more
consecutive hours according to specifications. (It may take some time to
resume recording.)
Turn off this unit, wait for a while, and turn it on again. (This unit stops
automatically to protect the circuit when the temperature rises.)
The continuous shooting speed of still images is slow.
The continuous shooting speed will drop if this function is used repeatedly.
Continuous shooting speed may drop depending on the SD card or under
certain recording conditions.
The focus is not adjusted automatically.
If you are recording in a dark place or a subject that has no contrast between
dark and light, adjust the focus manually.
“Adjusting Focus Manually” (A p. 83)
Wipe the lens with a lens cleaning cloth.
Cancel manual focus on the manual recording menu.
“Adjusting Focus Manually” (A p. 83)
Zoom does not work.
Digital zoom is not available in the still image recording mode.
Zoom operation is not available in time-lapse recording. (Simultaneous still
image recording and image stabilizer are also not available.)
To use digital zoom, set “ZOOM” in the menu accordingly.
“ ZOOM ” (A p. 174)
Mosaic-type noise occurs when recording scenes with fast
movements or extreme changes in brightness.
Set the “VIDEO QUALITY” to “UXP” or “XP” for recording.
“ VIDEO QUALITY ” (A p. 174)
Vertical lines appear on recorded images.
Such a phenomenon occurs when shooting a subject illuminated by bright
light. This is not a malfunction.
Troubleshooting
206
Card
Cannot insert the SD card.
Make sure not to insert the SD card in the wrong direction.
“Inserting an SD Card” (A p. 64)
Unable to copy to SD card.
Set “REC MEDIA FOR VIDEO”/“REC MEDIA FOR IMAGE” to SD card.
“REC MEDIA FOR VIDEO (GZ-EX250)” (A p. 191)
“REC MEDIA FOR IMAGE (GZ-EX250)” (A p. 191)
To use SD cards that have been used on other devices, it is necessary to
format (initialize) the SD card using “FORMAT SD CARD” from media
settings.
“ FORMAT SD CARD ” (A p. 198)
Playback
Sound or video is interrupted.
Sometimes playback is interrupted at the connecting section between two
scenes. This is not a malfunction.
There is no sound.
When the Silent mode is used, operation and playback sounds will not be
output. Turn off the Silent mode.
“Using the Silent Mode” (A p. 76)
Set “OPERATION SOUND” in the common menu to “ON”.
“ OPERATION SOUND ” (A p. 192)
Audio sound is not recorded for videos taken in TIME-LAPSE RECORDING.
“Recording at Intervals (TIME-LAPSE RECORDING)” (A p. 105)
The same image is displayed for a long time.
Use a high speed SD card (Class 4 or higher).
“Types of Usable SD Card” (A p. 65)
Clean the terminals of the SD card with a dry cotton swab or something
similar.
Execute “FORMAT SD CARD” in the “COMMON” menu. (All data will be
deleted.)
“ FORMAT SD CARD ” (A p. 198)
The motion is choppy.
Use a high speed SD card (Class 4 or higher).
“Types of Usable SD Card” (A p. 65)
Clean the terminals of the SD card with a dry cotton swab or something
similar.
Execute “FORMAT SD CARD” in the “COMMON” menu. (All data will be
deleted.)
“ FORMAT SD CARD ” (A p. 198)
Verify the system requirements of your PC when using Everio MediaBrowser
4 to play back.
“Verifying System Requirements (Guideline)” (A p. 157)
Cannot find a recorded file.
Cancel the date search function.
“Searching for a Specific Video/Still Image by Date” (A p. 118)
Change the playback media by tapping I/J on the touch screen.
“Operation Buttons for Video Playback” (A p. 113)
“Operation Buttons for Still Image Playback” (A p. 117)
Select “PLAYBACK OTHER FILE” in the menu. (Video files that have
damaged management information can be played back.)
“Playing a Video with Defective Management Information” (A p. 116)
Images do not appear on the TV properly.
Disconnect the cable and connect again.
“Connecting via the HDMI Mini Connector” (A p. 119)
Turn off and on this unit again.
Images are projected vertically on the TV.
Set “VIDEO OUTPUT” in the “COMMON” menu to “4:3”.
“ VIDEO OUTPUT ” (A p. 196)
Adjust the TV's screen accordingly.
The image displayed on TV is too small.
Set “VIDEO OUTPUT” in the “COMMON” menu to “16:9”.
“ VIDEO OUTPUT ” (A p. 196)
When connected to the TV via the HDMI mini cable, proper
images and sounds are not output.
Images and sounds may not be output properly depending on the TV
connected. In such cases, perform the following operations.
A Disconnect the HDMI mini cable and connect it again.
B Turn off and on this unit again.
“Connecting via the HDMI Mini Connector” (A p. 119)
Troubleshooting
207
Unable to play back DVD with title.
The title will not be played back if you connect this unit to a DVD writer
(optional).
Editing/Copying
Unable to delete file.
Files (videos/still images) that are protected cannot be deleted. Release
protection before deleting the file.
“Protecting Files” (A p. 123)
Unable to create DVD with a DVD writer.
The USB cable is not connected correctly.
“Preparing a DVD Writer (CU-VD50)” (A p. 134)
“Preparing a DVD Writer (CU-VD3)” (A p. 134)
BACK-UP menu does not disappear.
While the USB cable is connected, the “BACK UP” menu is displayed.
Unable to turn off the BACK-UP menu.
Turn off the power of this unit and the DVD writer, or remove the AC adapter.
Unable to delete folder in USB external hard disk drive.
Delete the folder using a computer.
(When files are added or folders moved/renamed with a computer, they
cannot be deleted on this unit.)
Troubleshooting
208
Computer
Unable to copy files to the computer’s HDD.
Connect the USB cable correctly.
If the provided software Everio MediaBrowser 4 is not installed, some
functions may not work properly.
“Installing the Provided Software” (A p. 158)
Before making backup, make sure that enough free space is left in the
computer's hard disk (HDD).
Unable to copy files to DVD or Blu-ray disc with a PC.
To record to discs, a recordable DVD or Blu-ray drive is required for the
computer in use.
Cannot upload the file to YouTube.
Check if you have created an account with YouTube. (You need a YouTube
account to upload files to YouTube.)
Changing videos to the file format for uploading cannot be performed on this
unit.
Refer to “Q&A”, “Latest Information”, “Download Information”, etc. in “Click
for Latest Product Info” in the help file of the provided software Everio
MediaBrowser 4.
I am using a Mac computer.
Copy the files to a Mac computer using the following method.
“Copying to Mac Computer” (A p. 165)
The computer cannot recognize the SDXC card.
Confirm and update the OS of your computer.
“When your computer cannot recognize the SDXC card” (A p. 65)
Screen/Image
The LCD monitor is difficult to see.
The LCD monitor may be difficult to see if used in bright areas such as under
direct sunlight.
A band or a ball of bright light appears on the LCD monitor.
Change the direction of this unit to prevent the light source from coming into
view. (A band or a ball of bright light may appear when there is a bright light
source near this unit, but this is not a malfunction.)
The recorded subject is too dark.
Use backlight compensation when the background is bright and the subject
is dark.
“Setting Backlight Compensation” (A p. 86)
Use “LIGHT” in the menu.
“LIGHT (GZ-EX215)” (A p. 171)
Use “NIGHTALIVE” in SCENE SELECT.
“Shooting According to Scene (Subject)” (A p. 81)
Use “GAIN UP” in the menu.
“ GAIN UP ” (A p. 172)
Set “BRIGHTNESS ADJUST” in the recording menu to the “+” side.
“Adjusting Brightness” (A p. 84)
The recorded subject is too bright.
Set the backlight compensation to “OFF” if it is being used.
“Setting Backlight Compensation” (A p. 86)
Set “BRIGHTNESS ADJUST” in the recording menu to the “-” side.
“Adjusting Brightness” (A p. 84)
The color looks strange. (Too bluish, too reddish, etc.)
Wait for a while until natural colors are achieved. (It may take some time for
white balance to be adjusted.)
Set “WHITE BALANCE” in the recording menu to “MANUAL”. Select from
“FINE”/“CLOUD”/“HALOGEN”/“MARINE:BLUE”/“MARINE:GREEN”
according to the light source.
Select “MWB” and adjust accordingly.
“Setting White Balance” (A p. 85)
The color looks different.
Set “WHITE BALANCE” in the recording menu accordingly.
“Setting White Balance” (A p. 85)
There are bright or dark spots on the screen.
While the LCD monitor screen has more than 99.99% effective pixels, 0.01%
of the pixels may be bright spots (red, blue, green) or dark spots. This is not
a malfunction. The spots will not be recorded.
Troubleshooting
209
Other Problems
The buttons on the touch screen do not work.
Tap the buttons on the touch screen with your fingers or the stylus pen.
The buttons may not respond if you touch them with your fingernails or with
gloves on.
The image is grainy.
When digital zoom is used, the image becomes grainy as it is digitally
enlarged.
This unit heats up.
This is not a malfunction. (This unit may become warm when used for a long
time.)
The language on the display changed.
It may occur when you connect this unit to a TV with different language setting
using an HDMI mini cable.
“Operating in Conjunction with TV via HDMI” (A p. 120)
When connected to the TV via the HDMI mini cable, proper
images and sounds are not output.
Images and sounds may not be output properly depending on the TV
connected. In such cases, perform the following operations.
A Disconnect the HDMI mini cable and connect it again.
B Turn off and on this unit again.
“Connecting via the HDMI Mini Connector” (A p. 119)
HDMI-CEC functions do not work properly, and the TV does
not work in conjunction with this unit.
TVs may operate differently depending on the specifications, even if they
are HDMI-CEC compliant. Therefore, the HDMI-CEC functions of this unit
cannot be guaranteed to operate in combination with all the TVs.
In such cases, set “HDMI CONTROL” to “OFF”.
“ HDMI CONTROL ” (A p. 197)
The unit operates slowly when switching between video mode
and still image mode, or when switching the power on or off.
It is recommended that you copy all videos and still images onto your
computer, and erase the files from this unit. (If there are many recorded files
on this unit, it takes time for the unit to respond.)
This unit does not function properly and error messages
appear.
This unit is a microcomputer-controlled device. Electrostatic discharge,
external noise and interference (from a TV, a radio, etc.) might prevent it from
functioning properly. In such a case, turn off the power, then remove the AC
adapter and battery pack. This unit will be reset.
Make a backup of important recorded data.
Make a backup of important recorded data.
- It is recommended to copy your important recorded data to a DVD or other
recording media for storage.
- JVC will not be responsible for any lost data.
Error Message?
CHECK LENS COVER
Open the lens cover.
SET DATE/TIME!
Connect the AC adapter, charge the battery for more than 24 hours and set
the clock. (If the message still appears, the clock battery is exhausted.
Consult your nearest JVC dealer.)
“Clock Setting” (A p. 68)
COMMUNICATION ERROR
Reconnect the USB cable.
Turn off this unit and the devices connected to it, and turn them on again.
Reattach the battery pack.
FORMAT ERROR! (GZ-EX250)
Check the operating procedure, and perform once again.
“FORMAT BUILT-IN MEM. (GZ-EX250)” (A p. 198)
Turn off and on this unit again.
DATA DELETION ERROR (GZ-EX250)
Check the operating procedure, and perform once again.
“ERASE ALL DATA (GZ-EX250)” (A p. 199)
Turn off and on this unit again.
ERROR IN BUILT-IN MEMORY! (GZ-EX250)
Turn off and on this unit again.
If the above does not solve the problem, back up your files and execute
“FORMAT BUILT-IN MEM.” in the “COMMON” menu. (All data will be
deleted.)
“FORMAT BUILT-IN MEM. (GZ-EX250)” (A p. 198)
MEMORY CARD ERROR!
Check that the card is supported by this unit.
“Types of Usable SD Card” (A p. 65)
Turn off and on this unit again.
Remove the AC adapter and battery pack, then remove and re-insert the SD
card.
Remove any dirt from the SD card terminals.
If the above does not solve the problem, back up your files and execute
“FORMAT SD CARD” in the “COMMON” menu. (All data will be deleted.)
“ FORMAT SD CARD ” (A p. 198)
NOT FORMATTED
Select “OK”, then select “YES” on the “DO YOU WANT TO FORMAT?”
screen.
RECORDING FAILURE
Turn off and on this unit again.
CANNOT TAKE MORE STILL IMAGES AT THIS TIME
Stop video recording before taking still images. (If the SD card is removed
and inserted during video recording, still images cannot be recorded.)
PLAYBACK FAILED
Remove and re-insert the SD card.
“Inserting an SD Card” (A p. 64)
Remove any dirt from the SD card terminals.
Insert the SD card before turning on the power.
Do not subject this unit to any strong impact or vibration.
Troubleshooting
210
VIDEO MANAGEMENT FILE IS DAMAGED, RECOVERY IS
REQUIRED TO RECORD/PLAYBACK, RECOVER?
Select “OK” to restore. (Videos that cannot be restored will not be displayed
on the index screen, but you may be able to play them back using
“PLAYBACK OTHER FILE” in the menu.)
“Playing a Video with Defective Management Information” (A p. 116)
UNSUPPORTED SCENE!
Use files recorded with this unit. (Files recorded with other devices may not
be playable.)
UNSUPPORTED FILE!
Use files recorded with this unit. (Files recorded with other devices may not
be playable.)
THIS FILE IS PROTECTED
Switch off the “PROTECT/CANCEL” function in the “EDIT” menu.
“Protecting Files” (A p. 123)
CHECK CARD'S WRITE PROTECTION SWITCH
Set the write protect switch of the SD card to off.
INSUFFICIENT AVAILABLE SPACE
Delete files, or move files to a computer or other devices.
Replace the SD card with a new one.
Seamless videos cannot be combined if there is not enough free space in
the built-in memory or SD card. Check the amount of remaining free space
before combining.
MAXIMUM QUANTITY RECORDING FOLDERS/ FILES HAS
BEEN REACHED
A Move the files or folders to a computer or other device. (Back up your
files.)
B Select “FILE + MANAGEMENT NO” in “FORMAT SD CARD” of the media
settings menu. (All data on the SD card will be deleted.)
“ FORMAT SD CARD ” (A p. 198)
SCENE QUANTITY EXCEEDED LIMIT
A Move the files or folders to a computer or other device. (Back up your
files.)
B Select “FILE + MANAGEMENT NO” in “FORMAT SD CARD” of the media
settings menu. (All data on the SD card will be deleted.)
“ FORMAT SD CARD ” (A p. 198)
NUMBER OF FOLDERS OVERFLOW
A Move the files or folders to a computer or other device. (Back up your
files.)
B Select “FILE + MANAGEMENT NO” in “FORMAT SD CARD” of the media
settings menu. (All data on the SD card will be deleted.)
“ FORMAT SD CARD ” (A p. 198)
FILE QUANTITY LIMIT EXCEEDED
A Move the files or folders to a computer or other device. (Back up your
files.)
B Select “FILE + MANAGEMENT NO” in “FORMAT SD CARD” of the media
settings menu. (All data on the SD card will be deleted.)
“ FORMAT SD CARD ” (A p. 198)
PLAYLIST QUANTITY EXCEEDS LIMIT
Reduce the number of the playlist to 99 files or less. (Up to 99 playlists can
be created.)
CANCELLED BECAUSE PLAYLIST AMOUNT EXCEEDED
MAXIMUM LIMIT
When creating a DVD, reduce the number of playlists to be saved.
Reduce the number of videos to add to the playlist to 999 files.
“Creating Playlists from the Recorded Videos” (A p. 129)
PROCESSING CANCELLED DUE TO LIMITED SPACE FOR
OPERATION
Reduce the number of videos to add to the playlist to 999 files.
“Creating Playlists from the Recorded Videos” (A p. 129)
NO REGISTERED SCENES IN PLAYLIST SOME SCENES MAY
NOT PLAY BACK
Delete the playlist, and then create a new one.
“Creating Playlists from the Recorded Videos” (A p. 129)
NO FILES
Change the setting of “REC MEDIA FOR IMAGE” or “REC MEDIA FOR
VIDEO” in the “COMMON” menu, and check that files are not recorded to
the other media.
“REC MEDIA FOR VIDEO (GZ-EX250)” (A p. 191)
“REC MEDIA FOR IMAGE (GZ-EX250)” (A p. 191)
RECORDING CANCELLED
Set “REC MEDIA FOR VIDEO” to “SD CARD”, then record to an SD card.
“REC MEDIA FOR VIDEO (GZ-EX250)” (A p. 191)
Turn off and on this unit again.
Protect the unit from vibration and shock.
CAMERA TEMPERATURE IS HIGH PLEASE TURN CAMERA
OFF TO ALLOW IT TO COOL DOWN PLEASE WAIT
Turn off the power of this unit, let and it cool down before turning on the power
again.
POWER IS OFF, OR USB DEVICE IS UNSUPPORTED
Turn on the power of the connected USB device.
Connect the AC adapter to the DVD writer or BD writer (external Blu-ray
drive).
INSERT DISC
Open the tray of the DVD writer or BD writer (external Blu-ray drive), check
and reset the DVD or Blu-ray disc, then close the tray.
Replace the disc in the DVD writer or BD writer (external Blu-ray drive).
CHANGE DISC
Open the tray of the DVD writer or BD writer (external Blu-ray drive), check
and reset the DVD or Blu-ray disc, then close the tray.
Replace the disc in the DVD writer or BD writer (external Blu-ray drive).
Troubleshooting
211
Perform regular maintenance of this unit to enable it to be used for a long
time.
Caution :
0
Be sure to detach the battery pack, AC adapter, and power plug before
performing any maintenance.
Camcorder
0
Wipe this unit with a dry, soft cloth to remove any dirt.
0
When it is extremely dirty, soak the cloth in a solution of neutral detergent,
wipe the body with it, and then use a clean cloth to remove the detergent.
Caution :
0
Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, or alcohol. Doing so may
cause damage to the unit.
0
When using a chemical cloth or cleaner, be sure to observe the warning
labels and instructions of the product.
0
Do not leave the device in contact with rubber or plastic products for a long
time.
Lens/LCD Monitor
0
Use a lens blower (commercially available) to remove any dust, and a
cleaning cloth (commercially available) to wipe off any dirt.
Mold may form if the lens is left dirty.
0
You can use a commercially available anti-reflection or protective film on
the screen.
However, depending on the thickness of the film, operations on the touch
screen may not be performed smoothly or the screen may darken slightly.
Maintenance
212
Camera
Item Details
Power supply Using AC adapter: DC 5.2 V
Using battery pack: DC 3.6 V
Power consumption 2.3 W (MONITOR BRIGHTNESS: 3 (standard))
2.5 W (MONITOR BRIGHTNESS: 4 (brighter))
When “LIGHT” is“OFF” (GZ-EX215)
Dimensions (mm) 50.5 x 55 x 116 (2-1/16” x 2-3/16” x 4-5/8”)
(W x H x D: excluding grip belt)
Mass Approx. 195 g (0.43 lbs) (camera only),
Approx. 235 g (0.52 lbs) (including supplied battery
pack)
Operating
environment
Allowable operating temperature: 0°C to 40°C
(32°F to 104°F)
Allowable storage temperature: -20°C to 50°C
(-4°F to 122°F)
Allowable relative humidity: 35 % to 80 %
Image pickup
device
1/5.8" 1,500,000 pixels (BSI CMOS)
Recording area
(Video)
630,000 to 1,050,000 pixels (AIS ON)
1,250,000 pixels (AIS OFF)
Recording area
(Still image)
930,000 pixels (4:3)
1,250,000 pixels (16:9)
Lens F1.8 - 6.3, f= 2.9 mm to 116.0 mm
Video
35 mm conversion: 45.6 mm to 1,824 mm (AIS ON)
35 mm conversion: 42.0 mm to 1,680 mm (AIS
OFF)
Still Image
35 mm conversion: 51.4 in to 2,056 in (4:3)
35 mm conversion: 42.0 mm to 1,680 mm (16:9)
Item Details
Lowest illumination 3 lux
1 lux (SCENE SELECT: NIGHTALIVE)
Zoom (during video
recording)
Optical zoom: Up to 40x
Digital zoom: Up to 200x
Zoom (during still
image recording)
Optical zoom: Up to 40x
LCD monitor 3.0", 230,000 pixels, color LCD
Recording media Built-in memory (16 GB) (GZ-EX250)
SD/SDHC/SDXC card (commercially available)
“Types of Usable SD Card” (A p. 65)
Clock battery Rechargeable battery
Specifications
213
Connectors
Item Details
HDMI output
connector
HDMI mini connector
AV output
connector
Video output: 1.0 V (p-p), 75
Audio output: 300 mV (rms), 1 K
USB connector Mini USB Type AB, USB 2.0 compliant
Video
Item Details
Recording/
Playback format
AVCHD standard
Video: AVC/H.264
Audio: Dolby Digital 2ch
Extension .MTS
Signal system NTSC standard
Image quality
(Video)
UXP
1920 x 1080 pixels
Average Approximate 24 Mbps
XP
1920 x 1080 pixels
Average Approximate 17 Mbps
SP
1920 x 1080 pixels
Average Approximate 12 Mbps
EP
1920 x 1080 pixels
Average Approximate 4.8 Mbps
SSW(16:9)
720 x 480 pixels (Interlaced)
Average Approximate 6.2 Mbps
SEW(16:9)
720 x 480 pixels (Interlaced)
Average Approximate 3 Mbps
Sound quality
(Audio)
48 kHz, 256 kbps
Still Image
Item Details
Recording format JPEG standard
Extension .JPG
Image size “Approximate Number of Still Images (Unit:
Number of Shots)” (A p. 112)
AC Adapter (AC-V11U)
Item Details
Power supply AC 110 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Output DC 5.2 V, 1 A
Allowable operating
temperature
0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)
(10°C to 35°C (50°F to 95°F) during charging)
Dimensions (mm) 66 x 28 x 47 (2-5/8” x 1-1/8” x 1-7/8”) (W x H x D:
excluding cord and AC plug)
Mass Approx. 71 g (0.16 lbs)
Battery Pack (BN-VG114U)
Item Details
Power voltage 3.6 V
Capacity 1400 mAh
Dimensions (mm) 31 x 21.5 x 43 (1-1/4” x 7/8” x 1-3/4”) (W x H x D)
Mass Approx. 40 g (0.09 lbs)
Memo :
0
The specifications and appearance of this product are subject to changes
for further improvement without prior notice.
Specifications
214
0212MYH-SW-VMC2A
© 2012 JVC KENWOOD corporation
211


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for JVC GZ-EX250 at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of JVC GZ-EX250 in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 61,56 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of JVC GZ-EX250

JVC GZ-EX250 User Manual - English - 60 pages


The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info